Astra H OwnersManual - Jan07 PDF

Owner’s Manual
ASTRA
Operation, Safety and Maintenance
©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.
A ST R A
Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts, is not
permitted without prior written consent from Vauxhall Motors
Ltd.
All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly
reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this
manual are based on the latest production information
available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without
notice.
Edition: January 2007.
TS 1612-B-07
VAUXHALL Astra
Operation, Safety, Maintenance

Data specific to your ve hicle
Please enter your vehicle’s data here to keep it ea sily accessible.
This information is available under the section "Technical da ta " as well as on the identification plate and in the Serv ice Booklet.
Fuel
Designati on
Engine oil
Gra de
Viscosity
Tyre pressure
Tyre si ze for loa d wit h 1 p erson and wi th full load
lig ht lugga ge
S ummer tyres Front Rear Front Rear
Winter tyres Front Rear Front Rear
Weights
Perm issi ble gross vehicle weight
– EC k erb weight
= Loading
Your Astra When this Manual refers to a workshop This sym bol signifies:
is an intelligent c om bina tion of forward- visit, we recommend your Vauxhall 6 Continue read ing on next pa ge.
looking technology, impressiv e safety , Authorised Repairer. 3 Items m arked with an asterisk are not
env ironmenta l friendliness a nd economy. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers provide fitted to all v ehicles (model variants,
It now lies with you to drive your vehicle first class service at reasonable prices. engine op tions, models specific to one
safely and ensure that it perform s country, optional equipment, Genuine
You will rec eive quick, reliable and
perfectly. This O wner’s Manual provides Vauxhall Parts and Acc essories).
indiv idua l service.
you with all the necessary information to
that end. Exp erienced mechanics, trained by 9 Warnin g
Vauxhall, work according to specific
Make sure y our pa ssengers a re awa re Vauxhall instructions. Text marked 9 Warning provides
of the p ossible risk of accid ent and injury information on risk of accident or injury.
The O wner’s Ma nual should alwa ys be kept
which may result from im proper use of the Disregard of the instructions may lead to
vehic le. in the vehic le: R eady to hand in the g lov e
compartment. injuries or endanger life.
You m ust alway s comply w ith the sp ecific Inform your passengers accordingly.
laws of the c ountry that y ou are travelling Make us e of the Owner’s Manual:
through. These laws ma y differ from the z The "In Brief" section will give you an
Y ellow arrows in the illustrations serve as
inform ation in this Ow ner’s Manual. initial overv iew. points of reference or indicate some action
z The ta ble of contents at the beg inning to be performed.
of the owner’s manual and within the Black arrows in the illustrations indicate
individual chapters will show y ou where
a reaction or a second action to be
every thing is. performed.
z Its index will help you find what you
Direc tional da ta, e.g. left or right, or front
want. or back, in the descriptions alway s relate to
z It w ill fa miliarise you with the the direction of travel.
sophisticated technology. Thank y ou for choosing a Vaux hall. We
z It w ill increase y our pleasure in your wish you many hours of plea surable
vehicle. driving.
z It w ill help you to handle your vehic le
expertly . Your Vauxhal l Tea m
The O wner’s Manual is designed to be
clearly laid out and easily understood.
Contents Comm itment to c ustomer
satisfaction:
In Brief . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... . 2
K eys, Doors, Windows, TwinTop ..... .... .. 28
Our ai m: to k eep you happy with your S eats, Interior ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 64
vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers Instrum ents, Controls ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 112
offer first-class serv ice a t competitiv e Lighting ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 143
prices. Experienced, factory-trained Infotainment system . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 151
technicians w ork according to factory C lim ate c ontrol . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 154
instructions. Y our Authorised Repa irer can Driving and op eration ... .... ..... .... ..... .... 176
supply you with GEN UINE VAU XHALL- S elf-help, Vehicle care ... .... ..... .... ..... .... 241
APPRO VED PARTS , which hav e und ergone
S ervice, Maintenance ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 294
stringent quality and precision chec ks, and
Technical data . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 308
of course useful and a ttrac tiv e
VAUXHALL-APPROVED AC CESSO RIES. Index . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 354
Our nam e i s your guara ntee!
For d eta ils of the
Va uxhall Authorised Rep airer Netw ork,
please r ing this number; 0845 090 2044
2 In Brief
In Brief
Pict ure no: 16968t.tif Picture no: 17333t.tif

To unlock and open the vehic le: To unlock an d open the vehicle
Press bu tton q , with the Open&Start System 3 :
pull door handle Bring electronic key into th e
6 Door locks – see pag e 47, reception area of the vehicle,
key s – see page 28, pull handle
electronic im mobiliser – see pag e 29, 6 Open&S tart Sy stem 3 – see page 32.
ra dio remote control – see page 30,
central locking – see page 38,
anti-theft protection 3 – see p age 39,
Vauxhall a la rm system 3 – see pag e 44,
Tw inTop roof operation 3 – see pag e 56.
In Brief 3
Pi cture no: 16969t.tif Pict ure no: 16970t.tif Picture no: 16971t.tif
To unlock and o pen th e luggage To adjust front seat: Adjust front seat backrests:
compartment: Pull h andle, slide seat, Turn handwheel
Press button q on radio remo te release handle Move bac krest to suit sea ting position.
control, or fo r the 6 Seat – pa ge 64, seat position – p age 67. Do not lea n on seat back rest whilst
Open& Start System 3: adjusting it.
Bring electronic key into the 9 Warning
6 Seat – page 64, seat position – page 67.
reception area of the vehic le,
Imp ortant: Do not sit nea rer than 10
pu ll button below handle inches (25 cm ) from the steering wheel, to
6 Open&S tart-S ystem 3 – page 32, permit safe airbag dep loy ment.
Radio remote control – page 30,
Central locking system – page 38,
Vauxhall alarm system 3 – page 44.
4 In Brief
To adjust front seat height 3: To adjust front seat inclination 3: Tip the front seat backs
Operate lever o n ou tboard side of Pull inner lever on front of seat, forward 3:
seat adjust inclination, release lever, Lift release lever,
Pump action on lever engage seat in po sition tilt seat bac k forward,
up: seat higher Ad just the inclination by distributing body lower release lever,
down: seat lower weight. seat back is en gaged in tilted
position 3,
6 Seat – page 64, sea t position – page 67. 6 Seat – pa ge 64, seat position – p age 67. slide seat forwards 3
To straighten the seat, slide b ack and it
eng ages in its origina l position 3. Raise
release lev er 3 , straighten seat ba ck, lower
release lever, seat b ack eng ages.
The seat bac k can only be tipped forwards
from an upright position.
Panoramic windscreen 3: before folding
the seat, push the head restraints d ow n
and c lose the sun visors.
6 Sea t – pag e 64.
In Brief 5
Pi cture no: 16976t.tif Pict ure no: 16981t.tif

To adjust head restraint height of To fit seat belt:
front and rear ou tboard seats: Draw seat belt smooth ly from
Press button to release, adjust inertia reel, guide over sho ulder
height, engage in position and engage in buckle
6 Head restra ints – see p age 68, The seat b elt must not be twisted at any
adjust rear centre head restraint – see point. The lap belt m ust lie snugly a gainst
page 68, the body . The front seat backrests must not
head restraint position – see pag e 69, be tilted back too far (recommended m ax.
head restraint removal – see page 69. tilting a ngle approx . 25°).
To relea se belt, press red button on belt
buckle.
6 Three-point seat belts – see page 85,
Vauxhall Full Size airbag sy stem –
see p age 92,
seat position – see page 67.
6 In Brief
Pi cture no: 16977t.tif Pict ure no: 16978t.tif Picture no: 18437T.tif
Adjusting interior mirror: To adjust exterior m irrors Electrical exterior mirrors 3
Swivel mirror housing manually: adjust:
Swiv el lev er on underside of mirror housing From inside, swivel lever in Four-way switch in driver’s door
to red uce daz zle a t nig ht. required direction Press mirror sw itch right or left: Four-way
6 Mirrors – p age 48, 6 Mirrors – see page 48, switch adjusts corresponding mirror.
automatic anti-dazz le interior mirror – aspherical ex terior mirror – see pa ge 48, 6 Mirrors – see p age 48,
page 49. folding exterior m irror – page 48, aspherical exterior mirror – see page 48,
heated ex terior mirror – pa ge 157. folding exterior mirror – page 48,
hea ted exterior m irror – page 157.
In Brief 7
Steering wheel lock and ignition: Steering wheel lo ck and ignition Steerin g wh eel adjustment:
Turn key to position 1. Move on vehic les with Open&Start Move lever down , adju st height
steering wheel somewhat to system 3: and distance, move lever up,
release loc k Make sure electronic key is in the engage
Positions: interior reception range and Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is
0 = Ignition off press the Start/Stop button. stationary and steering colum n loc k is
1 = Steering released, ig nition off Disengage the steering wheel released.
2 = Ignition on loc k by moving the steering wheel 6 Vauxhall Full Size airbag sy stem –
for diesel engines: preheating slightly pag e 92.
3 = Starting To start the vehicle, also operate brake or
6 Starting – pa ge 17, clutch p edal.
electronic immobiliser – page 29, To lock the steering wheel, switch ignition
parking the vehicle – page 18. off by pressing the Start/S top button, open
driver’s door and engage steering w heel.
Do not a llow vehicle to move whilst doing
this.
6 Starting – page 17,
electronic im mobiliser – pa ge 29,
parking the v ehicle – pag e 18.
8 In Brief
In Brief 9
Page Pa ge Page
1 Side air v ents ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 156 6 Turn signal light, hea dlight flash, 13 S ta rter switch
dipped bea m, high beam ..... .... ..... . 11 with imm ob iliser . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... . 7
2 Front pa ssenger airbag .... .... ..... .... . 93
Switch off delay on 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... 148 and
3 Centre air v ents .... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 156 Pa rk ing lights 3 ... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 148 sensor pa nel for emergency operation
4 Central information display for Cruise control 3 .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 212 O pen&Start system 3 . ..... .... ..... .... .. 35
time, date, outside temperature, 7 Remote control 14 Accelerator pedal .... .... ..... .... . 199, 199
infotainment sy stem 3 , on steering wheel 3 . .... .... ..... .... ..... 151 15 Brake pedal .... .... ..... .... .. 199, 221, 221
check control 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 138
8 Instruments . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 112
Trip computer 3 ... .... ..... .... .... .128, 134 16 C lutch pedal 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 199
Clim ate control system 3 . .... ..... ... 168 9 Horn ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 12 17 S teering w heel a djustment . ..... .... .... . 7
Driv er’s Airbag .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 93
5 Heated seat (left) 3 . ..... .... .... ..... ... 157 18 S ta rt/stop button 3 .... ..... .... ..... 17, 32
Deflation 10 Windscreen wiper,
detection system 3 .. ..... .... .... ..... .... 217 wind screen wash system, 19 Ashtray 3 ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 108
Tyre pressure headlight wash system 3 and C igarette lighter 3 .. .... ..... .... ..... .... 107
monitoring sy stem 3 ..... .... .... ..... .... 218 rear window w ash 20 C lim ate c ontrol .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 154
Parking distance sensor 3 .... ..... ... 214 sy stem ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .. 12, 13, 141
Haza rd warning lights .. .... .... ..... .... .. 12 21 Infotainment system 3 .... .... ..... .... 151
11 Pa rk ing lights, dipped beam ... ..... 143
Central locking system . .... .... ..... .... ..40 22 Glove compartment ... .... 34, 110, 156
Instrument illumination ... ..... .... ..... 148
SPO RT mode 3 ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 210 Fog tail lig ht .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 145
Heated seat (right) 3 ... .... .... ..... ... 157 Fog lights 3 ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 145
Head lig ht range adjustment 3 .... 146
12 Bonnet release lev er . .... .... ..... .... .... 241
10 In Brief
Control indicato rs A Engine electronics,

T Winter prog ramm e of
0 O pen&S tart system , fault , gearbox el ect ronics3, aut omatic transmission 3 or
see pages 32, 112. immob iliser,
Easytroni c 3,
Diesel fuel filter 3 , see pages 180, 186, 193.
I Eng ine oi l pressure, fault,
see page 113. see p ages 29, 115, 182, 188,
196, 206.
1 SPO RT mode of aut omatic
tr ansm issi on 3 or Easytronic 3,
R Brak e system , clut ch system,
see pages 179, 185, 192.
see pages 114, 221, 302. j Easytronic 3 , st art engine 3
see p ages 115, 177.
v Airb ag syst em s, belt tensi oners, y Seat occupancy recogniti on 3,
see page 99.
deployable ant i-roll ba rs 3, IDS+ Continuous Dam ping Control 3 ,
see pages 87, 98, 104. SPORT m ode 3, Z Exhaust emi ssion 3 ,
see p ages 210, 211. see pages 117, 205.
v Elec tronic St abili ty Progra mme
(ESP® P lu s) 3, S Engine oil l ev el 3,
see page 208.
u Anti -lock Bra ke Syst em ,
see p ages 116, 298. see page 223.
X Seat bel t 3, 8 Exterior light s, ! Prehea ting system 3,
see pages 88, 114. see p ages 116, 143. Diesel parti cle filter 3,
see page 118.
Q Door open, r Pa rking distance sensor 3 ,
see page 115. see p age 214. w Deflati on det ec tion system 3 ,
tyre pressure moni toring
p Alternat or, O Turn sig nal lig ht s,
system 3,
see page 115. see p ages 11, 116. see pages 118, 217, 219.
W Coola nt temperat ure, Y Fuel level,
see pages 115, 300. see p ages 116, 119, 202. B Ad aptiv e for ward lighting 3,
fault
see pages 147, 150.
> Fog l ights 3,
m C ruise cont rol 3,
see page 212.
C Main beam ,
see p ages 11, 117.
r Fog t ail li ght,

In Brief 11
Light
switch: Headlight flash, main beam and Switch on tu rn signal lights:
7 = Off dipped beam: Right = Move stalk up
8 = Parking lights Headlight = Pull stalk Left = Move stalk down
9 = Dipped beam or main flash towards
6 Turn signal lights – page 144.
beam steering wheel
AUTO = Automatic dipped Main beam = Push stalk
beam activation 3 Dipped beam = Push stalk
forwards again
Press button: or pull toward
> = Fog lights 3 steering wheel
r = Fog tail light 6 Main beam, headlight flash – page 144.
6 Lighting – p age 143,
head lig ht control indicator – page 140.
12 In Brief
Hazard warning lights: Activate horn: Win dscreen wiper:
on = press ¨ Press j in c entre of steering Move stalk upward
off = press ¨ again wh eel § = off
6 Vauxhall Full S ize airbag system –
6 Hazard w arning lights – p age 145. $ = timed interval wipe
page 93,
remote control on steering wheel 3 – % = slow
page 151. & = fast
Move stalk down from p osition §: Single
swipe.
6 Windscreen wiper – pag e 141,
adjustable tim ed interval wipe 3 –
pag e 141,
further notes – p ages 291, 303.
In Brief 13
Automatic wiping with rain Operating windscreen and Activate rear screen wiper 3 an d
sen sor 3: headlight wash systems 3 : wash system 3:
Move stalk upward Pull stalk towards steering wheel Wiper on = Stalk forwards
$ = automatic wiping with 6 Windscreen and headlight w ash sy stems Wiper on = Stalk forwards
rain sensor – page 142, again
further notes – pages 291, 303
§ = off Wash = Hold stalk fully
6 Windscreen wiper – page 141, fo rwards
further notes – pa ges 291, 303. 6 Rear screen wiper and wa sh system –
pag e 142,
further notes – p ages 291, 303.
14 In Brief
Heated rear window, To demist or defrost windows: Set autom atic mo de o n climate
heated exterior mirrors: Set air distribution to l, con trol system 3:
on = press Ü ro tary switch for temperature Press AUTO,
off = press Ü again and air flow cloc kwise; pre-select tem perature with
Air con ditioning system 3: rotary knob,
6 Air c onditioning – pa ge 154, also press bu ttons n ; open air vents
heated rear window – page 157. Automatic air conditioning 6 Climate control system 3 – page 168.
system 3:
press buttons n and v ,
turn rotary switch for
temperature clockwise,
air flo w to A;
Climate c ontrol system 3 :
press button V
6 C lim ate control system 3 – p age 154.
In Brief 15
Manual transmission: Easytronic 3 : Automatic transmissio n 3 :
Reverse: with the vehicle stationary, w ait N = Idle P = Park position
3 seconds after de-clutc hing and then pull o = D rive positio n R = Reverse gear
up the button on the selector lever a nd
enga ge the gea r. + = Higher gear N = Neutral (idle)
If the gear does not engag e, set the lever in - = Lower gear D = Automatic gear selectio n
neutral, release the clutch pedal and A/M = Chan ge between 3 = 1st to 3rd gear
depress again; then repeat gear selection. Automatic and Manual 2 = 1st an d 2nd gear
mo de 1 = 1st gear
R = Reverse gear (with
S ta rting only possible in P or N. To m ov e
selector lever lock) from P, switch on ignition, depress foot
The selector lever must alway s be mov ed in brak e and press button on selector lever.
the appropriate direction as far as it will
Press button on selector lev er to engage P
go. Upon release, it autom atically returns
or R.
to the centre position. Pay heed to the
P only when v ehicle is stationary, first
gear/mode ind icator in the transm ission
apply hand brake
display .
R only when v ehicle is stationary
The foot brake must be depressed when
starting. 6 Automatic tra nsmission 3 – page 184.
6 Ea sy tronic 3 – pa ge 176.
16 In Brief
To select P or R, press button on selector Before starting off, check:

lever. z Tyre pressure and tyre condition –
P only w ith v ehicle stopped, first apply pages 225, 337.
handbrake
z Engine oil level a nd fluid levels in engine
R only w hen vehicle is sta tionary
compartment – see pages 298 to 305.
6 Automatic transm ission 3 – see
page 184. z All windows, mirrors, exterior lig hting
and number plates are free from dirt,
snow and ice a nd operational.
z Do not place any objec ts in front of the
rear window, on the instrument panel or
in the area in which the a irba gs inflate.
z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are
Pi cture no: 17330t.tif correctly a djusted .
Automatic transmission
z Check brakes.
with ActiveSelect 3:
P = Park position
R = Reverse gear
N = Neu tral (idle)
D = Au to matic gear selection
Selector lever in D to left:
Manual mode
+ = Higher gear
- = Lower gear
P or N must b e engaged when starting .
To move from P or N , switch on ig nition,
depress foot brak e a nd press button on
selector lever.
In Brief 17
Press button again to repeat the starting

procedure or switch off the eng ine.
To turn on the ignition, do not press the
brak e or c lutch pedal; just press the button
briefly .
Do not start unless vehicle is stationary .
6 Open&S tart-System 3 – page 32,
Electronic immobiliser – page 29,
Diesel fuel system – page 242.

To start engine: To start engine with Open&Start
Operate clutch and brake, system 3:
au tomatic transmission 3 in P The electronic key must be inside
or N, reception area inside the c ar,
Easytronic 3: Depress brake, operate clu tc h or brake,
do not ac celerate, Automatic transmission 3 in P
Petrol engine: Turn key to 3; or N, Easytronic 3: Depress brake,
Diesel engine: Tu rn key to 2, when do not accelerate,
control indic ator ! go es out1) Petrol engin e: Press bu tton;
turn key to 3; release key once Diesel engine: Briefly press
engine is running button; when control indicator !
Before restarting or sw itching off the goes out 1 ) press button again for
engine, turn key back to 0. 1 sec ond; release bu tton on ce
To switch on the ignition, only turn the k ey engine is running
to 2.
6 Elec tronic imm obiliser – pag e 29,
Diesel fuel system – page 242.
1)
Prehea ting system switches o n only if ou tsid e
temp era ture is lo w.
18 In Brief
To activa te the mec hanical anti-theft

locking system 3 and the Vauxhall alarm
system 3 press button p tw ic e or with
O pen&Start system 3 touch sensor in one
of the front door handles twice.
6 Further information – see pa ges 29, 198,
O pen&Start system – pa ge 32,
radio remote control – see p age 30,
central loc king sy stem – see page 38,
Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 44,
TwinTop roof operation 3 – page 56.
Vehicle decom missioning – see page 307.

Releasing th e hand brake: Parking the vehic le:
Raise lever slightly, Apply hand brake firmly,
press lock bu tto n, engine off, ignition off,
lower lever fully loc k steering wheel,
6 Handbrake – pa ge 222. loc k vehicle
To lock , press button p of ra dio remote
control for O pen&Start system 3 touch
sensor in a door handle on the front doors.
With O pen&Start system 3, the driver’s
door must b e opened to lock the steering
wheel.
In Brief 19
Advice wh en parking: z O n vehicles with automa tic That was the most important
z Do not p ark the v ehicle on an easy transm ission 3 the key can only be information in brief for your first
flam mable surface. The high withdrawn when the selector lever is in drive in your vehicle.
temperature of the exhaust sy stem could position P. For the O pen&Start Sy stem 3,
ig nite the surface. "P" fla shes in the gear display for a few
seconds if P is not engaged or the
z Alwa ys apply the hand brak e firmly. handbrake is not applied .
Ap ply the ha nd brake as firm ly as
possible on uphill or downhill slopes. z O n vehicles with Easytronic 3 control The other pages o f this chapter
To reduce opera ting forc es, depress foot indicator R flashes for a few second s con tain a summary of the
after the ignition is switched off if the
brake at the same time. noteworthy functions of your
hand brak e has not been applied– see
z Close the wind ow s and sun roof 3 or vehicle.
page 182.
Tw inTop.
z With the O pen&Start system 3 the
z For manual transmission, select first or eng ine can only be switched off when the
reverse; for automatic transm ission 3 car is stationa ry .
move selector lev er to P, for Easytronic 3
select first or rev erse before switching off z Turn steering wheel until the steering The remain ing ch apters of the
the ignition (note gear display , see lock p erceptibly eng ages (Anti-theft Owner’s Manual contain
pages 177, 184, 191). protection) after first withdrawing the impo rtant information on
ignition key ; for Op en&Start-Sy stem 3 operatio n, safety and
switch off ignition and open driver’ s maintenance as well as a
door.
com plete index.
z The engine cooling fans may run a fter
the engine has been switched off – see
page 297.
6 Further information – pages 306, 307.
20 In Brief
Vauxhall Full Size airbag system Side airb ag system 3 C ur tain ai rbag syst em 3
The Vauxhall Full Size airbag system The sid e airbag is triggered in the event of The curtain a irba g system triggers in case
consists of several separate sy stems. a side-on c ollision to form a safety cushion of a side-on collision and provid es a safety
for the driver or front passenger in the barrier in the hea d area on the respective
Front airb ag system respective door area. This substantially side of the vehic le. This reduces the risk of
The front airbag system will be triggered in reduces the risk of injury to the upp er body injury to the hea d considerab ly in case of a
the event of a serious ac cident involving a and pelv is. side-on collision.
frontal impact and forms safety cushions
for the driver and front passenger. The 6 Vauxhall Full Size airbag sy stem –
forward movement of the driver and front pag e 92.
passenger is checked and the risk of
injuries to the upper body a nd head
thereby substantially reduced.
In Brief 21
Pi cture no: 17011t.tif Picture no: S0013209.ti f Picture no: 17013t.tif

Active head restraints 3 on front Operating menus in th e S elec tion using multi-function button 3:
seats information display 3 rotate and press multi-function button.
In the event of a rear-end impa ct, the Menu options are selected using menus To exit a m enu, turn the m ulti-func tion
active head restraints tilt forward a little. and using the arrow keys the multi-function button left or right to Return or M ain and
The head is more effectiv ely supported by button of the I nfotainment system 3 or the select.
the head restraint and the danger of left-hand adjuster wheel 3 on the steering S elec tion with left adjuster wheel on
injuries caused by whiplash in the neck wheel. The respective menu options are steering wheel 3: turn adjuster wheel and
area is reduced. shown on the d isplay . press.
Active head restraints are id entified by the Select with the arrow keys 3: press right or 6 Informa tion Display – page 122.
lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint left key.
guide sleev es.
6 Headrests – page 68.
22 In Brief
Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36

BC 1 All values
BC 2
257.0 Coolant level
1
miles
Timer
Ø 40 mph ch eck
Tyres
7.0
8
gal
Ø 31.0 mpg
OK
Trip computer 3 Check co ntro l 3 Remo te control o n steering
The trip computers provide information on The check control software monitors wheel 3
driving data, which is continually recorded The functions of the infotainm ent system 3
z Fluid levels
and evaluated electronically . and the informa tion display can be
z Tyre pressure 3 operated w ith the rem ote control on the
Functions:
z Rang e z Radio remote control battery steering wheel.
z Instantaneous consumption z Vauxhall alarm system 3 Further information is availab le in the
z Distance tra velled infota inm ent system operating
z Av erage speed z Imp ortant exterior lights, including instructions.
z Effective consump tion cables and fuses.
6 Remote control on steering wheel 3 –
z Av erage consump tion 6 C heck-Control 3 – page 138. pag e 151, Infotainment System –
z Stop watch
pag e 151.
z Ty re pressure 3
6 Trip computer 3 – pa ges 128, 134.
In Brief 23
Twin Audio 3 Open&Start system with Sport mo de 3
Twin Aud io allows rear seat occupants the electronic key and radio remove To act ivat e
choice between the audio source played on control 3 Press button SPORT.
the infotainment system or a separate The O pen&Start system allows the vehic le S PO RT mode is used to change
audio source. to be lock ed and unlocked, including dam ping 3, steering 3, throttle
O nly an audio source that is not currently mechanical a nti-theft locking system 3 app lic ation a nd the shift p oint for
active on the infotainment system can be and the Va ux ha ll alarm sy stem 3 without a Easy tronic 3 and automatic
controlled using Twin Audio. mechanical k ey and the engine to b e transmission 3 while driving.
started and stopped using a start/stop
Two headphone connections are availab le, button. All the driver has to do is carry the Damp ing and steering become more direct
with separate volume controls. and p rov ide b etter contact with the road
electronic k ey around w ith him.
surfac e. The engine reacts more quickly to
Further information is available in the 6 O pen&Start S ystem 3 – p age 32. acc elerator m ov ements.
infotainment sy stem operating
instructions. With Easytronic 3 and automatic
transmission 3, the shift times are
6 Tw in Audio 3 – pa ge 152.
shortened a nd shifting takes p lace a t
higher revs (not with cruise control
ena bled 3).
6 Sport mode 3 – page 210.
24 In Brief
Ü Board Computer
BC 1
BC 2
Timer
Tyres
Deflation D etection System After tyre pressure is corrected or a ty re or Tyre pressure monitoring
(D DS) 3 wheel is c hanged, the system m ust be system 3
initialised by pressing the DDS button.
The d eflation detection sy stem The tyre p ressure monitoring system
continuously monitors the speed of all 6 Tyre deflation detection system 3 – continually checks the pressure and speed
wheels while driving. If a ty re loses page 217. of all four wheels while driving.
pressure, it g rows smaller and therefore A pressure sensor is insta lled in ea ch wheel.
rotates m ore quic kly than the other wheels. The inflation pressures of the individual
If the system detects a difference in speed, wheels are tra nsmitted to a controller,
the c ontrol indicator w illuminates in red. where they are compared.
The current tyre pressures ca n be
displayed on the graphical informa tion
display or the colour information d isplay 3.
Deviating tyre pressures are displayed in
the form of messages on the information
display whilst driving.
6 Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 –
pag e 217.
In Brief 25
Pi cture no: 17126t.tif Picture no: Picture no: 17979t.tif

Adaptive Forward Lighting Curve lig hting Panoramic windscreen 3
(AFL) 3 The Xenon light bea m pivots based on
To open:
steering wheel position a nd speed (from
improves lig hting in curves (curve lighting ) Turn the handle to the right and m ov e the
approx. 6 m ph / 10 km /h).
on vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlight roof lining rearward to a suitable position.
system. Motorwa y lig hting
To close:
At higher speeds and continuous straight
Move the roof lining forward to a suitable
ahead trav el, the dipped beam
position. When moved all the w ay forw ard,
autom atic ally raises slightly , thereby
the roof lining enga ges in position.
increasing headlight range.
6 Panoram ic roof 3 – p age 53.
6 Adaptive driving lights 3 – page 147.
26 In Brief
Parking distance senso r 3 Cargo box 3 FlexOrganizer 3
When rev erse gear is selected, the Pa rk ing Collapsible box to divide the lugga ge The side walls contain retaining strips,
distance sensor sw itc hes itself on compartment. where va rious components can be
automatically. attached to divide the lugg age
The cargo b ox may only be loaded when
compa rtm ent or fasten loads.
The p arking dista nce sensor can also be the back rests a re eng aged in an upright
activated at speeds of less than 15 m ph (25 position. The sy stem consists of
km/h) by pressing the r button on the z Adapters
When removing, start w ith the right half.
instrument panel. z Variable partition net
6 C argo Box 3 – pag e 81. z Mesh pockets for the side walls
If the v ehicle approaches an obstacle when
z Hooks in the luggage compartment
rev ersing, a series of signals can be heard
in the vehicle interior. The interva l between 6 FlexO rg aniz er 3 – pag e 80.
the signals bec om es shorter as the
distance is reduc ed. If the distance is less
than 30 c m, the signal w ill be c ontinuous.
6 Park ing distance sensor 3 – p age 214.
In Brief 27
The roof is opera ted w ith the buttons on

the roof console abov e the mirror or with
the remote control.
To improve luggage compa rtm ent
acc essibility, the electric loading aid makes
it possib le to raise the open roof when it is
stowed in the luggage compartment.
6 TwinTop – see page 56.

Luggage compartment cover, Astra TwinTop
Estate With TwinTop, a c onvertible ha rd top , Astra
To open: unites the benefits of a coup e with those of
Press ha nd le on luggage compa rtm ent a convertible.
cover down. The cover automa tica lly To op tim ise safety, the Astra TwinTop is
unrolls. equipped with a rollover protection system
6 Luggage compa rtm ent cover 3 – with reinforced windscreen frame and the
page 76. choice of fix ed or deployable anti-roll ba rs
in addition to the front and sid e a irba g
sy stems.
28 Keys, Doors, Windows, TwinTop
Keys, Doors, Windows, Replacement keys

The key number is specified in the vehic le
TwinTop docum ents and in the C ar Pass 3.
The key is a c onstituent of the electronic
immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall
Authorised Repairer g uarantees problem -
free op eration of the electronic
immobiliser.
When electronic k eys of the Open&S tart
sy stem are being replaced , all keys must be
ha nded to the dea ler for programming.
Replacem ent keys ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 28
Ca r Pass... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 28 Keep the sp are k ey in a safe spot.
Key with foldaw ay key section 3 . ..... . 28 Locks, see pa ge 291, Op en&Start system, Picture no: 17027t.tif
Electronic immobiliser... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 29 electronic k eys, see pa ge 32. Key with foldaway key section 3
Press button to extend. Press button to
Store personal vehicle settings in the
vehicle key 3 ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 30 Car Pass retrac t; key section eng ages audibly .
Radio remote control with 3 The Ca r Pass contains a ll of the vehicle’s
mec hanical key . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 30 data and should therefore not be k ept in
O pen&Start system 3 ... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 32 the vehicle.
Central locking system . .... ..... .... .... ..... . 38 Have your Ca r Pa ss on hand when
Fault when locking or unlocking... ..... . 42 consulting a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer.
Lug gage compartment .... ..... .... .... ..... . 43
Vauxhall alarm system 3. ..... .... .... ..... . 44
Child safety locks 3 . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 47
Ex terior mirrors..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 48
Interior mirror .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 49
Electric windows 3 ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 50
Panoramic windscreen 3 . ..... .... .... ..... . 53
Sun roof 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 54
TwinTop ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 56
Keys, Doors, Windows, TwinTo p 29
Electronic immo biliser Control i nd icator for imm obiliser A If control indicator A illuminates after the
The sy stem checks whether the vehicle m ay Control indica tor A illuminates briefly engine is started, there is a fault in the
be sta rted with the mec hanical key or when the ig nition is sw itched on. engine electronics or transm ission
electronic key of the O pen&S ta rt sy stem 3 electronics 3 (see pages 182, 188, 196, 206)
If the control indicator flashes w hen the
that is being used . If the key is recognised or there is water in the diesel fuel filter 3 (see
ignition is on, there is a fault in the sy stem;
as "authorised " the v ehicle ca n b e started. page 300).
the engine cannot be started. S witc h off
The chec k ta kes place v ia a transponder in the ignition and then rep eat the start Not e
the k ey. attempt. The immobiliser does not lock the doors.
The electronic imm ob iliser activates itself Therefore, after leaving the v ehicle a lways
If the control indicator A continues to
automatically after the key has been lock it and switch on the Vaux hall alarm
flash, try to start the engine using the
rem ov ed from the ignition or, with the system 3 – see p ages 38, 45.
second key and c ontact a workshop for
O pen&Start system 3, w hen the engine is assista nce.
switched off by pressing the Start/Stop
button.
The c od e number of the electronic
immobiliser is giv en in the C ar Pass.
Store person al veh icle settin gs in

the vehic le key 3
The last settings selec ted
z for the climate control system 3
z information display 3
z Infotainment system 3
z instrum ent illumination
are stored autom atically depending on the
vehic le key used .
Different settings stored for ea ch vehicle
key are retrieved autom atically on use of
the v ehicle key concerned . Pict ure no: 17029t.tif Picture no: 17030t.tif
Radio remote c ontrol with 3 O n the Astra TwinTop, the roof can also be
Ea ch time the vehicle is loc ked, the settings opened or closed with the remote
mec hanical key
are sa ved again. control 3.
Depend ing on v ehicle eq uipm ent level, one
of the rem ote controls shown on this page The ra dio remote control has a rang e of
will be used. app rox . 5 metres. This ra ng e can be
affec ted by outside influences. Aim the
Radio rem ote control in version with
remote control at the vehicle to operate.
Open&S tart sy stem 3 see page 32.
Handle the radio rem ote control with care,
The radio remote control is integrated in
protec t it from moisture and high
the key.
temperatures a nd avoid unnecessary
Used to operate: operation.
z central lock ing sy stem,
The ha zard warning lights come on to
z mechanical anti-theft locking system 3,
indicate that the remote c ontrol is
z Vauxhall alarm system 3.
operational.
Depend ing on the equip ment level of the
vehicle 3, the windows of vehicles with
electric windows in a ll doors 3 can be
op ened or closed from outside using the
ra dio remote control. See pa ge 41.
Centra l locki ng, mechanic al anti -theft Fault

lock ing system 3, If the centra l locking system ca nnot be
see page 38. op erated with the rad io remote control, it
may be d ue to the following:
Vauxha ll ala rm system 3,
see page 44. z The ra nge of the ra dio remote control
has been exceeded.
Elec tric w indows 3,
see page 50. z Radio remote control battery v oltage is
too low. Ba ttery replacement - see right
Astra Tw inTop,
hand column.
see page 56.
z Frequent, repeated op eration of the
radio remote c ontrol outside the
rec eption range of the vehic le (e.g. too
far from vehicle, remote control is then Picture no: 17031t.tif
no longer recognised). Remote control K ey with folda way k ey section
synchronisation - see right hand c olumn. Extend key , see page 28. Open radio
z If the central locking system is remote control. Replace battery - battery
overloa ded as a result of repeated typ e, see pa ge 348 - noting installation
opera tion at short intervals. The power position. Close radio remote control.
sup ply is cut off for a brief period. Mak e sure that you dispose of old batteries
z Interference from hig her-power rad io in accordance with env ironmental
wav es from other sources. protec tion regulations.
To eliminate the cause of a fault, we K ey with fix ed key section
recommend contacting a workshop for Hav e the battery cha nged by a workshop.
assista nce. Synchronise the radio remot e c ont rol
Open driver’ s d oor w ith k ey , see page 42. aft er m alfuncti ons or b attery change
After c hanging the battery , unlock the
Rem ote control b attery rep lacement door w ith the key in the lock. Turning on the
Replace the battery as soon as the range
ignition will sy nchronise the radio rem ote
of the radio remote control begins to control.
shrink.
Open& Start system 3 The electronic key must be within the When the S tart/Stop b utton is pressed, the
The O pen&S ta rt sy stem allows the v ehicle externa l reception rang e ab out 1 m etre system re-check s the authorisation. The
to be locked and unlocked , including the from the vehicle in order to lock and unlock electronic key has to be recognised in the
mechanic al anti-theft locking system 3 the vehicle. interior in order to d o this. After the key has
and the Vauxhall alarm system 3, and the been authorised the ignition switches on.
If the electronic key is rec og nized as
engine to be started and stopped without At the sam e time, the electronic
"authorised" , the vehicle can be unlock ed
a mecha nica l key. All the driver has to do is imm ob iliser is switched off a nd the electro-
by pulling a door handle or the knob
keep the key on his person. mechanical steering column lock is
beneath the tailgate hand le and the doors
deactivated. Pressing the Start/S top button
Dep ending on the equipment level of the and the tailga te can b e opened.
aga in with the brake or clutch pedal
vehic le 3 , the w indows of vehicles with depressed or in P or N with automatic
electric windows in all doors 3 can be transmission 3 starts the engine. Press the
opened or closed from outside using the button for at lea st one second with the
rem ote control of the electronic key. S ee vehicle stationary or hold until the eng ine
page 41. starts.
O n the Astra TwinTop, the roof can also be
opened or closed with the remote control 3
of the electronic key.
If the brake or clutch peda l is depressed ,

the engine ca n be started right away with
a single press on the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the S tart/Stop b utton interrupts
the starting proced ure.
The engine and the ignition are switched
off by pressing the Start/S top button again.
The v ehicle must b e stationa ry . The
immobiliser is activ ated a t the same time.
If the ignition has been switched off and
the vehicle is stationa ry , the steering wheel
lock ac tiv ates automatically when the
driver’s door is opened or closed. Pict ure no: 17034t.tif Picture no: 17035t.tif
The electronic key m ust be within the The vehic le is locked from the outsid e with Ra dio remote control
interior reception in order to switch the the doors closed by touching the sensor The vehicle can be locked and unlocked by
ignition on or off. We recomm end that the panel in the door ha ndle of one of the front conventional means using the radio
driver carries the electronic k ey on his or doors. The electronic key must be within remote control with the b uttons on the
her p erson. If the electronic key is not the external reception range of electronic key.
recognised, try a different position for the approximately one metre from the vehic le. In ad dition, the mechanical anti-theft
key. The O pen&Start sy stem 3 does not the lock locking system and Vauxhall a larm sy stem
Do not put the electronic key in the the vehicle automatically if the electronic can be armed and disabled using the radio
luggage compartment or in front of the key is outside the external reception range remote control. Depending on the
inform ation d isplay . of approximately one metre from the equipment level of the vehicle 3 , the
vehicle. windows of vehicles with electric windows
in a ll doors 3 ca n be opened or closed from
outside using the radio remote c ontrol.
6
The rad io remote control has a ra nge of If the control indicator 0 is perma nently
approx. 5 metres. This range can be on, an error has occ urred in the system .
affected by outside influenc es. Aim the Lock or unlock vehicle using the radio
rem ote control at the v ehicle to operate. remote control or the emerg ency key if
nec essary – see pag e 42, or try using the
Handle the radio remote control with care,
spare key .
protect it from moisture and high
tem peratures and avoid unnecessary If 0 illumina tes, this can also mean that
opera tion. the steering wheel loc k is still locked : move
steering wheel to and fro a little and press
The haz ard warning lights c om e on to
S ta rt/Stop button again.
indicate tha t the remote control is
opera tional. If 0 illumina tes while d riv ing, there is a
system fa ult. Contact a w orkshop
Centra l locki ng, mechanic al anti -theft
imm ediately.
lock ing system 3, Pict ure no: 17036t.tif
see page 38. Control i nd icator for Open&St art Emergency operation – see page 35.
Vauxha ll ala rm system 3, system 0 Locka ble glov ebox, Astra TwinTop wi th
see page 44. If the control indicator flashes 0 with the O pen&Start system 3
ignition switched on or with the engine In ad dition to the electronic key of the
Elec tric w indows 3,
running an opera ting error has occurred, O pen&Start sy stem, there is a standa rd key
see page 50. e.g. the electronic key is no longer w ithin without remote control for the glove
Astra Tw inTop, the rec eption range of the vehic le interior. compa rtm ent lock.
see page 56. During the next starting procedure the
engine may not be a ble to be started. Press
Start/S top key somewhat longer to sw itch
the ignition off.
Flashing of the 0 can a lso b e an indication
of com plete failure of the electronic key. In
this case operation is only possible using
the emergency facility – see page 35.
InSP3 in the service display or an
appropriate m essag e in the information 3
display indicates that the battery of the
electronic k ey need s replacing – see
page 36.
Emergenc y operat ion Only the driver’ s door can be locked and To sta rt the engine, hold the electronic key
If the Open&Start system fails or the unlocked using the emergency key. Unlock at the marked position, dep ress b ra ke
electronic key (control indicator 0 flashes the entire vehic le as d escribed on page 42. pedal or clutch pedal or in vehicles with
or permanently on) the driver’s door can b e In the version with Vauxhall alarm automatic transmission 3 d epress brake
locked or unlock ed with the emergency key sy stem 3 the alarm m ay be triggered w hen pedal and engage P or N, Then press the
in the electronic key: press loc king the vehicle is unloc ked. Switch ignition on S ta rt/Stop button.
mechanism on underside and remove cap to deactiv ate ala rm and release the Press start/stop button for at least 1 second
toward the front by apply ing gentle steering column lock: hold electronic key a t to switch the engine off. Lock all d oors
pressure to the cap. Push emergency key marked position on the steering column except driver’ s door as described on
towards the outsid e over the detent and panelling and p ress the Start/S top button. pag e 42. Unlock driver’s door with
rem ov e. Repeat procedure if necessary . emergency k ey.
This fa cility is for emergency use only .
Replace the battery of the electronic key a s
soon as possible or hav e the sy stem
repaired. Contact a w ork shop for
assistance.
Ra dio remote control synchronisation

The radio remote control synchronises itself
automatically during every starting
procedure.

Replac ing bat tery in electronic key To replace the b attery, press the locking
Replace the battery immediately if the mechanism on the underside of the
system is no long er working prop erly or the electronic k ey and rem ov e the cover
range of the radio remote c ontrol is tow ards the front b y app lying gentle
red ucing. The need for a battery change is pressure - see page 35, fig ure 17037 T.
indicated via InSP3 in the service d isplay or, Push off cover w ith emblem on the button
in vehic les with check control 3 , by an side towards the outsid e.
appropriate message in the display. See Replace battery, for ba ttery ty pe – see
page 120. page 348, pay attention to installation
position. Enga ge c aps.
Fault in O pen&Star t system or ra dio z If the central locking system is To elim inate the fault, change the position
remote control overloa ded as a result of repeated of the elec tronic k ey or ra dio remote
If the centra l locking c annot be operated or opera tion at short intervals. The power control or change the battery in the rad io
the engine ca nnot be started, the cause sup ply is cut off for a brief period. remote control. If the fault persists, contact
may be one of the following: a work shop for assistance.
z Interference from hig her-power rad io
z Elec tronic key out of rec eption range, or wav es from other sources. Emergency operation – see page 35.
out of range of radio rem ote control.
z Radio rem ote control battery v oltag e too
low – see previous pag e for instructions
on how to c hange battery.
z Freq uent, rep eated opera tion of the
ra dio remote control outside the
recep tion range (e. g. too far from
vehicle, rem ote control is then no longer
recognised).
Cen tral locking system Open&S tart sy stem with electronic key 3 To lock
For doors, b oot lid/tailgate and tank flap. The electronic key must be within the C lose doors, lugg age com partment a nd
outside reception range of the v ehicle. tank flap.
To unlock Unlock the vehicle by pulling a door handle
Remote control with mechanica l key Rad io remote control with m echanical key
or the knob below the ta ilg ate handle
Press button q on radio remote control. Press button p on radio remote control.
– or – –
To open the door, pull the ha nd le. O pen Press button q of the electronic key’s
the lugga ge c om partment by pulling the remote control.
knob under the tailgate handle.
Mec hanical a nti-theft lock ing system 3,
9 Warning
Do not use the system if there are people
in the vehicle! The d oors cannot be
unloc ked from inside.
Pi cture no: 17034t.tif Picture no: 17043t.tif

O pen&Start system with electronic k ey 3 Rad io remote control with m echanical key
The electronic key m ust be within the All doors must be c losed . At the la test
outside reception range of the vehicle. 15 seconds after locking, p ress b utton p
There m ust be no electronic keys inside the of the ra dio remote control again.
vehic le. Touching the sensor in the door Lock buttons on all doors are positioned
handle of the driver’s or front passenger’ s such tha t doors ca nnot be opened.
door locks all doors and the lugg age
compartment If the ignition wa s on, the driver’s door
– or – – must be opened and closed once so that
Press button p of the elec tronic key’ s the vehicle can be secured .
rem ote control again.
Not e
z If the driv er’s door is not closed properly ,
the central loc king sy stem will not lock.
z To loc k the d oors from within (e.g . to
prevent unw anted entry from outside),
press central locking switch m in the
centre console.
z After unlock ing with the key in the lock
and opening the driver’ s door, the entire
vehicle is unlocked.
z If locked via the central locking system,
the doors ca n a lso be opened by pulling
the insid e door handles. The central
O pen&Start system with electronic k ey 3 Central l oc king b utton for lock ing and loc king sy stem is also unlock ed a t this
All doors must be c losed . The electronic key unl ocking the d oors from inside the time (not possible on Astra TwinTop
must b e within the outsid e reception range vehicle when the roof is open).
of the vehicle. Touch the sensor in the door Press button m in the centre console: doors z Locked doors unlock automatically in
handle of the driver’s or front passenger’ s are locked or unlocked. the event of an a ccident of a certain
door again within 15 seconds after loc king severity (to allow ex ternal help to gain
The LED in the central locking b utton m
– or – access). The haz ard warning lights a nd
illuminates for around 2 minutes after
Press button p of the elec tronic key’ s courtesy light also come on. For this to
lock ing with the remote control.
rem ote control again. occur, the k ey must b e in the starter
If the doors are loc ked from the insid e switch.
All doors are sec ured aga inst opening. during the journey using the central loc king
If the ignition was on, the driver’ s door button, the LED m illuminates
must be opened and closed once so tha t permanently .
the v ehicle can be secured. If the key is in the ignition, lock ing is only
possible if all doors a re closed.
When the mechanical anti-theft locking
sy stem 3 is ac tiv e – see previous page –
the doors cannot b e unlocked with this
button.
z With the Open&S tart sy stem 3 the

vehicle cannot be unlocked until
2 seconds after locking. Within this time,
a door handle c an be pulled or the
button beneath the tailgate handle
op erated to check whether the vehic le
is locked.
z The Op en&Start system 3 does not lock
the vehicle autom atically if the elec tronic
key is outside the reception range of the
vehicle (more than 1 metre aw ay from
the vehic le).
z When using the O pen&S tart sy stem 3,
there m ust not be an electronic key Pict ure no: 17046t.tif Picture no: 17034t.tif
inside the vehicle when locking. Operat ing the wind ow s 3 from t he Rad io remote control with m echanical key
out si de Hold button q or p on the radio remote
z The locking sensors in the door ha ndles control dep ressed until all windows ha ve
must be kept clean to ensure 9 Warning opened or com pletely closed.
unrestricted functionality of the
Open&S tart sy stem 3 . O pen&Start system with electronic key 3
Take care when operating the electric Hold down button q of radio remote
windows. Risk of injury , particularly to
control to open. To close, hold down
children. button p or touch sensor in door hand le
Vehicle passeng ers should be inform ed for longer. The electronic key must be
accordingly. recognised within the external reception
K eep a close watch on the windows when range. It is advisable for the driver to k eep
the electronic k ey on his person.
closing them. Ensure that nothing
becomes trapped in them as they move. Further information on windows – see
pag e 50.
Depend ing on the equip ment level of the
vehicle 3, the windows of vehicles with
electric windows in a ll doors 3 can be
op ened or closed from outside:
Fault For Astra TwinTop with open roof - after

z If the centra l loc king sy stem is opening the driver’s door, press the central
ov erloaded as a result of repeated locking button m in the centre console. The
op eration at short interv als. The power vehicle will then be unlock ed, prov ided the
supply is c ut off for a b rief period. mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 is
not enga ged. Switch on the ig nition to
z Defective fuse in fuse box – see
deactivate the Vauxhall alarm sy stem 3 .
page 262.
Emergency operation of the O pen&Start
Contact a workshop to eliminate the cause system 3, see pag e 35.
of the fault.
To lock
O pen p assenger door, close d riv er’s door,
press central loc king button m in centre
console. C entral locking system locks all
Pict ure no: 17047t.tif doors. Close passenger door.
Fault when lockin g or unlocking Ma lfunction in centra l locki ng system
Fault in radi o rem ote control or To unlock
Open&Sta rt system 3 Turn key or emergency key with
To unlock O pen&Start system 3, see p age 35,
Turn key or emergency key for O pen&Start forwards in driver’s door lock as far a s it will
sy stem 3 (see pag e 35) forwa rd s in the go. Turn key back to a vertical p osition and
driver's door lock as far as it will go. Return remove. The other doors can be opened by
key to a v ertical position a nd remove. The pulling the handle on the inside of the
entire vehicle is unlock ed w hen the driver's doors (not possib le if mechanical a nti-theft
door is opened. locking system 3 enabled beforehand).
The lugg age compartment a nd the fuel
filler ca p rem ain lock ed. To deac tiv ate the
mechanical anti-theft locking system 3
switch ignition on – see page 44.
Luggage compartment
To unl oc k
Radio rem ote control with mec hanical key
Press button q on the remote control. The
lugg age compartment is unlocked
tog ether with the doors.
Open&S tart sy stem with electronic key 3
Pulling the button below the handle
unlocks and opens the luggage
compartment and doors w hen the
electronic k ey is d etec ted within the outer
reception range
– or –
Pi cture no: 17048t.tif Press button q on the radio remote control Picture no: 16969t.tif
To lock of the electronic key , this unlocks the To open
Insert the key or em ergency key for lugg age compartment a nd the doors. The lugg age compartment is opened b y
O pen&Start system 3 (see page 35) into operating the button beneath the handle.
the opening above the lock on the inside of
the d oor a nd press until the lock audibly 9 Warnin g
enga ges. Then c lose the door. The
proced ure m ust b e repeated for ea ch door. Do not drive with the tailgate open or
The d riv er’s door can also be locked from ajar, e.g. w hen transporting bulky
outside using the lock. The unlock ed fuel objects, sinc e toxic exhaust gas could
filler flap and tailgate/boot lid cannot be penetra te the interior.
locked.
Fitting of accessories on the tailgate will
Emergenc y operat ion of Op en&St art
increa se its weight. I f it becomes too heav y,
system 3 , the tailgate w ill then not stay open.
see page 35.
Vauxhall alarm system 3

monitors
z the doors, luggage compartment,
bonnet,
z the passenger compartment,
z vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised,
z the ignition.
9 Warnin g
Do not use the system if there are people
in the vehicle! The doors cannot b e
unlocked from the inside.
To close To lock
Close lugg age com partment using the Close doors, luggage compartment and
handle on the inside of the tailga te. tank flap.
Do not operate the button beneath the Radio rem ote control with mec hanical key
handle when closing. Otherw ise the Press button p on radio remote control.
luggage compartment will once again be Open&S tart sy stem with electronic key 3
unlock ed. Press button p of the electronic key radio
remote control or touc h sensor in ha nd le of
one of the front doors. The electronic key
must b e recognised in the external
reception area. It is advisable for the driver
to keep the electronic k ey on his person.
To act ivat e Open&S tart sy stem with electronic key 3 Act ivat ion without monitoring of
Radio remote control with mechanical key All doors, w indows and bonnet must be pa ssenger comp artment a nd vehicle ti lt
All doors, wind ow s, the sun roof 3 and the closed. The electronic k ey must b e in the To activa te e.g. if anim als are left in the
bonnet must be closed. Within 15 seconds outer reception rang e of the vehicle. No vehicle.
of locking, press button p on the radio more than 15 seconds after locking, touch 1. Close tailgate and b onnet.
rem ote control again. the sensor in the handle of the driver’ s or
front passenger door again 2. Press b utton b in the roof console.
If the ignition was switched on, the driver’s
– or – The LED in b utton m flashes
door must be opened and closed once so
press button p of the electronic key’s (max. 10 seconds), see nex t page.
that the Vauxhall alarm sy stem can be
remote control ag ain. 3. Close doors.
switched on.
If the ignition wa s switched on, the driver’s
door must b e opened a nd closed once so 6
that the Vauxhall alarm system can be
switched on.
4. Switch on Va ux ha ll alarm system. LED

illuminates. After approx. 10 seconds the
system is activated, without monitoring
of the passenger compartment or vehicle
tilt. LED flashes until system is switched
off.
For Astra TwinTop, pa ssenger
compartment monitoring is deactivated if
the roof is open to p revent false alarms.
Light emit ting d iode (LED)
During the first 10 seconds of Vaux hall
alarm system activation:
z LED on = Test, activa tion delay, Pict ure no: 17051t.tif Picture no: 16968t.tif
z LED flashes = Door, luggage After the first 10 second s of Vauxhall alarm To deact ivat e
quick ly compartment or sy stem activation: Rad io remote control with m echanical key
bonnet open, or Press button q on radio remote control
z LED flashes slow ly = System
sy stem fault. – or –
activated ,
S witc h on ig nition.
z LED on after = Deactivation
approx . 1 second function.
If a system fa ult occ urs, contact a

work shop.
In the event of a fault in the radio remote

control or the Open&Start system , open the
vehicle as described on page 42.
If the alarm is trigg ered when the driver’ s
door is opened, dea ctiv ate the Vaux hall
alarm system by switching on the ignition.
Note
Changes to the vehicle interior, such a s the
use of seat covers, could impair the
function of passenger comp artment
monitoring.
Alarm
While the Vauxhall alarm system is
switched on the alarm can be triggered:
O pen&Start system with electronic k ey 3 Child safety locks 3
Pulling a handle or the button below the z an acoustic sig nal (horn) and
tailgate handle unlocks the v ehicle and z a v isual signal (hazard w arning lights). 9 Warnin g
disables the Vaux hall alarm system w hen The number and duration of the alarms are
the electronic key is detected within the legally established. Use the child safety lock whenever
outer reception range child ren are occupying the rear seats.
The alarm can be silenc ed b y pressing a
– or – Disregard may lea d to injuries or
button of the radio remote control or by
Press button q of the elec tronic key’ s endanger life. Vehicle passengers should
switching on the ig nition. The Vauxhall
rem ote control. be informed accordingly.
alarm system is d eactivated at the same
tim e. Using key or screwdriver, turn knob on rear
door lock from the vertical position: d oor
cannot be opened from inside.
Exterio r mirrors Adjust ext eri or mirrors electric ally 3 Sw ing in exter ior mirr or
Manual adjustment with handles in the Ad just with the four-way switch in driv er’s Manual: The exterior mirrors can be swung
front doors or electric 3 with switch in door: press mirror switch to left or right: in by pressing on the outside of the
driver’s door console. four-way switch w ork s on corresponding housing.
mirror.
Adj ust exterior mi rrors manuall y Electrically 3: Press n and b oth mirrors will
Swiv el ha nd le in mirror base on front d oors. The mirror glass swiv els in the same swing in.
direction as the ac tiv ation of the four-way
The m irror g la ss swivels in the sam e Press button n again - both exterior
switch.
direc tion as the activation of the handle. mirrors swiv el to the driving position.
Asp heri cal ext eri or mirror 3 If an electrical retracted mirror is ex tended
The aspherical m irror gla ss reduces the ma nually, pressing button n will cause the
blind sp ot. The curvature makes ob jects mirror to move all the way forwa rd . The
appea r sm aller, so it is more difficult to other m irror will be swivelled to the driv ing
estimate the distance from following position. If b utton n is pressed ag ain, both
vehicles. mirrors will be electrically retra cted. Press
aga in: both mirrors swivel to the driv ing
position.
Fold mirrors b ack into driving position
before moving away.
For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior In terior mirror Autom atic anti-da zzle interior mi rror 3
mirrors will swing out of their normal To adjust, swivel mirror housing. Dazz le at night is automatically reduced.
mounting p osition if they are bumped with
To reduce d azzle from following v ehicles at With the ignition off, the mirror does not
sufficient force. Reposition the m irror by
night, swiv el lever on the und ersid e of the dim.
apply ing slight pressure to the mirror
housing. mirror housing.
Electric windo ws 3
9 Warning
Ta ke c are when operating the electric
wind ows 3 and the sun roof 3. Risk of
injury, particularly to children. Vehicle
passengers should be informed
according ly .
If there are children on the rea r seat,
switch on the child safety system 3 for
the electric windows.
Keep a close watch on the wind ow s a nd
sun roof when closing them. Ensure that Pict ure no: 17134t.tif Picture no: 17135t.tif
nothing becomes trapped in them as Operated via two or four 3 switches in the Sa fet y functi on
they m ov e. driver’s door handle. The front sw itc hes are If the window glass encounters resistance
for the driver and front passenger doors. abov e the middle of the window d uring
The electric wind ow s ca n be used The rear switches 3 are for the rear d oors. automatic c losing, it is imm ediately
Ad ditional switches are loca ted in the front stopped and the w indow opened again.
z with ig nition on,
passenger door and rear doors 3. In the event of difficulty due to frost or the
z within 5 minutes of switching ignition
For increm ental opera tion, briefly pull or like, press the relev ant window switch
off 3 ,
press the switch. For a utomatic opening or sev eral times until the window is closed.
z within 5 minutes of switc hing ignition key closing, pull or press the sw itch longer. Pull
to position 1. or press the switch again to stop the
Stand-by after switching on the ignition movem ent.
ends when the driver’s door is opened .
Chil d safety syst em for rear wi nd ows 3 Central swi tch for electric window s, O perating windows from outside 3
Switch z between the rear switches in the Ast ra TwinTop Depending on the equipment level of the
driver’s door ha nd le Button $ or " in the roof console. vehicle 3, the wind ow s of v ehicles with
electric windows in all doors 3 c an be
z Forward (red field visible): Rear door Press button $: all windows are closed.
opened or closed from outside using the
switches non-operational. Press button ": all windows are opened . radio remote control.
z Rearward (green field visible): Rear door
Rad io remote control with m echanical key
switches operational.
Hold button q or p on the radio remote
control dep ressed until all windows ha ve
opened or com pletely closed.
Overloa d Fault
If the windows are repeatedly operated at If a utomatic opening and closing of the
short intervals, the power supply is b riefly windows is not possible, activate the
cut off. window electronics as follows:
The system is protected by fuses in the fuse 1. Close doors.
box – see page 262. 2. Switch on ignition.
3. Window com pletely open.
4. Close the window and hold the button
depressed at least 5 seconds.
5. Repeat for ea ch window.
Pi cture no: 17034t.tif

O pen&Start system with electronic k ey 3
Hold d own button q of radio rem ote
control to op en. To close, hold down
button p or touch sensor in door ha ndle
for long er. The electronic key must be
recognised within the ex ternal rec eption
range. It is advisable for the driv er to keep
the electronic key on his person.
Stand-by after switching on the ignition
ends when the driver’s door is opened .
Not e
C lose the sun visors before slid ing the roof
lining.

Pano ramic windscreen 3 Close the roof lining
O pen t he roof l ining Move the roof lining forward to a suitable
Turn the handle to the right and move the position. When mov ed all the way forward,
roof lining rearward to a suitable position. the roof lining engages in p osition.
To raise:
When the roof is closed, press button ü.
The roof is tilted in the rear.
To op en:
Press button ü again from the tilted
position. The roof opens to its stop .
To close:
Press button d.
For reasons of safety, the roof closes from
its open position to approx . 20 cm. H old
button d depressed to close c om pletely.

Sun roof 3 Sunb lind
O perated via rock er switches in the roof Used to reduce sun penetration into the
console when the ignition is switched on. interior when the sun roof is closed.
For incremental operation, briefly p ress the The sunblind opens when the sun roof
button. For a utoma tic opening or closing, opens.
press the b utton longer. To open:
Press button G. The sunblind opens to its
stop.
To close:
Press button H.
For reasons of safety , the blind closes from
its open p osition to approx. 20 cm. Hold
button d depressed to close completely.
Note Overloa d Fault

z If the top of the roof is wet, raise roof, If the system is ov erloaded, the power If the sun roof and sunblind do not opera te
allow water to run off and then op en supply is automa tic ally cut off for a short properly , ac tiv ate electronics as follows:
roof. tim e. 1. Switch on ignition.
z When using a roof rack, check the The system is protected by fuses in the fuse 2. Close the sun roof and hold button d
clearance of the sun roof to av oid box – see page 262. depressed at least 10 seconds.
damage.
3. Close sunb lind and hold button H
depressed at least 10 seconds.
TwinTop
With TwinTop, a convertible hardtop, Astra
unites the benefits of a coupe with those of
a convertible.
9 Warning
Ta ke c are when operating the
conv ertible hardtop. Risk of injury.
Monitor the action zone above, to the
side and to the rear of the vehicle during
roof operation. Make sure that nothing
could become pinched .
Make sure no one is in the action zone of Pictu re no: 18024T.tif Picture no: 17962t.tif
Operat ing the convertib le hardtop To open the roof
the roof or boot lid during roof operation. Stand-by with ignition key in lock from There must be no ob jects in front of the
Risk of injury.
position 1, or for Open&Start-System 3 rear w indow or in the p ivot a rea of the roof
Check the am ount heig ht, length and switch on ignition. and b oot lid .
width of available space before
Requirem ents: Hold button > in the roof console
op erating the roof, e.g. in a garage, depressed until the roof is completely open
parking garage or when a bicy cle rac k is z Vehicle is stationary or driving no m ore
and the boot lid is closed.
fitted. than 20 mph (30 km /h).
An acoustic signal sounds at the end of the
Vehicle passengers should be informed z Luggage compartment blind is closed
opening proc edure.
according ly . and engaged - see above and pa ge 82.
O pen the door windows slightly b efore
Before leaving the vehicle, remove the z Boot lid is closed.
opening the roof. If button > is pressed
ig nition key in order to prev ent If any of the requirements a re not fulfilled, aga in after the acoustic signal sounds, the
unauthorised operation of the w indows a warning b uz zer sounds when the switch is door windows will close.
and sun roof. actuated a nd the roof does not open or
close.
With the vehicle stopped , the roof can b e To close t he roof With the vehicle stopped, the roof ca n be
opened using the radio remote c ontrol 3. There m ust be no objects in the pivot area closed using the ra dio remote control 3.
Unlock the vehicle. Press button q again of the roof and boot lid. Lock the v ehicle. Press button p ag ain and
and keep pressed until the roof has opened keep pressed until the roof and b oot lid
Hold button < in the roof console
fully and the boot lid has closed. have closed c om pletely.
depressed until the roof and boot lid are
During operation with the remote control, completely closed.
6
the d oor w indows are opened comp letely . An acoustic signal sound s at the end of the
closing procedure.
Open the door windows slightly before
closing the roof. If button < is pressed
again after the acoustic signal sounds, the
door wind ow s w ill close.
Ind icator a nd war ni ng buzzers z C ontinuous warning buzzer during roof Not e
z Ind icator buzzer upon com pleted opera tion if the anti-roll b ars 3 have z Do not op en the lugg age com partment
op ening or closing of the convertible been triggered. until the acoustic signal indicating the
hardtop. end of the roof opening or closing
z C ontinuous warning buzzer starting one
procedure has sounded.
z Ind icator buzzer upon completed ra ising minute b efore the end of the 9-minute
or lowering of the electric luggag e stand-by time with the roof in an z The luggage compa rtm ent blind must
com partment load ing aid. intermediate position. always be closed d uring roof opera tion.
z Gong tone if the boot lid is not closed z C ontinuous warning buzzer starting one z There m ust be no one a t the covers
during roof opera tion. minute b efore the end of the 9-minute behind the rear head restraints.
stand-by time with the loa ding aid in a
z Gong tone if the boot lid is not fully z There m ust be no objec ts in the pivot
raised position.
op ening during operation of the lugga ge area or the roof or on the covers behind
com partment load ing aid. z C ontinuous wa rning buz zer when closing the rear head restra ints.
the boot lid if the lowering process of the
z Gong tone during roof operation if z The roof can only be opera ted a t
electric load aid is not complete or was
vehicle speed exceeds 20 m ph (30 k m/h). temperatures above –20 °C. If the
interrupted. temperature is below this limit, a gong
z Gong tone when v ehicle speed exc eeds
will sound three times when roof
20 mph (30 km/h) if the roof is not fully
operation is requested.
op en or closed.
z Frequent opera tion of the roof with the
z Three gong tones during roof or loa ding
engine off discharges the battery .
aid operation if the lug gage
com partment b lind is not attached.
z Three gong tones d uring roof operation
if outside temperature is below –20 °C,
vehicle battery voltage is too low or the
system is overloaded.
z The roof can be held in an intermediate Fault Roll over protecti on system
position for 9 minutes to fac ilitate The automatic drive of the roof is only To optimise safety in the event of a
cleaning of roof spa ces. This is d one by op erational if the roof is in the proper open rollover, the Astra TwinTop is equipped
diseng aging the a ctuation switch. O ne or closed position. with reinforced windscreen fram e and anti-
minute before the end of this p eriod, a roll bars behind the rea r sat head
Check if:
continuous buzzer sounds as a w arning restraints. The anti-roll bars are fix ed or
that the hold period is a lm ost over and z The lugga ge c om partment b lind is deployable depending on vehicle v ariant.
the roof could start to m ove. eng aged in the closed p osition
z Activ ating the roof on uneven ground z The boot lid is completely closed
can lead to malfunc tions and dam age. z O utside temp erature is abov e – 20 °C
z There is sufficient battery voltage
z There is a system ov erload
If the automatic driv e is not opera tional,
two persons are required to manua lly c lose
the roof. See the accomp any ing
instructions for Astra TwinTop. We
recommend that you seek professional
assista nce.
Fixed anti-roll ba rs Deployab le anti-roll bars 3 Luggag e c ompart ment
are secured to the vehic le body work. are located between the rear head The roof ca n only be op ened if the load in
restra ints and the boot lid in such a way the lugg age compartment does not
that they are out of sight. In the event of a exceed the height of the lugg age
rollover, hea d-on collision or side impa ct, compa rtm ent blind or protrude sideways.
the anti-roll bars deploy upwards within The load height mark ed in the fig ure must
millisecond s. The convertible roof m ust not not be ex ceeded . The lugga ge
be operated if the anti-roll bars hav e been compa rtm ent blind m ust be flat; objects
deployed. A continuous warning will sound below it must not press it upwards.
if the sw itch is actuated . The airbag control O therwise the roof and loa d may be
indica tor v illuminates if the anti-roll b ars dam aged .
ha ve b een deploy ed. Electrically op erated loading aid for the
Manua l retra ction of the a nti-roll bars - see luggage compa rtm ent - see pag e 82.
page 104. Luggage compartment blind - see
Further inform ation, see page 106. pag e 82.
Blockage of boot lid on closure 3 Wind d eflect or 3

To a void da mage to the open roof, boot lid With the wind d eflector installed
or load, the boot lid ca n only be closed if turbulence, draughts and noise in the
the electric load aid is in the lower end passenger compartment are reduced when
position, see pa ge 82. the roof is open.
The rear seats cannot be occupied when
the wind deflector is in place.
Do not place any ob jects on the wind
deflector.
Pict ure no: 18457t.tif

Unb lock ing on fa ilure of electric drive
Push locking lever forward as shown in the
figure.
With ty re repa ir set 3, the w ind d eflector is Fitting J oin tog ether the unfolded ends of the wind
folded down into a storage comp artm ent 3 Ta ke the wind deflector from the lugg age deflector: press in the pin at the slider,
in the luggage compartment b elow the compartment. guide the hinge over the pin and release
loading floor cover. the slider so that the pin eng ages in the
Exp and the collapsed wind deflector as
hinge.
For the version with spare wheel 3, the illustrated.
wind deflector is folded away in the
luggage compartment
Insert the guid e clips of the wind deflector Pull the tog gle of the rig ht a nd left locking The wind deflector can be folded back
in the seat belt recesses between the rear pin and turn to loc k. S traig hten out the when not in use.
head restraints. wind deflector, turn the toggle back and If the wind deflector is folded a nd the rea r
engage the lock ing pin in the recess in the seats are unocc upied, the wind deflector
side trim. can remain mounted in the vehic le when
the roof is closed.
Removing
Remove in reverse order, wind deflector is
completely fold ed d ow n in the luggage
compa rtm ent:
– for tyre repair k it 3 in the com partment
below the loading floor cover,
– for version with sp are wheel 3, place in
the lugg age compartment.
The wind deflector must never protrude
upwards or sidew ays from the luggag e
compa rtm ent, see marked loading height,
see page 60, Fig ure 17973 T.
64 Seats, Interior
Seats, Interior Using the belts .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 88
Child restraint sy stem 3 ... .... .... ..... .... .. 90
Mounting brack ets 3 for IS OFIX child
restraint systems ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 91
Vauxhall Full Size airbag sy stem . .... .. 92
Rollover protec tion system 3 .. ..... .... .. 104
Front sea ts .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 64 Cigarette lighter 3... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 107
Head restraints .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 68
Ac cessory socket 3 . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 107
Armrest 3 at driver’ s seat ..... .... .... ..... . 70 Ashtray 3 ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 108
Armrest 3 in the rea r backrest . .... ..... . 70
Foldaway tables 3 .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 110
Ex tending the lugg age compartment, Stowage compartments .. .... .... ..... .... .. 110
Hatch .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 71
Sun visors, glov e comp artment .... .... .. 111
Ex tending the lugg age compartment,
Estate .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 72 Picture no: 16970t.tif
Ex tending the lugg age compartment, Front seats
Astra TwinTop ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 75
9 Warnin g
Fold ing down the front passenger
seat 3 .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 75 Never a djust seats while driving as they
Lug gage compartment cover .. .... ..... . 76 could move uncontrollably.
Safety net 3, Esta te. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 78
Lug gage compartment grille 3, Va n. 79 Ad just seat longitudi nally
Rails and hooks in the luggage To adjust, pull the handle on the front seat,
compartment 3, Estate . ..... .... .... ..... . 80 slide the seat a nd relea se the handle.
FlexO rganizer 3, Estate ... ..... .... .... ..... . 80
Lashing eyes 3 .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 81 9 Warnin g
Ca rg o box 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 81
Important: Do not sit nearer tha n 10
Lug gage compartment blind , inches (25 cm) from the steering wheel, to
Astra TwinTop ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 82 permit safe airbag d eploym ent.
Ea sy Load .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 82
Notes on loading the vehic le .... .... ..... . 84
Three-stage safety sy stem.... .... .... ..... . 85
Three-point seat belts .. .... ..... .... .... ..... . 85
Belt tensioners. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 86
Seats, Interior 65
Adj usti ng the back rest Adjusting t he seat height 3 Ad just ing the sea t angle 3
To adjust, turn side handwheel on the seat To adjust, op erate lever on the outsid e of To adjust, pull the lever on the front of the
while releasing the loa d on the ba ckrest. the seat. seat, adjust the angle and release the
lever.
Move back rest to suit seating p osition. Pump action on lever
up : seat higher The seat should engage perceptibly.
down: seat lower Adjust the inclination b y distributing b od y
weight.
66 Seats, Interior
The seat bac k can only be tipped forwards

from an upright position.
When the backrest is folded forw ard, do
not activate the handw heel for ba ckrest
adjustment.
Panoramic windscreen 3: to fold the seats
forward, push the head restraints down
and c lose the sun visors.

Adj usti ng the lumba r sup port 3 Fold the seat back rest forw ards 3
To a djust, turn sid e hand wheel on b ackrest To fold forwards, ra ise the release lever
while reliev ing the load on the backrest. and fold the b ackrest forwards. Lower the
relea se lev er and the back rest engages in
Adjust lumb ar support to suit personal
the forward-fold ed position 3. Slide seat
req uirements.
forwards 3 .
To straighten the seat, slide back and it
engages in its original position 3 . Raise
relea se lever 3, straighten seat back, lower
relea se lev er, seat back engages.
For seat without memory function 3:
engage seat in d esired position.
Seats, Interior 67
The seat back rests m ust not be tilted too

far ba ck (recom mended max imum tilting
angle approx. 25°).
9 Warnin g
Failure to observe the descriptions could
lead to injuries which could be fatal.
Vehic le pa ssengers should be informed
accordingly before starting off.

Adj usti ng the thigh support 3 on the Seat positi on
sports seats 3 Ad just driver’s seat such that with the
To adjust, press the button on the front of driver sitting upright the steering wheel is
the adjustment padd ing and slide the thigh held in the area of its upper spokes with the
sup port. driver’s arm s slightly bent.
Adjust thigh support to suit personal Push passenger sea t as far back as
req uirements. possible.
68 Seats, Interior
Head restraints Adjusting t he rear, cent re head Ad just ing the rear head restraint s 3,
Adj usti ng the front head restraint s a nd restra int 3 Astra TwinTop
rear outb oard head restrai nt s 3 To adjust, pull the head restraint up or To adjust, pull the head restraint up or
To adjust, press button on side and adjust press the catch to release. Then push the press the two catches to relea se. Then push
height. head restraint down. the head restraint down.
To fold down the backrests (see page 71) To fold down the ba ckrest (see page 71) or To improve visibility when the rear seats
or im prov e visibility when the rea r seats a re improve v isibility when the centre rear seat are not occupied, push the head restraints
not occupied, remov e the head restraints is not occupied , rem ov e the head restraint all the way down.
or push them all the way down. or push it all the way down. If the seats are oc cup ied, set height
If the seats are occ upied, set height If the seat is occupied, set height according acc ording to body size.
according to body size. to body size. Do not place any ob jects on the cover
behind the hea d restraints or b etween the
hea d restraints a nd the anti-roll bars 3.
Seats, Interior 69
Head restrai nt position Activ e head restra ints 3 Remov ing the head restraint s
The midd le of the head restraint should be In the event of a rear-end impact, the Press and release the two catches. Pull and
at eye lev el. I f this is not possible for active head restraints tilt forw ards slightly. remove the hea d restraint.
extremely tall persons, set to highest The head is more effectively supported by To fold down the backrests 3 (see
position, and set to lowest position for the head restraint and the d ang er of pag e 71), push the rear head restraints
small persons. whip la sh in the neck area is reduced. all the way down or remov e.
Ac tiv e hea d restra ints are identified by the
9 Warning lettering AC TIVE on the head restra int
Not e
O nly approved objects or com ponents
guid e sleeves.
Failure to ob serve the descriptions can should be a tta ched to the head restraint
lead to injuries which could be fatal. of the unoccupied front p assenger seat.
Vehicle passengers should be informed
according ly before moving a way.
70 Seats, Interior
Armrest 3 at driver’s seat Armrest 3 in the rear backrest Astra TwinTop
Push raised armrest back ward aga inst Fold d own the armrest, pulling the strap Pull the armrest by the strap , pivot it down
resista nce and fold down. ob liq uely d ow n (45°). and position on the sit with the flat side up.
The a rm rest can be moved to different When the centre rea r seat is in use or the The armrest is held in place on the backrest
positions in stag es by lifting it. rear back rests are folded, fold the armrest with a retaining strap. To fully rem ov e the
up . armrest, disengage the brac ket a t the
Stowage comp artm ent in armrest, see reta ining strap.
page 110. A fla p located behind the armrest
fa cilitates transport of long, narrow A flap loca ted b ehind the arm rest
ob jects – see pag e 71. facilitates transport of long, narrow
objects – see page 75.
Seats, Interior 71
Extending the luggage Fold down centre ba ckrest 3 Restoring b ackrest to a n up right p osit ion
compartment, Hatch Push head restraint all the way d ow n – see Guide the seat belt through the side
page 68. brack et to protect against damage.
Folding t he ba ckrest
Pushing rea r head restraints all the way Disenga ge ba ckrest using handle and fold Restore the backrest to an upright position
down or remove – see page 69. onto sea t cushion. and a ud ib ly eng age.
Slide front seat forward slightly . Folding down the centre seat bac krest The three-point seat b elt for the c entre rear
makes it possible to loa d long er objects. seat ca n only be pulled from its inertia reel
Disengage the b ackrest (single or split 3)
The outer seats can still be used for if the backrest is properly enga ged.
using the pushbutton and fold it down onto
oc cup ants.
the seat cushion. Not es on load ing
see page 84.
Return front seat to desired position. 9 Warning
The load must not obstruct the operation
of the pedals, the handbrake or the g ears
or restrict the driver’s freedom of
movement. Do not p la ce loose objects in
the interior.
72 Seats, Interior
Extending the luggage Raise the seat cushion a nd fold t he Remove the outer rear hea d restraints.
compartment, Estate back rest Push the centre head restra int a ll the way
Pull the strap on the seat c ushion and lift down – see page 69.
Fold the bac krest onto the sea t cushion
the back rest forwa rd s (single or split).
Push the rear head restraints all the wa y S tow the removed head restraints in the
down or remove – see page 69. Detach the Detach the hooks of the lugg age cav ity below the raised seat cushions.
hooks of the luggage compartment cover compartment cov er from the head
from the head restraints – see page 77. restra ints – see pa ge 77.
Slide front seat forward slightly .
Disengage the b ackrest (single or split)
using the pushbutton and fold it down onto
the seat cushion.
Return front seat to desired position.
Seats, Interior 73
Folding the centre seat backrest m akes it

possible to load longer objects. The outer
seats can still be used for occupants.
9 Warnin g
The loa d m ust not obstruct the opera tion
of the peda ls, the ha ndb rake or the gears
or restric t the driver’s freed om of
movement. Do not place loose objects in
the interior.

Disengage the b ackrest (single or split) Fold down centre ba ckrest 3
using the pushbutton, fold it forward and Push head restraint all the way d ow n – see
enga ge. page 68.
Disenga ge ba ckrest using handle and fold
onto sea t cushion. If the seat cushion is
ra ised, fold it forward until it eng ages.
74 Seats, Interior
The three-point seat b elt for the c entre rear

seat ca n only be pulled from its inertia reel
if the backrest is properly enga ged.
Sa fet y net 3,
see page 78.
Not es on load ing,
see page 84.

Restoring the ba ckrests or sea t Raised seat cushions : Insert and adjust
cushions 3 to their ori ginal p osit ion head restraints in backrests – see
Guide the seat b elt throug h the side pages 5, 69. Fold back seat cushions,
bracket to protec t against damage. making sure the belt b uck les are properly
positioned.
To restore the backrest to an upright
position, fold up, pressing the button on Attac h the hooks of the luggage
the bac krest. Aud ibly engag e the bac krest compartment cover to the head restraints –
in an upright position. see p age 77.
Seats, Interior 75
Extending the luggage Cover behind arm rest can be locked from Folding down th e front passenger
compartment, Astra TwinTop lugg age compartment 3: turn handle 90°: seat 3
Loading a rea between rea r sea ts Locked = Handle horiz ontal Push front passenger seat head restra int
Pull out the armrest b y the strap. all the way down or remov e – see
Unlock ed = Handle vertic al
pag es 5, 69.
The armrest is held in place on the b ackrest
with a retaining strap. To fully remov e the Notes on loading Push front passenger seat back.
see p age 84.
armrest, disengage the brack et at the Fold front p assenger seat forward b y
retaining strap. raising release lever.
Pull the handle and fold down the cover. Ra ise front p assenger seat ba ckrest
Raise release lever and enga ge pa ssenger
9 Warning seat back a udib ly .
The load m ust not obstruct the operation
of the pedals, the handbrak e or the gea rs
or restrict the driver’s freedom of
movem ent. Do not place loose ob jects in
the interior.
76 Seats, Interior
To close
Press handle on luggage comp artm ent
cover rea rw ards; the cover automatically
eng ages in its end position.
Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged
objects on the cover.

Luggage compartment cover Estat e
Hat ch To op en
To rem ov e, unhook the retaining strap s Press handle on lug gage compartment
from the ta ilg ate. cover d ow n. The cover automatically
unrolls.
Pull cover from the side guides.
Fit in reverse order.
Seats, Interior 77
Fitting
Insert the lug gage compartment cover in
the recess on the left, press the release
lever on the right side upward, insert the
cover in the recess on the right, engage
and p ress the lev er down.
Attach the hooks on the head restraints -
see Fig. 17079 T.

To cover the ga p betw een the luggage Removing
compartment cover and the rear Open the luggage compa rtm ent c ov er and
back rests, there is a c ov er on the cartridge. detach the hooks from the head restraints.
Attach the two hooks of the cover to the Move release lev er on right side of lug gage
head restraint guid e rods. If the safety net compartment cov er upwa rd . Lift rig ht
is mounted, run the hooks throug h the net cover a nd remove from brac kets.
mesh.
78 Seats, Interior
Safety net 3, Estate Ad just stra p length on safety net by Fitti ng behind front seats
The safety net can b e mounted behind the attaching the up per hook to the ey e of the Raise the rea r seat cushions, see page 72.
rea r seats or, if the rear seat backrests are strap, see illustration 17085 T, and attach Unroll the safety net.
folded and the seat cushions ra ised, to eyes in the right and left of the floor.
There are two brackets in the roof fra me
behind the front seats.
abov e the front seats. H ook the net rod s
Passeng ers m ust not be carried behind the into the brack ets on one side and then the
safety net. other. Slide forwa rd to engage.
Fitting behi nd the rear sea ts Adjust strap length on safety net by
Remove the lugg age com partment cover - attaching the upper hook to the eye of the
see left column. strap, see illustration 17085 T, and attach
Unroll the safety net. to eyes in the right and left of the floor.
There are two brackets in the roof fram e. Remove the outer rear head restra ints and
Hook the net rods into the b ra ckets on one fold the backrests forward, see pag e 72.
side a nd then the other. Slide forward to
enga ge.
Seats, Interior 79
Remov ing Luggage compartment grille 3, To close the grille section from the open
Deta ch the safety net belt straps by tipping Van position, press bracket down, fold down
up the length adjuster. grille and lock.
To tra nsport long objects, p art of the
Unhook the safety net rods from the lugg age compartment g rille behind the C heck that the closed grille is prop erly
brackets in the roof frame. Roll up the net passenger seat c an be opened : locked.
and sec ure with a strap. Release passenger seat back and fold
forward.
Press brac ket d ow n and fold grille section
up .
Lock grille in open position.
80 Seats, Interior
Rails and hooks in the luggage FlexOrganizer 3, Estate Varia ble part ition net
compartment 3, Estate Flexible sy stem for dividing the luggage Insert an a dapter in each rail: Fold up
compartment or securing load s in an handle plate, insert adapter in up per and
The side wa lls of the luggage c om partment
Estate. lower groov e of rails, m ov e to d esired
house two rails. Insert the hooks in the
position. To loc k the a dapter, swiv el the
desired position in the ra ils: insert the hook The system c onsists of handle plate up. Compress the rod s of the
in the up per groove on the rail and p ress in z Adapters partition net slightly and insert in
the lower groove. z Variable partition net corresponding openings of the ad apter.
Pull off the hook to rem ov e. z Mesh pock ets for the side walls The longer rod must be inserted in the
z Hooks in the lugga ge c om partment upper adapter.
Components a re mounted in the two guide
ra ils in the side walls of the lugga ge
compartment by means of adapters or
hooks.
Seats, Interior 81
Hooks a nd mesh pocket Lash ing eyes 3 Cargo box 3
Insert the hooks in the desired p osition in in the luggage compartment are intended Foldable b ox under the floor cov er used to
the rails: insert the hook in the upper for fixing lashing straps 3 or a lugga ge divid e the lug gage compartment.
groove on the rail and press in the lower net 3. They secure transp ort items from
groove. The mesh p oc ket can be hung from The cargo box may only be load ed w hen
slipping.
the hooks. the backrests are engaged in an upright
position.
Remov ing
Press the partition net rods together and To remove the cargo b ox floor cover,
rem ov e from the adap ters. remove first the right half then the left half.
For models with towing equipment, first
Adapter: fold op en the reta iner, release the release the coupling ball bar fix ing strap
adap ter from the lower groove and remov e and thread this through the eye – see
from the upp er groove. pag e 235. Installation in the rev erse order.
Release the hook s from the rails.
82 Seats, Interior
Luggage compartment blind, Easy Load z Briefly press button ,: The folded roof is
Astra Twin Top raised. The roof remains in this end
(Electronically operated loading position for approx. 9 minutes.
To open: aid for the lu ggage compartment
Disengage the luggag e com partment of the Astra TwinTop)
blind from the recess on the right a nd left. The loading aid makes it possible to
Rolls up automatically. comfortab ly load the luggage
To close: compartment when the roof is open. The
Grasp the handle, pull the blind towards press of a button will raise the roof folded
the rear of the vehicle and enga ge in the up in the luggage compa rtm ent 25 cm.
recess on the right and left. This enlarges the load op ening of the
lugg age compartment.
Do not place any objects on the blind.
z O pen the boot lid.
There must be no objects outside of or on
top of the lugg age com partment b lind z Unhook the lugga ge compartment b lind
when the roof is open or in the process of and a ttac h it to the rear window frame.
opening.
The roof can only be operated with the
luggage compartment blind enga ged in
the recess.
Seats, Interior 83
z If the loading aid is not in its lower end

9 Warning position when the boot lid is closed, a
warning tone sounds or the boot lid is
Take care when operating the loading blocked mecha nically 3, see p age 61.
aid. Risk of injury.
z Do not touch m ov ing parts.
Mak e sure tha t nothing could be pinched.
z One minute before the end of the hold
Mak e sure no one is in the action zone time for the raised loading aid , a
during opera tion. R isk of injury. warning b uzz er will sound to remind you
This is esp ecially important for c hildren. to lower the roof.
Inform passengers acc ordingly. z The loading aid is only op erable when
the vehicle is unlocked.
Note
z Do not place objects on or nea r the
luggage compa rtm ent blind.
z Load lugga ge c om partment a t most to
marked load heig ht, otherwise the roof z The folded roof can only be lowered
and load could be dam aged. when the blind is closed. Otherwise, a
z Suspend the lugga ge c om partment warning buzzer will sound three tim es.
blind from the rear window frame, and z Movement can only be stopped by
engage in recesses on right and left. The pressing button ,. Holding the button
lugga ge c om partment b lind must b e depressed will cha nge the direction of
flat; objects underneath it must not p ush movement.
it up wards. z A confirmation signal sounds in the
z Briefly press button ,: The folded roof is upper and lower end positions.
lowered. z O nly close the boot lid once the
z Close the boot lid only after the confirm ation signal has sounded to
confirmation signa l has sounded. indicate tha t the loading aid is in its
Otherwise the roof could be damaged. lower end position.
84 Seats, Interior
z Estate: mount the safety net 3 when z Astra TwinTop: Do not p la ce any objects
transp orting objects in the luggage on the cover of the deployable anti-roll
compa rtm ent – see p age 78. bars 3, b ehind the rear head restraints
or in the luggage compa rtm ent outside
z Estate: close the luggage compartment
of, on or next to the luggage
cover so the rear window does not reflect
compartment cover.
the ob jects.
z Do not place any objec ts in the
z If the backrests are not folded down
deploy ment area of the airb ags and
when transporting objects in the
deploy able anti-roll bars 3 as this poses
luggage compa rtm ent, they must be
a risk of injury should the system s be
eng aged in their upright position 3 see
trig gered.
pages 71, 74.
z Do not drive with lugga ge compa rtm ent
z Do not a llow the load to protrude ab ov e
open when tra nsporting bulky objects,
the upp er edge of the rear seat
Pi cture no: 17093t.tif for exam ple, since toxic exhaust fumes
back rests, or above the upper ed ge of
Notes on loading the vehicle could penetra te the interior.
the front seat b ackrests if the rear seat
z Heav y objec ts in the lug gage back rests 3 are folded down. z Weights, payload and roof loa d – see
com partment should be placed against page 325.
the enga ged rear seat backrests 3 or, if z Astra TwinTop: Note the ma ximum
the rear seat backrests are folded down, loading heig ht when the roof is open. z Driv ing with a roof load see
against the front sea t backrests. If See page 82, Fig. 17973 T. pages 198, 200, 231, inc reases the
ob jects are to be stacked, the heav ier sensitivity of the vehic le to cross-winds
z The warning triangle 3 a nd first-aid k it
ob jects should be placed at the bottom. and has a detrimental effect on vehic le
(cushion) 3 m ust alway s be freely
Unsec ured objec ts in the lug gage ha nd ling ow ing to the vehicle’s higher
accessible.
com partment w ould be thrown forward centre of gravity.
z Do not place any objects in front of the
with great force in the event of heavy
braking, for example. rea r window or on the instrument pa nel. 9 Warnin g
They are reflected in the glass, obstruct
z Secure objects with lashing straps 3 the driver’s view and will be thrown Failure to observe these descriptions can
atta ched to lashing ey es – see p age 81. through the vehicle, for insta nce in the lead to injuries which ma y be fatal.
If heavy loads slip when the vehicle is event of heavy b ra king. Vehic le pa ssengers should be informed
braked heavily or driven around a bend, accordingly.
z The load m ust not obstruct the operation
the hand ling of the v ehicle ma y change.
of the p edals, the handbrake or the
gears or restrict the driver’s freed om of
movement. Do not place loose objects in
the interior.
Seats, Interior 85
Three-stage safety system

Com prising:
9 Warning
z Three-point seat belts. The airb ag systems and a nti-roll bars 3
z Belt tensioners at the front seats. serve to supplement the three-point seat
belts a nd belt tensioners. The seat belts
z Airbag sy stems for driver, front sea t must therefore always be worn.
passenger and rear outboard seats 3. Disregard of these instructions could lead
On Astra TwinTop 3, roll-over bar to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle
behind rea r seats. passengers should be informed
The three stages are activated in sequence accordingly.
depending on the sev erity of the accident:
Read the instructions supplied with the
z The automatic seat belt locking d evices
child restraint system !
prevent the belt strap from b eing pulled Picture no: 16981t.tif
out and thus ensure that the vehicle Three-point seat belts
occ upa nts are retained in their seats. The vehicle is equipped with three-point
z The front seat belts are pulled down at seat belts with automatic retrac tors and
the belt buckles. This mea ns the b elts fit locking d evices, allowing freedom of body
snugly, the occupants are d ecelerated mov ement although the spring tensioned
early with the vehic le and the body belts always ensure a snug fit.
load ing is reduced .
For information on correct seating
z In the event of a severe accid ent, the position – see pages 67, 88, 94.
airb ag systems and deployable anti-roll
The belts are loc ked during heavy
bars 3 also dep loy , forming safety acc eleration or deceleration of the vehicle.
cushions for the occ upa nts. The front
airb ags a re inflated in tw o stages based
on the severity of the collision.
86 Seats, Interior
Testing the b el ts
9 Warning Check all parts of the b elt system
periodically for d amage and function.
Alwa ys wea r your seat belt, and that Replace dam aged components. After an
means a lso in urban traffic a nd when you accident, have the belts and triggered belt
are a rear sea t passeng er. I t can save tensioners replaced by a workshop.
your life!
Do not p erform any alterations on the
Pregnant women m ust alwa ys wear a belts, their a nchorages, the automatic
seat belt – see page 88. retractors or the belt buckles.
Make sure that belts are not damaged or
In the event of an accident, persons not tra pped by sharp-ed ged ob jects.
wearing seat belts endanger their fellow
occupants and themselv es.
Control indicator X 3 for the seat belt – see Picture no: 17104t.tif
page 114. Belt tensioners
Seat b elts are only intended for one person. The front seat belts are fitted with belt
They are not suitable for any one under tensioners. The seat belts are pulled down
12 yea rs of age or under 150 cm tall. at the buckles on a front or rear impact
abov e a certain sev erity. This tightens the
For children up to 12 yea rs of ag e, w e belts.
recom mend the Vaux hall child restraint
system – see page 90. Act uation of belt tensioners
is indicated by illumination of control
Belt force lim iters indicator v, see nex t column.
on the front seats reduce the b od y load
due to damped release of the belt on a If the belt tensioners are triggered, they
collision. This means that the occupants must be replac ed b y a work shop.
move forward under control. Im portant information – see pag e 87.
Seats, Interior 87
z The belt tensioner and airbag sy stem

9 Warning control electronics can be found in the
centre console area. In order to av oid
Hav e the cause of the fa ult eliminated malfunctions, do not store mag netic
immediately. objects in this a rea.
The system’s integ ra ted self-diagnostics z When using the rear sea ts, ensure that
allow s faults to be quickly remedied. the front belt com ponents a re not
damaged by shoes or other objects.
Imp or tant
Avoid dirt getting into the belt wind ers.
z Accessories and other objects not
specifically approved for your vehicle z We recom mend that you have the front
type must not be affixed or placed within seats removed by a w orkshop.
the action zone of the b elt tensioners z The belt tensioners trigger once only,
(near the belt buckles) as this c ould ind ic ated b y illumination of control
Pi cture no: 17105t.tif result in injury if the belt tensioners are
Cont rol indica tor v for belt t ensioners ind ic ator v. Belt tensioners when
triggered. trig gered must be replaced by a
The function of the belt tensioners is
monitored electronically together with the z Do not mak e any modifications to the workshop.
airbag sy stems and the d eployab le anti- components of the belt tensioners, as z When disposing of the vehicle, the sa fety
roll bars 3. Their operational readiness is this will render the v ehicle unroadw orthy. instructions given for this must be
indicated by control indicator v in the observed . Ta ke the vehicle to a recycling
instrument panel. When the ignition is 9 Warning company for disposal.
switched on, the control indica tor
illuminates for approx. 4 second s. If it Incorrect handling (e.g. rem ov al or fitting
does not illuminate, does not go out after of belts or b elt buckles) c an trig ger the
4 seconds or illum inates whilst driving, belt tensioners w ith risk of injury.
there is a fault in the belt tensioner or and
airbag sy stems or in the deployable anti-
roll bars 3, see p age 98. The sy stems may
fail to trigger in the event of an a ccident.
Dep loy ment of the belt tensioners is
indicated by continuous illumination of v.
88 Seats, Interior
Using the belts Height adjustm ent 3
9 Warning Height adjustm ent of the upper deflection
Fitting seat bel ts
Pull the belt out of the retractor and guide point of the front belts:
O n pregna nt women in particular, the lap
it across the body , making certain that it is belt must be positioned a s low as 1. Pull b elt out slig htly.
not twisted. possible across the pelvis so as not to put 2. Press d own button on adjuster slide.
Insert the la tch plate into the buckle. The too much pressure on the abdomen.
3. Move adjuster slide up or down.
front sea t b ackrest must not be tilted back
too far or the seat belt will not op erate Bulk y clothing prevents the belt from fitting 4. Allow sliding ad juster to a ud ib ly latch.
properly . The recommended angle of prop erly. The belt must not rest against
Do not adjust height while driving .
inclina tion is 25° . Mak e sure that the lap ha rd or fragile objects in the pockets of
belt is not twisted and that it fits snugly your clothing (e.g. ballpoint pens, keys,
across the body. Tension the belt spectacles) because these could cause
frequently while d riv ing by tugging the injury. Do not place any objec ts (e.g.
diagonal pa rt of the belt. ha ndb ags, mobile phones) b etween the
belt and your body.
Seats, Interior 89
Three- point seat b el ts on rear outer seats

When not in use, pa ss seat b elts through
side holders 3 as shown in Fig. 17063 T on
pag e 71.
Three- point seat belt of cent re rear seat 3
The belt ca n only be pulled from the inertia
reel when the bac krests a re upright and
properly enga ged – see page 71.
Three- point seat belts of rear seats in
Astra TwinTop
In order to prevent the flutter noise caused
by the belts when the roof and wind ow s are
open, the seat belts can be secured behind
Pi cture no: 16981t.tif Pict ure no: 17109t.tif the armrest when the rear seats are not
Adjust height such that the belt p asses Rem oving t he b el t occupied.
over the wearer’s shoulder and rests To remove the belt, d epress the red
against the shoulder. It must not pass over pushbutton on the buckle; the b elt will
the neck or upper arm. retract automatically.
90 Seats, Interior
Child restraint system 3 Perm issib le options for fitt ing a chil d safety seat1 )
When a c hild restraint system is used ,
follow the instructions for use and Weight and O n front passenger seat On out er r ear seat s On centre rear seat3 )
installation. age class 2)
The c ountry in which y ou a re travelling Group 0:
may not perm it the use of child restraint up to 10 k g
systems on certain seats. Alw ays comply or approx.
with the local or na tional regulations. 10 months B 1, + U, + U
Selecting the right system Group 0+:
Your child should travel fa cing backwa rd s up to 13 k g
in the c ar for as long as possible. A child or approx.
has a very w eak cervical spinal colum n and 2 years
in the event of an accident is less likely to
suffer injury in a rearwa rd -fac ing, semi- Group I:
lying position than if seated upright. 9 t o18 kg
or approx. B 2, +
9 Warning 8 months to
U, + U
4 years
Nev er carry child restraint sy stems on
your lap, risk of fatal injury. Group II :
15 to 25 kg
or approx.
3 to 7 y ears
X U U
Group II I:
22 to 36 kg
or approx.
6 to 12 y ears
1)
For rea son s of safety, we recomm end tha t the ch ild safety sea t b e insta lled on
on e of the ou ter rea r sea ts .
2)
We recom mend th e u se of each system until the child rea ch es th e u pp er w eig ht limit.
3) Not on Ast ra TwinTop.
Seats, Interior 91
B 1 = Lim ited, only with seat occupancy Note

recognition and Vauxhall child z C hildren under 12 years or under 150 cm
restraint sy stem with transponders. tall should only travel in an appropriate
If the c hild restra int system is being child safety seat.
secured using a three-point seat z When transporting children, use the child
belt, move seat height adjustm ent 3 restraint systems suitable for the child’s
to uppermost position. Move front weight.
passenger sea t as far back as
z Ensure correct installation of child
possible and move front passeng er
restraint system, see the instructions
seat belt anchorage point to low est
enclosed with the system.
position.
z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint
B 2 = Lim ited, only with seat occupancy
system can be wiped clean.
recognition and Vauxhall child
z Do not stic k anything on the child Picture no: 17091t.tif
restraint sy stem with transponders.
restraint sy stems a nd do not cover them Mounting brackets 3 for ISOFIX
If the c hild restra int system is being child restraint systems
with any other materia ls.
secured using a three-point seat The brackets located between the backrest
belt, move seat height adjustm ent 3 z O nly allow the c hild to enter and exit on and seat cushion are used for mounting
to uppermost position. Move front the side of the vehicle facing aw ay from
IS OFIX child restraint sy stems.
passenger sea t as far back as the road .
possible so that v ehicle safety belt Plea se follow the instructions
z A child restraint system whic h has been
runs from anchora ge point towards acc om panying the I SO FIX child restraint
sub jected to stress in an a ccident must
the front. system.
be rep la ced.
U = Universal suitab ility in conjunction O nly ISO FIX child restraint sy stems
z Secure or remove child restra int systems
with three-p oint seat belt. app rov ed for the vehicle may be used.
carried in the v ehicle when not in use.
+ = Vehicle sea t with ISO FI X fix ings
available. When using ISO FI X, only
ISO FI X child restra int system s
approved for the v ehicle may b e
used.
X = No child restraint system permitted
in this weight class.
92 Seats, Interior
Vauxhall Full Size airbag system Side airb ag system 3 C ur tain ai rbag syst em 3
The Vauxhall Full Size airbag system The sid e airbag is triggered in the event of The curtain a irba g system triggers in case
consists of several separate sy stems. a side-on c ollision to form a safety cushion of a side-on collision and provid es a safety
for the driver or front passenger in the barrier in the hea d area on the respective
Front airb ag system respective door area. This substantially side of the vehic le. This reduces the risk of
The front airbag system will be triggered in reduces the risk of injury to the upp er body injury to the hea d considerab ly in case of a
the event of a serious ac cident involving a and pelv is. side-on collision.
frontal impact and forms safety cushions
for the driver and front passenger. The
forward movement of the driver and front
passenger is checked and the risk of
injuries to the upper body a nd head
thereby substantially reduced.
Seats, Interior 93
Exception:
Passenger sea t with seat occupancy
recognition system 3 . The seat occupancy
recognition system deactiva tes the front
and sid e airbags on the pa ssenger side 3 if
the front passenger seat is unoccupied or a
Vauxhall child restraint system with
transponders 3 ha s been fitted to the front
passenger seat. S eat occupa ncy
recognition, see pag e 99. Vauxhall child
restraint sy stem with transponders 3 – see
pag e 90.
Examples of events triggering the front
Pi cture no: 17111t.tif Pict ure no: 17112t.tif airbag sy stem:
Vauxhall Full Size airbag system z seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, z Impact against a non-y ielding obstacle:
Front airb ag z the control indicator for Va ux ha ll child the front airbags are trigg ered at low
The front airbag system is identified by the restraint systems y with transponders 3 vehicle speed.
word AI RBAG on the steering wheel and in the instrum ent panel. z Impact aga inst a y ielding obsta cle (such
above the glov e c om partment. as another vehicle): the front airbags are
The front airb ag system will be trigg ered :
The front airbag system comprises: only trigg ered at a hig her vehicle speed .
z depending on the severity of the
z an airbag with inflator in the steering accident,
wheel and a second one in the
z depending on the type of impact,
instrum ent panel,
z within the range shown in the illustration,
z control electronics w ith im pact sensors,
z indep endent of side airbag 3 and
z control indicator for airbag systems v in
curtain airbag system 3.
instrum ent panel,
94 Seats, Interior
When triggered, the front airb ags inflate in
millisecond s to form a safety cushion for the 9 Warning 9 Warnin g
driver and front passenger. The forward
movement of the front seat occupants is The front airbag sy stem provides The three-point seat belt must b e
optimum p rotection when the seat, correctly fitted – see pag e 88.
check ed, thereby substantially reducing the
risk of injury to the upper body and head. back rest a nd head restraint are correctly
adjusted: Adjust the driver’s seat The front airbag sy stem will not be
No im pairment of view will occur, because according to the occupant’s height suc h triggered in the ev ent of
the a irb ags inflate and deflate so quickly that with the driver sitting upright the z the ignition is switched off
that it is often not ev en noticed in an steering wheel is held in the a rea of its
accident. upper sp ok es with the d riv er’s arms z minor frontal collisions
slightly bent. The passenger seat should z accidents in which the vehicle overturns
be as far back as possible, with the
z collisions involving a sid e or rear impac t
back rest upright – see pages 3, 67. Do
not place the head, b od y, hands or feet that is to say, if it w ould not be of benefit to
on the c ov ers of the airbag sy stems. the oc cup ants.
Do not place any objects in the area in
which the airb ags inflate. Im portant
inform ation – see page 101.
Seats, Interior 95
9 Warning
Seat belts m ust therefore a lways be worn.
The front a irb ag system serv es to
supplement the three-point seat belts. If
you do not wea r your seat belt you risk
being seriously injured, or even thrown
from the vehic le, in the ev ent of an
accident.
In the event of an ac cident the belt helps
to keep you in the correct seating
position, so tha t the front airbag system
can provid e you with effective p rotection. Pict ure no: 17113t.tif Picture no: 17114t.tif
Side airb ag 3 The side airbag sy stem will be triggered:
In addition, the front airb ag sy stem will not The side a irb ag system is identified by the z depending on the sev erity of the
be triggered for the front passenger in word AIRBAG on the outb oa rd sides of the
versions with seat occupa ncy rec og nition 3 accident,
front seat backrests.
if z depending on the ty pe of im pact,
The side a irb ag system c om prises:
z the front p assenger seat is unoccupied, z within the range shown in the illustration
z an airbag with infla tor in the back of the on the centre d oor pillar of the driver’s or
z there is a prop erly fitted Va ux ha ll child driver’s and front passenger seat
restraint system with transponders 3 . front passenger side,
respectively ,
Seat oc cup ancy recognition – see z ind epend ently of the front airbag
page 99. Vauxhall child restraint system z the control electronics, sy stem.
with transponders 3 – see page 90. z the side impact sensors, Exception:
z control indicator for airb ag sy stems v in Passenger sea t with seat occupancy
instrument panel, recognition system 3 . The seat occupancy
recognition system deactiva tes the front
z seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3,
and sid e airbags on the pa ssenger side 3 if
z the control indicator for Va ux ha ll child the front passenger seat is unoccupied or a
restraint systems y with transponders 3 Vauxhall child restraint system with
in the instrum ent panel. transponders 3 ha s been fitted to the front
passenger seat. S eat occupa ncy
recognition, see pag e 99. Vauxhall child
restraint sy stem with transponders 3 – see
pag e 90.
96 Seats, Interior
In ad dition, the side airb ag system 3 will

9 Warning not be trig gered for the front p assenger in
versions with seat oc cup anc y recognition 3
There must be no objects in the area in if
which the airb ag inflates or in the a rea
z the front passeng er seat is unoccupied,
between the seat backs and the vehicle
body . Do not place the hand s or arms on z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child
the covers of the airba g systems. restra int system with transponders 3.
Imp ortant information – see page 101. Seat occupancy recognition – see
page 99. Vauxhall child restraint system
The three-point sea t b elt must a lw ays be
with transponders 3 – see page 90.
correctly fitted – see page 88.
The side airba gs will not be triggered in the

Pi cture no: 17110t.tif event of
When triggered, the side a irba g infla tes z the ig nition is sw itc hed off,
within milliseconds to form a safety cushion
z fronta l collisions,
for the driver or front passeng er in the
respective door area. This substantially z accidents in which the v ehicle overturns,
red uces the risk of injury to the upper body z collisions involving a rear impac t,
and pelvis in the event of a side-on
collision. z side-on collisions outside the pa ssenger
cell.
Seats, Interior 97
Curt ain airb ag 3 The curtain airbag system will be triggered: When the curtain a irb ag is triggered it
The c urtain airbag sy stem is identified by inflates within milliseconds and provides a
z depending on the severity of the
the w ord AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim. safety barrier in the head area on the
accident,
respective side of the v ehicle. This red uces
The c urtain airbag sy stem comp rises: z depending on the type of impact, the risk of injury to the head considera bly in
z an airbag with inflator in the roof frame case of a side im pact.
z within the ra ng e shown in the illustration
on the driver’ s and front pa ssenger sid e on the c entre door p illar of the d riv er’s or
respectively, front passenger side,
z the control elec tronics, z together with the side airbag system 3,
z the side im pact sensors, z irrespectiv e of sea t occupancy
z control indicator for airbag systems v in rec og nition 3,
instrum ent panel. z indep endently of the front airbag
system.
98 Seats, Interior
9 Warning 9 Warnin g
There m ust be no objects in the area in Have the c ause of the fault elim inated
which the airbag inflates. Do not place immediately by a workshop.
the hands or arms on the covers of the
The sy stem’s integrated self-diagnostics
airb ag systems. I mportant information –
see pa ge 101. allows faults to b e q uick ly rem edied.
The three-point seat belt m ust always be

correctly fitted – see page 88.
The curtain airbags will not be triggered in

the event of
z the ignition is switched off, Pict ure no: 17105t.tif
Control i nd icator v for airbag systems
z frontal collisions, The func tion of the airbag systems is
z accidents in whic h the vehicle overturns, monitored electronica lly together with the
seat occupancy recognition 3 and belt
z collisions involving a rear im pact,
tensioner systems and the deployable a nti-
z side-on collisions outsid e the passenger roll b ars 3. Their operationa l readiness is
cell. indica ted b y a control indicator v. When
the ignition is switched on, the control
indica tor illum ina tes for ap prox . 4 seconds.
If it does not illuminate, does not go out
after 4 seconds or illum inates whilst
driving, there is a fault in the airba g
sy stems, seat occupancy recognition 3 or
belt tensioner systems, or in the deployable
anti-roll bars 3 , see page 87. The systems
may fail to trigg er in the event of an
accident.
Deploym ent of the airba gs is indicated by
continuous illumination of v.
Seats, Interior 99
Seat oc cupancy recognition 3

The seat occupancy recognition system 9 Warnin g
deactivates the front and side airbags 3
for the front passenger if the front Only Vaux hall child restraint systems with
passenger seat is not occ upied or a tra nsponders 3 can be fitted on the front
Vauxhall child restraint sy stem with passeng er seats. Use of sy stems without
transponders 3 is fitted on the front tra nsponders poses a risk of fatal injury.
passenger seat. The curtain airba g Vauxhall child restraint systems with
system 3 rem ains activ ated.
transponders 3 can b e identified by a
The c ontrol indicator y for seat sticker.
occupancy recognition is located in the
Not e
instrument panel. If the control indicator y O n the Astra TwinTop, there may be
illuminates for approx. 4 seconds w hen the
interference in ra dio reception of c ertain
ignition is switched on, the vehicle is Pict ure no: 17116t.tif freq uencies in the m edium w aveb and
equipp ed with seat occ upa ncy recognition, Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition when the roof is op en and the front
see next page, Fig . 17117 T. are also identified by a sticker on the lower passenger seat is unoccupied.
If a Vauxhall c hild restra int system with panel of the front passenger seats – see
transponders 3 is fitted, the control figure above.
indicator y illuminates perm anently after Vauxhall c hild restraint system s w ith
the ig nition is switched on as soon as the tra nsponders 3 are automatically
system has detected the child restraint detected if correctly fitted to the front
system. Only then may the child restraint passenger seat. When this typ e of child
system with transponders 3 be used on the restra int system is in use on the front
passenger seat. passenger seat, the front and side a irb ag
sy stems for the front p assenger seat are
deactiv ated. The curtain airbag system
remains ac tiv ated. Pay attention to control
indica tor y for seat occupancy
recognition 3 see Fig . 17117 T.
100 Seats, Interior
Cont rol indica tor y for Vauxha ll child If the control indicator flashes when the
restraint syst em s with t ransponders 3 child restraint system with transponders 3
The p resence of a Vaux hall child restraint is c orrectly fitted, there is a fault with risk of
system w ith transponders 3 is indicated injury to the child. Fit child restraint system s
after the ignition has been switched on by on the rear seat. Have the cause of the
permanent illumination of the control fault elim inated by a workshop.
indicator y in the instrum ent panel, as If no Vauxhall child restraint system w ith
soon a s the seat occupancy recognition transponders 3 is fitted, the control
system has detected the child restraint indicator m ust not illum inate or flash as the
system. passenger airbag systems would not
deploy. Have the cause of the fault
elimina ted b y a work shop.
Pict ure no: 17117t.tif 9 Warnin g

If the control indicator does not come on
while driving, the front and sid e airba gs 3 If the Vauxhall child restraint system with
for the p assenger are not d e-activated and tra nsponders 3 ha s b een fitted
there is a risk of injury or death to the child. according to the instructions, the control
Fit child restraint systems on the rea r seat. ind ic ator for Vauxhall restraint systems
Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a with tra nsponders must illumina te in the
work shop. instrument pa nel when the ignition is
switched on.
If the child restraint system is not correc tly
installed or the transp onder is faulty , the If the control indica tor does not come on
control indicator flashes. Chec k for correct while driving, the airbag sy stems for the
installation of child restraint system . To passeng er are not de-ac tiv ated and
install the child restra int system with there is a risk of fatal injury. In this ca se,
tra nsponders 3, see the instructions fit child restraint system s on the rear seat.
enclosed with the sy stem. Have the ca use of the fault eliminated by
a workshop .
Seats, Interior 101
Im portant z Do not bond or use other material to z Each a irb ag or deployable roll-ov er
z Do not affix or p lace accessories or other cover the steering wheel, dashboard, bar 3 d eploys once only . Hav e a
ob jects in the deployment area or the front seat back rests and roof frame in workshop replace dep loy ed airbags
airb ag systems or deployable anti-roll the area of the airbags and the seat immediately.
bars 3 a s this could result in injuries if the cushion of the passenger seat or the z The speeds, directions of movement and
com ponents are triggered. covers of the deployable anti-roll bars 3. deformation properties of the vehic les,
z Do not p la ce a ny objects between the z Use only a dry cloth or interior cleaner to and the p roperties of the obstacle
airb ag systems/a nti-roll bar cov ers 3 clean the steering wheel, instrument conc erned, determ ine the severity of the
and the occupants. Risk of injury . panel, front seat back rests, roof frame accident and triggering of the airbags.
and sea t cushion of the front passeng er The degree of dama ge to y our vehicle
9 Warning seat. Do not use any aggressive cleaning and the resulting repair costs alone are
agents. not indica tiv e that the criteria for
Nev er carry child restraint sy stems or trig gering of the airb ags were met.
z O nly protective covers whic h are
other objects on your lap - risk of fatal
approved for y our v ehicle with side z Do not make any m od ifica tions to
injury. airbag 3 ma y be fitted on the front components of the airbag systems or the
seats. When fitting the protective covers, anti-roll ba rs 3 as this would render the
z Use the hooks in the roof frame only to
mak e sure that the airbag units on the vehicle unroad worthy.
hang up light articles of clothing or c oa t
outboard sides of the front seat
hangers. Do not place any objects in the
pockets of the hanging items – risk of
back rests a re not covered. 9 Warnin g
injury. z The airb ag systems are triggered
The systems can b e triggered abrup tly
indep endently of each other based on
z The control elec tronics of the airbag and cause injury if they are ha nd led
the sev erity of the accident and the ty pe
system s, belt tensioners and deploy able improperly.
of im pact. The sid e airbag system 3 and
anti-roll bars 3 are located in the centre
the curtain airba g system 3 are
console area . Do not store any mag netic z We recom mend ha ving the steering
triggered together.
ob jects in the area as they could cause wheel, the instrument panel, all panelling
malfunction. z Astra TwinTop: The deployable anti-roll parts, the door sea ls, the handles and
bars 3 a re deployed together with the the seats removed by a workshop.
front and sid e airba g systems 3
depending on the severity of the impact.
102 Seats, Interior
z When disposing of the vehicle, the safety z In order to prev ent malfunctions when
instruc tions given for this must be using a Vaux hall child restraint sy stem
ob served. Tak e the vehicle to a recycling with transp onders 3 on the front
com pany for disposa l. passenger seat, no objec ts (e.g. plastic
sheet, stick ers or heated mats) may be
z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should
placed under the child restraint system.
only tra vel on the rear seats. This does
not ap ply to children who are trav elling
in c hild restra int system s w ith
9 Warning
transponders 3.
C hild restraint system s a s well as other
z In vehicles with seat occupancy objec ts m ust nev er be carried on the lap
recognition 3, do not plac e any heavy of passengers; risk of fatal injury. I f
ob jects on the front passenger seat carried in this way, child restraint sy stems
otherw ise the airba g systems for the with transponders 3 in v ehicles with seat
front p assenger sea t may be trigg ered in occupancy recognition 3 could lead to Picture no: 17118t.tif
the ev ent of an acc ident. front passenger airbag sy stems not Use of child restra int systems 3 on t he
front p assenger seat in v ehic les w ith
z In vehicles with seat occupancy being triggered in the event of an
accident. ai rbag syst em s, but wi thout sea t
recognition 3, to prevent m alfunctions occup ancy recog nition 3
do not use protective covers or sea t
cushions on the front passenger seat. 9 Warnin g
No child restraint system 3 may be
installed on front passenger seat. Danger
to life.
Versions with front passeng er airbag can

be identified by the word AI RBAG over the
glove compa rtm ent and the warning
sticker on the side of the instrument panel,
visible when the passenger door is open -
see Fig. 17118 A.
Seats, Interior 103
Vehicles with sea t occupancy recognition

are identified by a stick er on the low er
panel of the front passenger sea t – see
Fig. 17116 T.

The side airbag system 3 is identified by Use of chil d restraint syst em s 3 on front
the word AI RBAG on the outboard sides of passenger seat in v ehi cles w ith ai rbag
the front seat b ackrests. systems and seat occup ancy
rec ognition 3
Seat occupancy recognition 3 – see
page 99.
9 Warning
O nly Vauxhall child restra int sy stems with
transp onders 3 can be fitted on the front
passenger seats. Use of systems without
transp onders pose a risk of fatal injury.
104 Seats, Interior
Rollover protection system 3

The Astra TwinTop is eq uipp ed w ith
rollover protection with reinforced
windscreen frame and anti-roll bars behind
the rear sea t head restraints. Depending
on the variant, the a nti-roll bars are either
fixed or deploy automatically in the event
of an imp act of a certain severity . The
subsequent desc ription only regards the
va riant w ith a utomatica lly deployed anti-
roll bars 3.

Vehicles with seat oc cup anc y recog nition Vauxhall c hild restraint system s w ith
can also be identified by c ontrol tra nsponders 3 can be identified by a
indicator y in the instrum ent panel. sticker on the child restraint system – see
If control indicator y illumina tes for figure.
approx. 4 seconds when the ignition is
switched on, the vehicle is eq uipp ed w ith
seat occupancy recognition see page 99.
The seat occupancy recognition system
detects Vaux hall child restraint sy stems
with transponders 3 and deactivates the
front and sid e airbag sy stems 3 for the
front passenger seat. The curtain airbag
system 3 rem ains activ ated. For sea t
occupancy recognition see pa ge 99.
Seats, Interior 105
In the event of a rollover, the anti-roll bars Control i nd icator v for anti-roll bars Extended a nt i-roll b ars
deploy upwards in a matter of The deployable anti-roll b ars a re can b e retra cted (e.g. in order to close the
milliseconds. They also deploy tog ether monitored electronica lly together with the roof after a collision).
with the front and side airbag systems 3 , belt tensioners and the airbag systems. Press the lever between the rods of an anti-
helping to optim ise occupant protection. Their op erational readiness is indicated by roll bar to unlock the system . Push the anti-
control indica tor v in the instrument panel.
The system dep loy s whether the roof is roll bar a ll the way down until it engaged.
When the ignition is switched on, the
open or closed. Roof opera tion is not Fit the cov er.
control indicator illuminates for approx.
possible if the a nti-roll bars are ex tended .
4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does Repeat the procedure on the other anti-roll
not g o out a fter 4 seconds or illum inates bar.
whilst driving, there is a fa ult in or C ontrol indicator v, however, will rema in
deploym ent of the anti-roll bars, b elt illuminated and the a nti-roll bars will not
tensioners and airb ag systems - see deploy in the event of another collision.
page 87. The systems may fail to trigger in
the event of an ac cident. 6
Deploym ent of the anti-roll bars is
indica ted b y continuous illum ination of v.
106 Seats, Interior
Hav e the cause of the fault eliminated Note z Deploym ent of the a nti-roll bars is
immediately by a workshop . z Do not place any objects on the covers of ind ic ated b y illumination of control
the anti-roll bars behind the hea d ind ic ator v.
9 Warning restraints. They w ould be p ropelled z Manually retracted anti-roll ba rs will not
through the vehicle in an uncontrolled deploy in the event of a collision.
The roof cannot b e closed or opened if fashion should the anti-roll bars deploy .
the anti-roll bars are extended. The anti- Such objects could also prevent the a nti- z After deploy ment of the anti-roll b ar,
roll b ars m ust first be retracted. roll bars from extending. ha ve the system repaired by a w ork shop
immediately.
If an attempt is mad e to operate the roof z Do not operate the roof while the anti-
while the a nti-roll bars are ex tended, a roll bars are ex tended . Parts of the roof
continuous signal will sound as a could be dam aged during such
warning. opera tion.
Seats, Interior 107
Cigarette lighter 3 Press in ciga rette lighter. Switches off Accessory socket 3
The c ig arette lighter is located under the autom atic ally once the element is glowing. S om e vehicles have an ac cessory soc ket for
ashtray cover. Pull out lighter. the connection of electrical accessories
instead of a cigarette lighter. Use of the
The cover opens when pressed at the point
acc essory socket while the engine is not
indicated .
running will discharge the battery.
6
108 Seats, Interior
Elec trica l accessories connected to the

socket must comply with the
electrom agnetic comp atibility
requirements laid down in DIN VDE 40 839,
otherwise vehicle malfunctions ma y occur.
If the tyre repair set is 3 is in opera tion, no
consumers ma y be connected to the
auxiliary socket.

Estates hav e an a dditional accessory Ashtray 3
soc ket 3 in the luggag e com partment. To be used only for ash and not for
Do not dama ge the sock ets by using comb ustible rubb ish.
unsuitable plugs.
9 Warnin g
The m aximum power consum ption of
electrical accessories must not ex ceed Failure to observe these descriptions can
120 watts. lead to injuries which ma y be fatal.
Do not connect any current-delivering Vehic le pa ssengers should be informed
accessories, e.g. electrica l charging accordingly.
devices or ba tteries.
Ashtray, front
The cover op ens when pressed a t the point
indicated.
Seats, Interior 109
To empty, grip both sid es of the ashtray Rea r ashtray 3 To empty, open the ashtray, press the
insert at the spots illustrated and pull In the rear centre console. spring (arrow) a nd pull the a shtray straight
upwards. out rea rw ards.
Pull out the ashtray by pushing on one of
the sides.
110 Seats, Interior
Foldaway tables 3
on the front seat ba ckrests.
O pen by pulling upward until it engag es.
Fold away by p ressing down p ast the
resista nce point.
Do not place any heavy ob jects on the
table.

Stowage compartments St owage comp artm ent in front arm rest 3
Glove comp artm ent To open, press button and open upper part
To op en, pull handle upwards. of armrest.
The glove compartment shelf 3 can b e

removed: Disengage the shelf by pulling on
the front edge.
Refit the shelf b y sliding it into the side
guid e strips and engage it in the rear panel
by pushing.
The front of the open c ov er houses a pen
holder and a coin compartment.
Cooled glov e c om partment 3 – see
page 156.
Seats, Interior 111
Sun visors, glove com partment

Use the sun visor to protect from glare by
pulling it down and swivelling it to the
side 3.
The mirror covers in the sun visors a nd the
glove compartment should be closed whilst
driving.
On vehicles with panora mic windscreen 3,
close the sun visors before moving the roof
lining.

Stow age com partm ent for glasses 3
O n driver’s side: fold down to open.
Do not store heav y objects in the stowag e
compartment.
112 In struments, Controls
Instruments, Controls
Pict ure no: 18444t.tif Picture no:

Control indic ators – The electronic key is in the wrong
The control indica tors described here are location in the vehicle interior (do not
Control indicators .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 112
not p resent in all vehicles. The description put k ey in luggage compartment or
Instrument display ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 119
applies to all instrum ent versions. in front of information display), or
Information display . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 122 the electronic key is not in the vehicle
Warning buzzers.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 140 The control indica tor colours mean: interior, or influence from an external
Wind screen wiper .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 141 z Red Danger, important rem ind er, interference sourc e (radio masts,
z Y ellow interfering transmitters in the
Warning , note, fault,
vicinity).
z Green O n confirmation, or
z Blue O n confirmation. – Elec tronic key failure, for em ergency
op eration – see pag e 35.
0 If the battery in the electronic key needs
Open&Sta rt system 3 changing, I nSP3 appea rs in the service
Control indica tor illuminates or flashes display or, in vehicles w ith check control 3 ,
yellow. by an appropriate message in the
If it flashes inform ation display - see pages 36, 120.
System has not detected electronic key in
vehicle interior. The reasons for this m ay
be:
In struments, Controls 113
Lights
I 9 Warnin g
Fault in Open&S tart sy stem. Engine oil p ressure
Loc k or unlock v ehicle using rem ote control Control indica tor illuminates red. When the eng ine is off, considerably
or emergency key if necessary – see It illum ina tes when the ignition is switched more force is needed to brake and steer.
page 42, or attem pt to use the spare key.
on a nd goes out shortly after the engine Do not remove key until v ehicle has com e
Em ergency operation – see page 43. starts. to a standstill, otherw ise the steering
If 0 illuminates, this can also mea n that Illum inates when the engine is running colum n lock could engage unexpectedly .
the steering wheel lock is still loc ked: move Engine lub ric ation may be interrupted . This
steering w heel to and fro a little and press may result in dam age to the engine and/or C ontact a workshop for a ssistance.
Start/Stop button again. lock ing of the drive wheels:
If 0 illuminates whilst driving a system 1. Move out of the flow of traffic as quickly
error has occurred that may eventually as possible, without impeding other
lea d to a com plete failure. vehicles.
If 0 illuminates or flashes: The Start/S top 2. Depress clutch.
button must b e held depressed somew hat
3. Move gearshift lev er to neutral, or with
longer to switch off the ignition. It is Easy tronic 3 , place selector lever in N.
possible that the v ehicle will not start
during the next start attem pt. 4. Sw itch off ignition.
If these flash continuously or if 0
illuminates, contact a workshop
immediately .
v
Airb ag system s 3 , belt tensioners 3,
depl oyabl e a nt i-roll b ars 3
C ontrol indicator illuminates red.
Illuminates when the eng ine is running
Fault in airbag system, belt tensioners or
roll-over protection, see pages 87, 98, 104.
v
Electronic S tabil ity Prog ramm e
(ES P®P lu s ) 3
C ontrol indicator flashes or illuminates
yellow.
Pi cture no: 18444t.tif Picture no:
R Flashing during driving
Brak e system , clut ch system 9 Warning S ystem ac tiv ely engaged, see
Control indicator illuminates or flashes red. pag es 208, 209.
Lights when the handbrake is released:
It illum ina tes a fter the ig nition is turned on, stop vehicle immediately. C ontac t a Illuminates while driving
when the hand brake is applied or if the S ystem switched off or fault in system for
workshop for assista nce.
brake or clutch fluid lev el is too low. For Electronic Stability Program, see p age 209.
further information see pages 221, 302.
X
For vehicles w ith Easytronic 3, the control Seat belt 3
indicator flashes for a few seconds when C ontrol indicator illum inates or flashes red .
the ig nition is turned off if the hand brak e
is not applied. Lights w hen the ignition is turned on, until
the seat belt is fastened. After starting to
drive, the control indicator flashes.
Fasten seat belt, see pag e 88.
Q A j
Door open Engine electronics, t ransmission Easytronic 3, star t eng ine
Control indicator illum inates red. elect ronics 3, im mobil iser, d iesel fuel C ontrol indicator illuminates yellow .
filter 3
It is illum inated w hen a door or the luggag e It illuminates if the foot brake is not
Control indica tor illuminates or flashes
compartment is open. operated. The ind ic ator goes off as soon a s
yellow. the foot brake is operated. The engine can
p It illum ina tes for a few seconds when the only be started with the foot brake
Alternat or ignition is switc hed on. operated, see page 182.
Control indicator illum inates red.
Illum inates when the engine is running I DS +
It illuminates when the ignition is switched Fault in eng ine or gearbox electronic
I nt era ctiv e Dri ving S ystem 3, Continuous
on and goes out shortly after the engine sy stem. Electronics hav e switched to Dam ping Control (CDC ) 3 , S PO RT mode 3
starts. emergency running programm e fuel
C ontrol indicator illuminates yellow .
Illuminates when the engine is running consumption may be increased a nd the
vehicle’s driveab ility reduced, see It illuminates for a few sec onds when the
Stop, switch off eng ine. Battery is not
page 206. C ontact a workshop ignition is switched on.
charging. Cooling may be faulty. For diesel
engines, the effect of the brak e serv o may immed iately. Illuminates while driving
be lost. Contact a w ork shop imm ediately. Illum inated together with InS P4 in the Fault in sy stem. C ontac t a workshop
service display : Ha ve the diesel fuel filter imm ediately.
W drained of wa ter – see p age 300. IDS + - see pag e 176, CDC – see page 210,
Coola nt temperat ure
Flashes when the ignition is on S PO RT mode – see p age 210.
Control indicator illum inates red.
Fault in the electronic im mobiliser sy stem;
Illuminates when the engine is running the engine cannot be started – see
Stop a nd sw itch off engine. C oola nt page 29.
tem perature too high: Dang er of eng ine
dam age. Chec k coolant level
immediately – see pa ge 300.
O
Turn signal lights
C ontrol indicator flashes green.
The corresp onding c ontrol indicator
flashes on the side of the direc tion
indicators selected.
Both control indic ators flash with the
hazard warning lights on.
Fast fla shing: failure of a direction
indicator light or associated fuse, failure of
direction indicator light on trailer 3.
C ha nge bulbs, see page 269. Fuses, see
Pi cture no: 18444t.tif Picture no: pag e 262.
S 8
Eng ine oi l level 3 Exterior light s Y
Control indicator illum inates yellow. Control indica tor illuminates green. Fuel lev el
The engine oil level is c hecked1) It is illum ina ted when the exterior lights are C ontrol indicator illuminates or flashes
automatically. on – see page 143. yellow.
Illuminates when the engine is running Lights
r Low fuel level, fuel gauge in reserv e a rea.
Engine oil level too low. C heck engine oil Pa rking distance sensor 3
lev el and top up engine oil if necessary, see Flashing
Control indica tor illuminates y ellow.
page 298. Fuel supply exhausted, refuel immediately .
Fault in system. Contact a work shop
immed iately. N ever let the tank run dry!
Pa rk ing distance sensor, see page 214. Erra tic fuel sup ply can c ause catalytic
converter to overheat, see pa ge 204.
Diesel engines: I f the tank is run dry, bleed
the fuel sy stem as desc rib ed on pag e 241.
1)
Not on Z 14 XEP or Z 20 LEH en gine. Sales
design atio n – see pa ge 310 .
T
> Z
Wi nt er program me of autom atic
Fog light s 3 Exhaust emi ssion 3
transmission 3 or Easyt ronic 3
Control indicator illum inates green. C ontrol indicator illuminates or flashes
Control indica tor illuminates in gear y ellow.
It is illum ina ted when the fog lights are on – display with Winter programm e engaged .
see page 145. It illuminates w hen the ignition is switched
Further inform ation – see on and g oes out shortly after the engine
pages 180, 186, 193.
C starts.
Mai n bea m
1 Illuminates when the eng ine is running
Control indicator illum inates blue.
SPORT mode of autom atic tra nsm ission 3 Fault in emission c ontrol system. The
It is illuminated when main beam is on and or Easytronic 3 permitted emissions may be ex ceeded.
during headlight flash – see pa ge 11. Control indica tor illuminates in gear C ontact a workshop immediately.
display with Sport p rogram me engaged. If it flashes when the engine is running
r
Fog tail light Further inform ation – see Fault which could lead to damag e to the
pages 179, 185, 192. cataly tic conv erter, see pa ge 205. Contact
Control indicator illum inates yellow.
a work shop imm ediately.
It is illum inated when the fog tail lig hts are y
on – see pa ge 145. Seat occup ancy r ecog ni tion 3 u
Control indica tor illuminates or flashes in Anti -lock Bra ke Syst em (ABS ) 3
mileage display. C ontrol indicator illuminates red.
Lights Illuminates while driving
Sea t occupancy recognition has detected Fault in anti-lock brake system, see
a child restraint system with tra nsponders. pag e 223.
Airba g systems for the passenger are
deactiv ated, see page 99.
Flashing : Fa ult in system or child seat with
tra nsponder not correctly fitted, see
page 99.
B
Ad aptiv e Forwa rd Lighting 3 (AFL)
C ontrol indicator illuminates or flashes
yellow.
Lights
Fault in sy stem. C ontac t a workshop
imm ediately.
Flashing
S ystem converted to sym metrical dipped
beam.
AFL – see page 147.
Pi cture no: 18444t.tif Picture no: m

! w C ruise cont rol 3
Preheat ing system 3, Diesel p articl e Defla tion detection syst em 3, tyre C ontrol indicator illuminates green.
filt er 3 pressure monit oring system 3
Control indicator illum inates or flashes Control indica tor illuminates red It is illuminated w hen the system is on – see
yellow. Ty re p ressure loss – see pag e 217. pag e 212.
Lights Control indica tor illuminates y ellow

Preheating system active, switches on only Fault in system, see pages 217, 218.
if outside tem perature is low. Contact a workshop for assistance.
Flashing
(on vehicles with diesel p artic le filter)
Diesel particle filters m ust be clea ned.
Continue driving and as soon as the road
and traffic conditions permit it, increase
speed to more than 25 m ph (40 km /h), at
which point diesel particle filter cleaning
will start. The control indicator goes off as
soon a s cleaning is complete. We
recom mend leaving the ignition switched
on during the cleaning .
Further information – see pa ge 207.

Instrum ent display Speedometer Fuel gauge
O n some versions, the p ointer of the Speed d isplay . Pointer in left = Reserve area
tachometer, speedometer and fuel gauge zone or Y
briefly moves to its end position when the illuminated
ignition is switched on. Pointer in left = Refuelling,
Tachom eter zone or Y see pag e 202
Indicates engine speed. flashing
Warning zone: M aximum p ermissible N ever run the tank dry !
engine speed exceeded; danger to engine. Diesel engines: I f the tank is run dry, bleed
the fuel sy stem as desc rib ed on pag e 241.
Because of the fuel remaining in the tank,
the amount of fuel required to fill the tank
ma y be less than the spec ified tank
cap acity.
Tim e d isplay 3
To adjust the time, setting knob in
instrument:
Press for approx . 2 seconds:
Hours flash
Press briefly
Set hours
Press for approx . 2 seconds
Minutes flash
Press briefly
Set minutes
Press for approx . 2 seconds
Clock is started .
Picture no: 17335t.tif. Picture no: 17008t.tif
O dometer displa y Bottom line: Serv ice Display
Top line: Odometer I nS P S ervice interval d isplay . Shows
Trip odometer or clock displa y 3 Records the m iles counted. distance remaining to nex t
To switch between the trip odometer and service. Further notes, see
the c lock display 3 , press reset knob pag e 296.
briefly , see prev ious page. I nS P2 Bulb blown 3, see page 269.
Trip odometer I nS P3 Battery voltage of radio remote
Display of miles covered sinc e reset. control or electronic key in
To reset, hold reset button down for O pen&Start system low 3, see
around one second with the ignition turned pag es 31, 36.
on, see previous pag e. I nS P4 Water in diesel fuel filter 3.
If the clock display is activated, first switch C ontact a workshop for
to trip odometer. assistance.
O n vehicles with check control 3, a
message is shown on the info display
instead of I nSP2 and InSP3.
For Easytronic 3, the display flashes for a

ESPoff Electronic Stability Programm e 3
few seconds if A, M or R is selected when
off, see page 208.
the engine is running but the foot brake is
ESPon Electronic Stability Programm e 3 not depressed.
on, see page 208.

Tr ansm issi on display 3
Display of gea r selected in automatic
tra nsmissions 3 or current gear or mode
for Easytronic 3:
P Part position on automatic
transmission.
R Rev erse gear.
N Neutral.
A Automa tic mode on Easytronic.
M Manual mode on Easytronic.
D Automa tic mode on autom atic
transmission.
1-4 Current gear on automatic
transmission.
1-5 Manual mode, current gear for
1-6 3 Easytronic.
2 Board Computer 19,5° 19:36
12:01 17,0 °C 11:25 } 21 .5 °C BC 1 All values
BC 2
Range 257.0
FM 3 90,6 MHz Timer 1
miles
REG AS RDS TP
RDS [ TP]
Ø 40 mph
7.0
257miles 8 Ø 31.0
gal
Lt r. /100km
Information display Board inform ation di sp lay 3 Grap hical i nfor mation d isplay 3,
Tripl e inform ation d isp lay Display of time, outside temp erature a nd C olour informat ion displa y 3
Display of time, outside tempera ture and date/infotainment sy stem (when it is on). Display of time, outsid e tem perature, date/
date/infotainm ent system (when it is on). infota inm ent system (when it is on) and
F in the displa y indicates a fa ult. Have the
climate control sy stem 3 .
When the ignition is off, the time, date and cause elim inated by a workshop.
outside tem perature can be presented for The graphical information d isplay presents
15 second s b y briefly pressing one of the the information in monochrome. The colour
two buttons b elow the displa y. inform ation display presents the
inform ation in colour.
F in the display indicates a fault. Hav e the
cause eliminated by a workshop.
The ty pe of information and how it is

displayed depends on the equipment of
the v ehicle and the settings of the trip
computer 3, clima te control sy stem 3 a nd
infotainment sy stem 3 . :
Some information appea rs in the display in 8:56 -5 ,5° C
an abb reviated form. Slippery road
Clim ate control system – see page 168. 07.04.2004 -2, 5°C
Infotainm ent system – see infotainment
system instructions.
F in the display indicates a fault. Hav e the OK
cause eliminated by a workshop.
Outside temperature In v ehicles with graphical information
A fall in temp erature is indicated display 3 or colour information display 3,
immed iately and a rise in temperature a warning message appears the display as
after a tim e delay. a warning for icy road surfaces. There is no
message below -5 °C.
If outside temp erature d rops to 3 °C , the
sy mbol : illuminates in the triple 9 Warnin g
information display or the board
information display 3 as a wa rning for icy Caution: The road surface may already
road surfaces : rema ins illuminated until be icy even though the d isplay indicates
temperatures reach a t least 5 °C . a few deg rees ab ov e 0 °C .
Correcting time 3 Deactivating/ac tiv ating autom atic time

Some RDS transmitters do not send a synchronisation: infotainment sy stem off,
correct time sig nal. If the incorrect time is press Ö and ; below the display:
8:56 5 ,5 °C continually displa yed, switch off automa tic Hold down Ö for a pprox. 2 sec., cloc k
tim e synchronisation 3 a nd set the tim e display is now in setting m ode.
manually - see nex t column.
07.04.2004 The automatic setting is indicated by } in
Press Ö twice (until year flashes).
the display. Press Ö and hold down for approx.
3 seconds until } flashes in display 3
and " RDS TIME" a ppears (years fla sh
during this tim e).
Press ;; display shows:
RDS TIME 0 = O ff.
Pi cture no: 17024t.tif Press ;; display shows:
Triple info rmation display RDS TIME 1 = O n.
Set d ate and ti me Press Ö three tim es.
Infotainm ent system off: p ress Ö and ;
below the display as follows:
Press Ö for ap prox . 2 seconds:
Day fla shes
;: Set day
Ö : Month fla shes
;: Set month
Ö : Year flashes
;: Set year
Ö : Hours flash
;: Set hours
Ö : Minutes flash
;: Set minutes
Ö : Clock is started.
11:25} 21.5 °C
Range
257miles
Board information display 3, Selec tion wit h arrow k eys Select using the l eft adjuster wheel 3 on
Selecting functions Select the menu points using the buttons the steer ing wheel
on the Infota inm ent system. Turn up
Functions and settings of some
Prev ious menu point,
equipm ent 3 can be accessed via the OK button
board information disp lay. Select mark ed p oint, confirm c om mand. Turn down
N ext m enu point,
This is used with the menus and buttons of
the I nfotainment System 3 or with the left Press
adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. S elec t marking, c onfirm com mands.
The c orresponding m enu options are then S ystem settings – see pa ge 131.
displayed in the next line of the display.
Trip comp uter – see pa ge 128.
If warning messages from C heck control 3
are shown, the display is blocked for other
inform ation. Confirm the wa rning
message. If there are several warning
messages, confirm these in succession.
The functions are displayed in the following

order:
z Time synchronisation
z Time, setting hours
11:25} 21.5 °C z Time, setting minutes 11:25} 21 .5°C
z Date, setting day
z Date, setting month
System z Date, setting year Clock Sync.On
z Ignition logic
z Language selection
z Setting units of measure

Board information display 3, C orrec ting ti me 3
System settings S om e RDS transmitters d o not send correct
time signa ls. If the incorrect tim e is
Press the Sett ings button of the
displayed often, deactiv ate automatic
infotainment sy stem. M enu item Audio or
time synchronisation 3 and set the time
System will app ear.
ma nually.
Press left arrow key to access menu p oint
System . S elect menu point System. The
first function of the menu System is shown.
Some information appea rs in the display in
an abb reviated form.
The a utomatic setting is indicated by } in

the d isplay .
To correct time with the help of R DS, select
the m enu item for time synchronisation
from the Set tings menu. 11:25 } 21 .5 °C 11:25} 21 .5°C
Make the desired setting.
Setti ng date and time English Unit Europe-SI
Select the menu item for time and da te
setting from the Settings menu.
The setting is saved when the m enu item is
exited.
Ig ni tion logic 3 Lang uage selecti on Sett ing units of measure
See infotainment system instructions. You can select the d isplay language for Y ou can select which units of mea sure are
some func tions. to be used.
Select the menu item for language from the S elec t the menu item for units of measure
Settings m enu and ma ke the desired from the Settings m enu and confirm the
setting. desired setting.
Board information display 3, Av era ge consum ption

Trip computer 3 Display of av erage consump tion. The
measurement c an be reset to zero at any
The trip computer p rov ides information on
time and restarted, see "Reset".
driving data, which is continually recorded
and evaluated electronically . 11:25 } 21 .5 °C Effec tive consumpt ion
Display of fuel used. The m easurement can
Access trip computer vehicle data by
be reset to zero at any time and restarted,
pressing the BC button on the infotainment Inst. Consumpt. see "Reset".
system or the left ad juster w heel 3 on the
steering wheel. Av era ge sp eed
Display of av erage speed. The
Some information appea rs in the display in
an abb reviated form.
7.6 miles/gal measurement can be reset at any time and
restarted, see "Reset".
O nce an audio function has been selected,
S topp ages in the journey with the ignition
the subsequent rows of the trip computer Pict ure no: 17337t.tif
Instantaneous consumption off are not included in the c alcula tions.
func tion are displayed.
Display changes depending on speed: Distanc e t ravelled
The functions are displa yed in the following
Display of m iles travelled. The
order: Display in gal/h below 8 m ph (13 km /h),
measurement c an be reset to zero at any
z Instantaneous consumption Display in mpg above 8 mph (13 km/h). time and restarted, see "Reset".
z Av erage consump tion
z Effective consump tion
z Av erage speed
z Distance tra velled
z Rang e
z Stop watch
Reset:
Reset tri p comp uter informat ion
The follow ing trip computer information
can be reset (reset and restart
measurements or calcula tions):
11:25} 21.5 °C 11:25} 21 .5°C
z Average consumption
z Effective consumption
Range z Average speed Stop W atch
z Distanc e travelled.
Select the desired trip computer
257miles information. 01:22:32 h
Reset by pressing the left adjuster wheel 3
on the steering w heel or the O K button on
Range the Infotainm ent system. St op wa tch
Range is calculated from current fuel tank S elec t function, operate with arrow k eys:
content and instanta neous consumption. Left arrow k ey
The d isplay shows average values. S elec t menu point Start, Start/S top w ith O K
After refuelling, the v ehicle up dates the button
range autom atically after a brief delay . Right arrow k ey
If less than 30 mph (50 k m) can be driven S elec t menu point Reset, reset with OK
with the fuel rema ining in the tank, the button
warning "Range" a ppears on the d isplay . O perating using the left adjuster wheel 3
If less than 20 mph (30 k m) can be driven on the steering wheel:
with the fuel rema ining in the tank, the Press
warning "Refuel!" 3 app ears on the S ta rt/Stop
display.
I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly
Acknowled ge the menu item as desc rib ed If the power supp ly has been interrupted or
on page 130. if the battery voltage ha s dropped too low,
the values stored in the trip computer w ill
be lost.
FM AS [TP] REG C Din MP3
1 90.6 MHz
19,5° 19: 36

Graphical information display 3 Selec tion wit h arrow k eys To selec t using the mult i-function butt on
or Colour information display 3 , Select menu points via m enus and with the Turn
Selecting functions buttons on the Infotainment system. Mark menu options or commands, select
function ranges,
The functions and settings of some OK button
equipm ent 3 can be accessed via the Select mark ed p oint, confirm c om mand. Press
graphical informa tion display or the colour S elec t marking, c onfirm com mands.
To exit a menu, press the right or left a rrow
inform ation d isplay . key to access Return or M ain. To exit a m enu, turn the m ulti-func tion
These functions are mark ed on the menu button left or right to Return or M ain and
on the d isplay or performed using the select.
arrow keys 3 on the Infota inment system,
the m ulti-function b utton 3 on the
Infotainm ent system or w ith the left
adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel.
If warning messages from Chec k-Control 3
are shown, the display is blocked for other
inform ation. Confirm the wa rning
message. If there are several warning
messages, confirm these in succession.
7 Settings 19,5° 19:36

FM AS [TP] REG C Din MP3 Time, Date 19:36
Language
1 90.6 MHz Units 10 . 07 . 2004
Contrast
Day / Night
19,5° 19: 36 6 Ign. logic
Select using t he left a djuster wheel 3 on Functi on ranges System settings
the steeri ng wheel For each functional area there is a main The settings are accessed via the Setting s
Turn up page (Main), which is selected at the top menu.
previous menu point, edge of the d isplay (not with the Press the Ma in button 3 (not found on all
Infotainment sy stem CD 30 or the Mobile
Turn down infota inm ent sy stems) on the infota inm ent
Phone Portal):
nex t menu point, system (c all up main display).
z Audio,
Press Press the S ett ings button of the
z Na vigation 3,
Select marking, confirm comm ands. infota inm ent system. On Infotainment
z Telephone 3 , S ystem C D 30, make sure no menu has
z Trip comp uter 3. been selected .
For Audio, Nav ig ation 3 and Telephone 3 The Settings m enu is displa yed.
functions – see infotainment sy stem
instructions.
Correcting time 3
In sy stems with GPS receiver 1), date and
tim e a re set a utoma tica lly upon receipt of
7 Time, Date 19,5° 19:36 a GPS satellite signal. If the display ed tim e 7 Settings 19,5° 19:36
does not match local time, it can be
Time 19:36 Time, Date
corrected manually or automatically by
receiving an RDS tim e signal2) 3. Language Deutsch
Date 10 . 07 . 2004 Some RDS tra nsmitters do not send correct Units English
tim e signals. If the incorrect time is Contrast Español
display ed often, deactivate autom atic Day / Night ...
6 Synchron. clock automatical. tim e synchronisation 3 a nd set the tim e
manually. 6 Ign. logic
To correct tim e with the help of RDS, select
Pi cture no: 17340t.tif menu item Synchron. clock autom atica l. Picture no: 17341t.tif
Setti ng the date and time 3 from the Time, Da te menu. Languag e selection
Select menu item Time, Dat e, from the Y ou can select the display language for
Setti ng s menu. The box in front of Synchron. clock some functions.
automat ical. will be ticked; see
The m enu for Time, Date is displayed. Fig. 17340 T. S elec t menu item Language from the
Sett ings menu.
Select the menu items required.
The available languages are displayed.
1)
GPS = G lo ba l P os itioning System ,
Satellite system for wo rld-wid e pos itioning .
2)
RDS = Rad io D ata S ys tem.
7 13 Languages 19,5° 19:36 7 Settings 19,5° 19:36 7 Contrast 19,5° 19:36
X Deutsch Time, Date

English Language ~ Europe-SI
Español Units | Japan 12
Nederlands Contrast | Great Britain
F rançais Day / Night | USA
Italiano 6 Ign. logic
Select the desired language. Setting unit s of m easur e Ad just ing contra st 3 (graphic al
You can select which units of measure are inform ation di sp lay)
Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of
to be used . S elec t menu item Cont rast from the
the m enu item .
Sett ings menu.
Select menu item U ni ts from the S et tings
In systems with voice output 3, w hen the
menu. The menu for Contr ast is disp layed .
language setting of the displa y is changed
the system will ask whether the The ava ilab le units are display ed. C onfirm the required setting .
announcement language should also be Select the desired unit.
changed – see Infotainment system
instructions. Selections are indicated by a o in front of
the menu item.
Setti ng displa y mod e 3

The displa y ca n be adjusted to suit the light
conditions, black or coloured tex t on a light
back ground or white or coloured text on a 2 Board Computer 19,5° 19:36
dark background. BC 1 All values
Select menu item Day / N ight from the BC 2 Range 257 miles
Setti ng s menu. 257.0
1
miles
The options are display ed.

Timer
Ø 40 km/ h
Inst. consumpt. 31.0 mpg
Tyres
Autom atic: adapted based on vehicle Ø- consumption 32.0 mpg
7.0
8
gal
lighting .
Ø 31.0 mpg
Alw ays day design: black or coloured tex t 19,5° 23° 5 Eco x 19: 36
on light backg round.

Alw ays night desi gn: white or coloured Pict ure no: 17344t.tif Picture no: 17329t.tif
tex t on dark b ackground . Graphic al information display 3 Ra ng e
or Colour information display 3, Range is calculated from current fuel tank
Selections are indicated by a o in front of content and instantaneous consumption.
Trip computer 3
the m enu item . The display shows av erage values.
The trip computers provide information on
Ig ni tion logic 3 driving data, which is continually recorded After refuelling, the vehicle updates the
See infotainment system instructions. and ev alua ted electronically. range automatically a fter a brief delay .
The trip computer main page (Main) gives
information on the range, current and
averag e fuel consumption 3.
To display other trip computer data, press
the BC button on the infotainment
sy stem 3, select the trip computer menu
front the display or press the left adjuster
wheel 3 on the steering wheel.
Di st ance trav ell ed

Display of miles travelled. The
measurement can be reset to zero a t any
tim e a nd restarted, see "Reset" . 2 Board Computer 19,5° 19:36
Average speed BC 1 All values
Calculation of avera ge speed. The BC 2
measurement can be reset to zero a t any 257.0
Range
1
miles
tim e a nd restarted, see "Reset" . Timer
2 3m iles Ø 40 mph
Stoppages in the journey with the ignition Tyres
off are not includ ed in the calculations. 7.0
8
gal
OK Effectiv e consum ption Ø 31.0 mpg
Display of fuel used. The measurem ent can

be reset to zero at any tim e and restarted,
If the fuel in the tank will allow less than see " Reset" . Reset :
30 miles (50 k m) of travel, the w arning Average consumpt ion Reset trip computer inform ation
"Range" ap pears on the d isplay . Calculation of avera ge c onsumption. The The following trip com puter inform ation
measurement can be reset to zero a t any can b e reset (restart measurements):
If less than 20 miles (30 k m) can be driven
with the fuel rema ining in the tank, the tim e a nd restarted, see "Reset" . z Distance
warning "Please refuel! " 3 appears on the z Average speed
display. z Effective consum ption
z Average consum ption.
Acknowled ge the menu item as desc rib ed
on page 130. S elec t BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer
menu.
Instant aneous consump tion
Display changes depending on speed :
Display in gal/h b elow 8 mph (13 km/h),
Display in mp g a bove 8 m ph (13 km /h).
I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly

If the power supp ly has been interrupted or
if the battery voltage ha s dropped too low,
2 Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36 2 Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36 the values stored in the trip computer w ill
be lost.
All values All values
257.0 m iles 257.0 m iles
Ø 40 m ph Ø 40 m ph
7.0 gal 7.0 gal
Ø 31.0 m pg Ø 31.0 m pg

The information of the two trip c om puters To reset all information of a trip computer,
can be reset separately , mak ing it possible select m enu item All v alues.
to evaluate d ata from different tim e After resetting, " - - -" is d isplay ed for the
periods. trip computer information selected. The
Select the desired trip computer recalculated values are displayed after a
inform ation. brief delay.
The v alue for the selected function will b e
reset and reca lculated.
The desired stop watch display c an be

selected from the Opti ons menu 3:
Dr iving Ti me excl. S tops
2 Board Computer 19,5° 19:36 2 Board Computer
The time the v ehicle is in m otion is
BC 1 recorded . Stationary tim e is not includ ed. BC 1
BC 2 00:00:00 Dr iving Ti me incl. S tops BC 2
Timer The time the v ehicle is in m otion is Timer
recorded . The tim e the vehicle is sta tionary
Tyres Start Tyres
with the key in the starter sw itc h is
Reset included.
Options Tr avel Time
Measurement of the time from manual
activation via Sta rt to manual deactivation
via Reset .
Stop wat ch Display of current tyre pressure 3
Select menu item Timer from the Board S elec t menu item Tyr es from the Board
Com puter menu. C omputer m enu.
The Tim er menu is displayed. The current pressure of eac h ty re is
To start, selec t menu item St art. displayed.
To reset, selec t menu item Reset . Further information – see page 218.
Check control 3 Exa mples of warning messages for the

Check control monitors some fluid levels, graphical inform ation disp la y 3 and colour
the ty re pressure 3, battery of the remote information d isplay 3 are depicted. O n the
control, the anti-theft warning system 3, board inform ation d isplay , messages
the b ra ke lig ht switch and im porta nt appea r in an abbreviated form .
exterior lights, including cable and fuses. In Ac know ledge warning messages as
trailer m ode, the trailer lig hting is described on pages 125, 130. Coolant level
monitored. Una cknowledged warning messages can ch eck
Warning messa ges appear on the display. be re-displayed later.
If there are severa l warning m essa ges, they Warning messages:
are disp layed one after the other. OK
Remote C ontrol
Some of the wa rning messages appear on
Bat ter y
the d isplay in an abbreviated form .
check Picture no: 17339t.tif
Brakelig ht switch
Battery volta ge of rad io remote control or chec k
electronic k ey in Open&S tart sy stem
too low 3, see pag e 31. Fault. Brake light does not come on during
brak ing. Have the cause of the fault
elimina ted im media tely b y a work shop.
Safeguard
chec k
Fault. Sy stem fault in Vaux hall alarm
system. Have the cause of the fault
elimina ted im media tely b y a work shop.
If there is a fa ult in the v ehicle lighting, the In vehicles with tyre p ressure control Wa sher
respective fault source is display ed as tex t, sy stem 3, if there is m ajor loss of pressure Fluid Lev el
e.g.: in a tyre, the d isplay indicates the tyre at chec k
fa ult, e.g .:
Brakelight Fluid level in windscreen wash sy stem too
check right Att enti on! low. Topping up wash fluid – see page 305.
Rear left t yre Rear window wash system and headlight
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring pressure l oss wash system 3 are dea ctiv ated if wash
system 3, if tyre pressure is too low, the (val ue in b ar) fluid lev el is low.
display indicates which tyre to check, e.g .:
Stop immediately and check tyres and tyre
Tyre pressure pressures. Ty re p ressure monitoring Coolant lev el
check rear sy stem 3 see pa ge 218. chec k
right Fluid level in eng ine cooling sy stem is low.
(v alue in bar) C heck c oolant level immed iately – see
Check ty re pressure at next opportunity pag e 300.
using suitable gauge. Tyre pressure I nt err up tion of pow er supp ly
monitoring sy stem 3 – see page 218. S tored warning messages appea r on the
Checking tyre pressure – see p age 337. display one after the other.
Warning buzzers Indica tor and w arning b uzzer s for Ast ra z Continuous warning buzzer during roof
When sta rting t he engine or whil st Tw inTop 3: operation if the a nti-roll bars 3 hav e
driv ing: z Indicator buzz er upon completed been triggered.
z if the electronic key of the O pen&S ta rt opening or c losing of the c onvertible z Continuous warning b uzz er starting one
system 3 is not present or is not hardtop.
minute before the end of the 9-minute
recognised, z Indicator buzzer upon completed raising stand-by time with the roof in an
z if seat belt 3 is not fastened, or lowering of the electric luggage intermed iate position.
compa rtm ent loading aid.
z if a door or the tailga te is ajar, z Continuous warning b uzz er starting one
z Gong tone if the boot lid is not closed minute before the end of the 9-minute
z once you have reached a certain during roof operation. stand-by time with the loading a id in a
speed 3 if the hand brake is applied, raised position.
z Gong tone if the boot lid is not fully
z if a specified maxim um speed 3 is opening during operation of the luggage z Persistent w arning b uz zer when closing
exceed ed, compa rtm ent loading aid. the luggage compa rtm ent lid, if the
z for Easytronic 3 - if A, M or R is selected z Gong tone d uring roof opera tion if low ering process of the electric load aid
while the engine is running a nd the vehicle speed ex ceeds 20 mph (30 km/h). is not complete or has been interrupted.
driv er’s door is opened but the foot
brake is not depressed. z Gong tone w hen vehicle speed exceeds
20 mph (30 k m/h) if the roof is not fully
When t he v ehi cle is park ed and the open or closed.
driv er’s door is opened:
z when the k ey is in the sta rter switch 3, z Three gong tones during roof or loading
aid op eration if the luggage
z with parking lights or dipped beam on, compa rtm ent blind is not attached.
z with Open&S tart sy stem 3 and z Three gong tones during roof op eration
automa tic transmission if the selector if outside temperature is b elow – 20 °C ,
lever is not in P, vehicle ba ttery v oltag e is too low or the
z with Easytronic 3 – if the hand brak e is system is overloaded.
not ap plied a nd no gear is engaged
when the engine is off.
Windscreen wiper Adjustab le t imed interv al wi pe 3 Autom atic wiping with ra in sensor 3:
To activate, m ov e stalk up lig htly . To set the wiper interv al to a value between To activa te, move stalk up lightly .
2 and 15 sec onds:
§ = off $ = automatic wiping with rain sensor
Turn on ignition, move sta lk from
$ = timed interval w ipe § = off
position § down, wait for desired interval,
% = slow move stalk to interval wipe $ . The ra in sensor detects the a mount of
& = fast The interval tim e selected rema ins stored water on the screen and automatically
until it is nex t changed or until the ignition controls the wiper.
The stalk a lways moves back to starting is turned off. K eep the rain sensor detection field clear
position. S hift to nex t hig her or lower level:
move stalk slightly . After turning on the ignition and setting the by activating the screen w ash system.
stalk to $, the interva l is set to 6 seconds.
Push stalk pa st resistance point a nd hold:
the w indscreen wiper sta ges are run
through; an acoustic signal sounds at
position § .
Press stalk down from position § : Single
swipe.
To de-activate, press stalk forward lightly

aga in.
If the stalk is held forwards, the rear screen
wash system a ctivates while the stalk is
held forwa rds.

O per ating w indscreen w ash system and Activ ate rear wip er and wa sh syst em
headlig ht wash system 3 To activate, push stalk forward lig htly .
To activate, pull stalk towards steering The rea r screen wiper swipes in timed
wheel. interval mode.
The w ip er swipes for a few strokes. At low The rea r screen wiper eng ages
speeds, there is a single post-wash swipe. autom atic ally when the windscreen wiper
The headlight wash sy stem 3 is ready for is switched on and rev erse gear is
opera tion when the hea dlights are engaged.
switched on. Wash fluid is sprayed onto the
head lig hts once. Then the headlight wash
system is disabled for 2 minutes.
O n vehicles fitted with rain sensor 3, keep
the sensor area clean.
Lightin g 143
Lighting Versions with day time running lights 3:

Parking lights are on when the ignition is
switched on and the light switch is set to 7
or AUTO . Dipped beam is on when the
eng ine is running.
The day time running lights switch off when
Ex terior lights .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 143 the ignition is switched off.
Main beam, headlight flash . .... .... ..... . 144
Autom atic dipped beam Follow the regula tions of the country in
activation 3 .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 144 which you are driving w hen using da ytime
running lig hts and fog lights 3.
Turn signal lights . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 144
Fog lights > 3 ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 145 Driving ab road – see pag e 150.
Fog tail light r .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 145
Reverse lig hts .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 145 Pict ure no: 17122t.tif
Haza rd warning lights.. .... ..... .... .... ..... . 145 Exterior lights
Headlight range adjustment ? .... ..... . 146 Turn light switch:
Adaptive Forw ard Lighting 3 (AFL) . . 147 7 = Off
Door-to-door lighting 3 ... ..... .... .... ..... . 148
8 = Park ing lights
Parking lights 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 148
9 = Dip ped beam
Instrument illum ination, I nformation
or main bea m
displa y illumination .... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 148
Courtesy lig ht .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 149 In positions 8 a nd 9, the tail lights and
Puddle lig ht 3 . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 150 numb er plate lights are also on.
Battery discharge p rotection.... .... ..... . 150 Control indica tor 8 – see page 116.
Light covers. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 150
If the ignition is switched off with the
Headlights w hen driving abroad . ..... . 150
dipped bea m or main b eam on, the
parking lights illuminate.
144 Ligh ting
Main beam, headlight flash Automatic dipped beam After operation, the turn signa l stalk
To switch from dipped beam to m ain activation 3 returns to its starting position.
beam, p ush stalk forwards. Light switch to A UTO: Dipped beam com es If the stalk is moved past the resistance
To switch back to dipp ed beam, press stalk on a utoma tica lly when the engine is point, the turn signal light rem ains on.
forwards again or pull towards steering running if outside light conditions warrant When the steering wheel mov es back
wheel. such. toward the straig ht-ahead position, the
turn signal lig ht is automatically
To activate the headlight flash, pull stalk The exterior lights switch off when the
deactivated.
towards steering w heel. Main beam is ignition is switc hed off.
enga ged for the duration of a ctivation. Tap signal: Move stalk to resistance point
For reasons of safety, the light sw itc h
and release to activate three fla shes from
The blue control indicator C is illuminated should alway s remain in the AUTO
the turn signals w hen changing lanes or the
when m ain bea m or head lig ht flash is on. position.
like.
Turn signal lights Move the stalk to the resistanc e point and
To activate, press stalk up or down lightly . hold for the turn signa ls to flash longer.
Stalk up = Right turn signal S witc h the turn signal off ma nually by
lights mov ing the stalk slightly .
Stalk down = Left turn signal
lights
Lightin g 145
Fog tail ligh t r

The fog tail light can only be switched on
both the ignition and dipped beam/
parking lights are on.
On = Press >, > lights in instrument
Off = Press > again or turn off
ignition or light.
The vehic le fog tail light a re deactivated

when towing.
Reverse lights
Come on when reverse gear is engaged
Pi cture no: 17124t.tif and ignition is switched on. Picture no: 16991t.tif
Fog lights > 3 Hazard warning lights
The fog lights can only b e switched on To switch on, p ress button ¨, to switch off,
when b oth the ignition a nd lights are on. press button ¨ ag ain.
On = Press >, > illuminates in To aid loc ation of the pushbutton, the red
instrument panel surfac e is illuminated w hen the ignition
O ff = Press > again or turn off switched on. When the button is pressed,
ignition or light off its control indicator flashes in time with the
hazard warning lights.
The ha zard warning lights switch on
automatically when the airbags are
triggered, and the c entral locking unloc ks
all d oors. S witch off haz ard warning lights
with button ¨.
146 Ligh ting
Vehicles without level control system Autom atic headlig ht ra nge ad just ment 3
O n vehicles with Xenon headlights, the
0 = Front seats oc cup ied
range of the headlights is adjusted
1 = All seats occupied automatically based on v ehicle loa d.
2 = All seats occupied and luggag e
comp artment load
3 = Driver’s seat occupied and luggage
comp artment load
Vehicles with level control sy stem

0 = Front seats oc cup ied
1 = All seats occupied
1 = All seats occupied and luggag e
Pi cture no: 17125t.tif comp artment load
Headlight range adju stment ?
2 = Driver’s seat occupied and luggage
Manual hea dlight range adjustm ent 3 comp artment load
With dipped bea m switched on, adjust
head lig ht range in four steps to suit vehicle
load. Turn wheel aga inst resistanc e and
click it to the req uired position.
Correct adjustment of the headlight range
red uces dazzle for other road users.
Autom atic lev el control system 3 , see
page 216.
Lightin g 147

Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 Curve lig hting C ont rol indic ator B for adap tive dri ving
(AFL) The Xenon light bea m pivots based on lig hts
steering wheel position a nd speed (from Illuminated : Fault in sy stem. The sy stem is
improves lig hting in curves (curve lighting )
approx. 6 m ph / 10 km /h). not rea dy for opera tion.
on vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlight
system. The head lig hts shine at an a ngle of up to If the cornering light swiv elling dev ice fails,
15° to the right or left of the direction of the relev ant dipped beam is switched off.
tra vel. The corresp onding fog light is
Motorwa y lig hting automatically switched on for reasons of
At higher speeds and continuous straight safety.
ahead trav el, the dipped beam C ontact a workshop for a ssistance.
autom atic ally raises slightly , thereby
increasing headlight range. If c ontrol indicator B flashes for app rox .
4 seconds after the ig nition is switched on,
the headlights have been set to
symm etrical d ipped beam; see "Headlights
when driving abroad" on page 150.
148 Ligh ting
Doo r-to-door lighting 3 Parking lights 3 Instrument illumination,
Dipped beam and reverse lights 3 The front parking light and tail light of one Information display illumination
illuminate for around 30 second s a fter the side of the v ehicle can be activated when C om es on when ignition is switched on.
driver exits the v ehicle and c loses his door. parking:
Brightness can be adjusted when the
To act ivat e 1. Set light switch to 7 or AU TO 3, exterior lights are on: Push to release
1. Switch off ignition. knob k a nd then turn it clockwise or
2. Ignition off,
2. Remove ignition key 3. anticlockwise and hold until the desired
3. Move turn signal stalk a ll the way up brightness is obta ined.
3. Open driver’ s d oor. (right park ing light) or down (left p arking
light). Display m ode 3 – see pag e 134.
4. Pull turn sig nal stalk tow ard steering
wheel. An acoustic signal sounds and control
indica tor O illuminates briefly in the
5. Close driver’s door.
instrument panel to indicate activation.
If the driv er’s door is left open, the lights will
To switch it off, switch on the ig nition or
go out after tw o minutes.
move the turn signal stalk in the opposite
The light is switched off imm ediately by direction.
inserting the key into the ignition or pulling
the turn signal stalk again with the driver’s
door open.
Lightin g 149
Courtesy light Front r ead ing lig hts 3 C our tesy lights a nd rear reading lights 3
Autom atic i nt eri or light Left and right read ing lights are C entre switch position: The rea r courtesy
Com es on automatically when the vehicle is indiv idua lly opera ble. With ignition on: light comes on together with the front one
when a door is open.
unlock ed with the radio remote control, on = Press button a
when a door is op ened or when the key is off = Press button a again The rea r reading lights on the left and right
rem ov ed from the starter switch after the can b e switched on separately . With
ignition is switched off. ignition on:
Goes off automatically after a delay when on = S witch position I
the d oors are closed or imm ediately when off = S witch position 0
the ignition is switched on or the d oors are
locked.
Front courtesy li ght
To operate manually from inside when the
doors are closed :
on = Press button c
off = Press button c again
150 Ligh ting
Ent ry li ghting 3 Battery discharge protection Vehicles wi th a dapti ve forw ard light ing 3
After unlocking the v ehicle, the instrument To prevent the ba ttery from b ecoming (AFL)
and switch lighting come on for a few discharged, the courtesy light, reading 1. Pull a nd hold stalk for main beam on
seconds. lig hts, luggag e com partment lighting and steering wheel (hea dlight flash).
Door handle li ghting 3 glove com partment lighting switch off 2. Switch on ignition.
When the ex terior lights are on, the interior autom atic ally 10 minutes after the ignition
3. After approx. 3 seconds, an acoustic
front door handles are illuminated . is switched off.
signal sound s a nd then AFL control
Ill uminated m irror in t he sun vi sors 3 Ligh t covers ind ic ator B flashes approx. 4 seconds.
The lighting switches on when the cover is The inside of the lig ht c ov ers may mist up After the sw itc h, AFL control ind icator B
opened. briefly in poor, wet and cold weather flashes for 4 seconds each tim e the ignition
Glov e com part ment light ing conditions, in heav y rain or after washing. is switched on.
on when lid is open. The mist disappea rs q uick ly by itself; to
help, switch on the lights. To return to asym metrical d ip ped beam ,
Ci garette lig ht er and ashtray pull and hold the main beam stalk again,
illum ination 3 Headlights when driving abroad switch on the ignition and wait for the
Com es on when ignition is switched on. The asymm etrical dipped b eam increases acoustic sig nal. AFL control ind icator B
the field of v ision on the p assenger sid e of will then discontinue flashing.
Luggage com part ment lighti ng
Com es on when the boot lid/tailgate is the lane. C ontrol indicator B – see page 147.
opened. This c auses glare for oncoming tra ffic if the
Autom atica lly regula ted centre console vehicle is driven in countries where traffic
lig ht ing 3 drives on the opp osite side of the road.
Spotlight in housing of interior mirror. Do as follows to prevent glare:
Daylight-dependent, automatically Vehicles wit h halogen hea dlight system
reg ulated centre console lighting with or Xenon headlig ht system 3
ignition switched on. Have headlights adjusted in a workshop.
Puddle light 3
After unlocking the v ehicle, the number
plate lights com e on for a few seconds.
Info tainment system 151
Infotainment system Radio reception 3

Car radio recep tion differs from dom estic
ra dio reception:
As the v ehicle antenna is relatively near the
ground, the broadcasting compa nies
cannot g uarantee the sa me quality of
reception a s obtained with a d om estic
ra dio using an ov erhead antenna.
z C hanges in distance from the
transm itter,
z multi-path rec eption due to reflection
and
z sha dowing
Picture no: 17015t.tif
may c ause hissing , noise, distortion or loss
of reception a ltogether. Remo te control o n steering
Radio reception 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 151 wheel 3
Infotainm ent system 3 . .... ..... .... .... ..... . 151 In fotain men t system 3 The functions of the infotainm ent system 3
Remote control on steering wheel 3 . . 151 The infotainment sy stem is opera ted as and the informa tion display can be
Twin Audio 3 .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 152 described in the operating instructions. operated on the steering wheel.
AUX input 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 152 Further information – see pages 125, 131
Mobile telephones a nd radio and the relevant opera ting instruc tions.
equipment 3. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 152
152 In fotain men t system
Mobile telephones and radio

equ ipment 3
The Vauxhall installation instruc tions and
the op erating guidelines prov ided by the
telephone manufacturer m ust be observed
when fitting and op erating a m obile
telephone. Fa ilure to do so could inv alidate
the vehicle’s operating permit (EU Directiv e
95/54/EG).
Recommend ed p rereq uisites for fault-free
operation:
z Professionally installed ex terior antenna
to obtain the ma ximum range possible.
Twin Audio 3 AUX inpu t 3 z Maximum tra nsmission power 10 Watt.
Twin Aud io allows rear seat occupants the The AUX input is in the centre console next z Installation of the telep hone in a suita ble
choice between the audio source played on to the hand brak e. spot (see inform ation on p age 106).
the infotainment system or a separate An externa l audio source such as a
audio source. porta ble C D player can be connected via
O nly an audio source that is not currently the AUX input.
active on the infotainment system can be Keep AUX inp ut clean and dry at all times.
controlled using Twin Audio.
Further inform ation is av ailable in the
Two headphone connections are availab le, infotainment system operating
with separate volume controls. instructions.
Further information is available in the
infotainment sy stem operating
instructions.
Info tainment system 153
O btain advice on pred eterm ined For rea sons of safety , we recomm end that
installation locations for the ex ternal you do not use the p hone while driving.
antenna and equipment holder and w ays Even use of a hands-free set can be a
of using devices with transmission power of distraction while driving. Be sure to observe
more tha n 10 Watts. We recommend that any country -specific reg ulations.
you consult y our Vauxhall Authorised
Repairer, who will ha ve brackets and 9 Warning
various installation kits available as
accessories and w ill install them in Mobile phones and radio equipment may
accordance with reg ulations. cause m alfunctions in the vehic le
electronic s if they are operated in the
A hands-free atta chm ent without an
vehicle without the external antenna
external antenna in m obile phone
unless the above-mentioned regulations
stand ards GSM 900/1800/1900 and UMTS
are complied with.
must only be operated if the maximum
transm ission power of the mobile phone Mobile phones tha t do not comply with
does not ex ceed 2 Watts with GS M 900 and the above-m entioned m ob ile phone
1 Watt in other cases. The operating standard a nd radio equipm ent m ust only
reg ulations stip ulated b y the manufacturer be operated using an antenna that is
of the telephone and the hands-free attached to the exterior of the vehicle.
attachment must b e com plied w ith.
154 Climate c ontrol
Climate control
Heating and ventila tion system, air

cond itioning system 3 ... ..... .... .... ..... . 154
Autom atic air conditioning sy stem 3 155
Electronic climate control system 3 .. . 155
Air vents .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 156
Air vents .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 156
Cooled glove compartment 3 .. .... ..... . 156
Heated rear window 3, heated Pict ure no: 17930t.tif Picture no: 17142t.tif
ex terior mirrors 3 .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 157 Heating and ventilation system, The buttons for cooling n and air
Heated front seats 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 157 air conditioning system 3 recirc ulation 4 are only found on
Heating and ventila tion system ... ..... . 158 versions with optional air conditioning
Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 a re
Air conditioning system 3 ..... .... .... ..... . 161 system 3.
combined into one unit that is d esigned to
Autom atic air conditioning sy stem 3 163 prov ide com fort regardless of the season, Air conditioning system 3 - see
Electronic climate control system 3 .. . 168 weather or outside temperature. pag es 161, 163.
Air intake . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 174 When cooling 3 is activated, the air is
Pollen filter .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 174 cooled and dried.
Note .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 174 The heating unit heats the air a s required in
Maintenance ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 175 all operating m od es depending on the
position of the tempera ture sw itc h.
The air supply ca n be adjusted to suit
requirements by means of the fan.
Climate control 155
The set values ap pear on the information

display.
Electronic climate control system – see
pag e 168.

Automatic air conditioning Electronic climate control
system 3 system 3
Provides a comfortab le interior regardless Offers the g reatest comfort in the vehicle
of the w eather, outside temperature or interior regardless of the c onditions
season. outside.
When an interior temperature is set with To ensure a uniform and comfortable
the temperature control, the temperature climate in the vehic le, the tem perature of
and am ount of inflowing air are inflowing air, air-flow rate and a ir
automatically regulated. A uniform, distribution are a utomatica lly adapted
comfortable climate in the vehic le is based on the climate cond itions outside
thereby automatically obtained b ased on the vehicle and the current tem perature of
outside climate conditions. the vehicle interior.
Autom atic air conditioning sy stem - see
page 163.
Air vents To close the vent, turn the vertical ad juster Cooled glove compartment 3
The interior v entilation can be adjusted to wheel fully up. The sym bol 0 appears. The C ooled air is fed into the glove
a com fortable lev el b y adjusting the slats of the vent rem ain open although the compa rtm ent through a nozzle.
tem perature switch. air supply is closed.
If g lov e com partment cooling is not
To increase the air supply, turn the fan all Wi nd sc reen defroster nozzles (2) required, slide the slider forward.
the w ay up a nd set the a ir distribution Air d istribution switch to l or J : Air flows
switch to M or L. onto windscreen and side wind ow s.
Centre and sid e air vents (1) Addit ional vents

Vents open: Vertical knurled wheel down. below the windsc reen a nd door windows
Adjust the flow of air by turning the and in the front footwell.
horiz ontal knurled wheel.
Climate control 157
Heating works with the engine running a nd

is switched off a utoma tica lly after around
15 minutes.
Astra TwinTop: The headed rear window
and heated exterior mirrors 3 are
deactiv ated w hen the roof is open.
The heated rear window automatically
switches on when the diesel p article filter is
being clea ned 3 depending on the engine.

Heated rear window 3, heated Heated fron t seats 3
exterior mirrors 3 O peration with ignition switched on:
With the ignition on, the rear sc reen a nd Press button ß one or more times to set the
exterior mirror heating is switched on b y desired hea t output. The control indica tor
pressing button Ü: in the button indicates which of the three
LED Ü illuminates: rea r screen and exterior hea ting levels is ac tiv e.
mirror heating. We do not recomm end prolonged use of
LED Ü does not illuminate: rear screen and the highest level for people with sensitive
exterior mirror heating is switched off. skin.
Deactivation: Press button ß repeatedly
until the control indicator goes out.
S eat heating is operationa l when the
eng ine is running.
Heatin g and ventilation system Tem per ature Air flow
Air d istributi on Ad just with centre rotary switch. Adjust with rig ht rotary sw itch.
Adjust w ith left rotary switch. red a rea = warm Four fan speeds:
L to head area via adjustable vents, blue area = cold x switched off
to footwell 4 m aximum a ir flow
M to head area via adjustable vents
The ra te of air flow is determined by the
l to w indscreen and front door fan. The fan should therefore also be
w indows switched on d uring a journey .
J to w indscreen and front door
w indows, to footwell
K to footwell
Intermediate setting s a re possible.
O pen the air vents when the switch is
set to L or M.
Climate control 159
Hea ting The c om fort and general well-being of the

The amount of heat is dependent on the vehicle occupants are to a large extent
coolant temperature and is thus not fully dependent on a suitab le v entilation a nd
attained until the engine is warm. hea ting setting.
For rapid warming of the p assenger To achieve a stra tification of tem perature
compartment: with the pleasant effec t of "cool head and
z Set air distribution switch to desired warm feet", turn the rotary switch for air
position, preferab ly position J , see distribution to K or J, set temp erature
page 158. rotary switch to any position (in the mid-
range with stratification of tem perature).
z Turn the temperature switch clockw ise as
far as it will g o.
z Set the fan to speed 3.
Pi cture no: 17153t.tif z O pen air vents.
Vent ilation
Vehicles with Quickheat 3: depending on
z For max imum ventilation in head area:
the outside tem perature and the engine
set air distribution switch to M and open
temperature the passeng er compa rtm ent
all vents.
is heated up more q uick ly using an
z Set the tem perature to the desired auxiliary electric heater.
setting.
The auxiliary electric heater switches itself
z Switch fan on, adjust as required . on a utoma tica lly .
z For ventila tion to foot well: Set air
distribution switch to K .
z For simultaneous ventilation to the hea d
area a nd the foot well: Set air
distribution switch to L .
z Set fa n to 3 or 4.
z Activate heated rear w indow Ü.
z Open sid e air vents as required and
direct them towards door windows.
z For simultaneous footwell heating, set
air distribution switch to J.

Heating the foot well Wi nd ow demi st ing and d e-i cing
z Set air distribution sw itch to K.
9 Warning
z Set the tem perature switch in the right-
hand zone. Failure to follow the instructions could
z Switch on fan. lead to misted or icy windows and
accidents stemming from impa ired
visibility.
Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp

weather, damp clothing or low outside
temperatures:
z Move air distribution switch to l.
z Turn the temperature switch clockw ise as
far as it will g o (warm).
Climate control 161
Air conditioning system 3

As a supplement to the heating and
ventilation system, the air c onditioning
system c ools and dehumidifies (dries)
inflowing air.
If cooling or dehum id ification is not
desired, switch off cooling in order to sa ve
fuel.
Cooling switches off autom atically at low
outside tem peratures.

Cooling n Air rec irculati on system 4
Operate only with the engine on and the The recirculation switch 4 is used to set
fa n running: the ventilation sy stem to recirculation
On = Press n mode (control indica tor in switch).
Off = Press n again If fumes or unpleasa nt od ours penetrate
Control indica tor in b utton. from outside: temporarily switch on air
recirc ulation system 4.
To increa se the cooling power at high
outside temperatures, temporarily switch
on the air recirculation sy stem.
The a ir recirculation sy stem minimises the

entry of outside air. The humidity
increases, and the windows can m ist up.
The quality of the passenger compa rtm ent
air deteriorates which ma y cause the
vehic le occupants to feel drowsy.
Air distrib ution to l: the air recircula tion
system is automatically switched off to
speed up window demisting and prevent
fogging.

Comfort sett ing Ma xim um cooling
z Set cooling n as desired. O pen w indows and sun roof 3 briefly so
that warm air can esca pe rap idly.
z Air rec irculation system 4 off.
z Cooling n on.
z Set air distribution switch to M or L .
z Air recirculation sy stem 4 on,
z Set temperature switch a s d esired.
z Set air distribution switch to M.
z Sw itch on fan a t desired speed .
z Turn the temp erature switch
z O pen or ad just vents as required.
antic lock wise as far as it will go (c old).
Temperature switch in centre of
z Set fa n to 4.
adjustment range: warmer air will flow into
the foot well a nd cooler air into the upp er z Open all vents.
zone, with warm er air coming from the side
air vents and cooler air from the c entre
vents.
Climate control 163
z C ooling n on, Automatic air co nditio ning

the AC compressor switches off system 3
automatically at low exterior Provides a uniformly comfortab le interior
temperatures (icing). regardless of the weather, outside
z Move air distribution switch to l. temperature or season.
z Turn the temperature sw itch c lock wise. To ensure a constant and com fortable
climate in the vehicle, the temperature of
z Set fan to 4.
the inflowing air and the air-flow rate are
z O pen side air vents as required and changed automatically based on clima te
direct them towa rd s d oor w indows. conditions outsid e the vehicle.
z Activate heated rear window Ü. Temperature changes due to ex ternal
z O pen side air vents as required and influences, such as direct sunlight, are
direct them towa rd s the sid e windows. automatically compensated .
Window dem isting a nd de-icing
9 Warning
Failure to follow the instructions could
lead to m isted or icy windows a nd
accidents stemming from impaired
visibility.
Misted or ic y windows, e. g. due to d amp

weather, da mp clothing or low outside
tem peratures:
Autom atic m ode Air distri bution Temperat ur e p reset
Basic setting for max imum comfort: Ad just with left rotary switch. Adjust with centre rotary sw itch.
z Set fan switch to A. L to head area via adjustable vents, S et the rotary sw itc h to a value between
to footw ell 17 °C and 27 ° C. Intermed iate settings are
z Set air distribution sw itch to desired
M to head area via adjustable vents possible.
position - see next colum n.
l to windscreen and front d oor The selected tem perature is m ainta ined.
z Use rotary switch to set temperature
windows
to 22 °C (a higher or lower tem perature For reasons of com fort, temperature can
J to windscreen and front d oor
can be set as desired ). only be changed in small increments.
windows, to footwell
z Air conditioning compressor activation – K to footw ell There is no temperature control for setting s
see pa ge 165. below 17 °C (all the way left) or
Intermediate settings are possible. abov e 27 °C (all the way right). The a ir
z All front air vents op en. If d esired, the
Open the air v ents when the switch is conditioning sy stem works at ma ximum
rear vents a lso 3 .
set to L or M. cooling or heating.
Dea ctivation of the air conditioning
compressor ca n reduce the level of comfort
and safety - see page 165.
Climate control 165
Air fl ow To activ ate/dea ctiv ate air c ond itioning Ma nua l air recir culation m ode
Adjust w ith right rotary switch. compressor (c ooling) n The air recirculation sy stem prevents the
Operate only with the engine on and the entry of outside air and the air in the
1-4 M anual fan speed setting. fa n running: passenger compartment is circulated.
I ntermedia te settings are possible
On = Press n Press button 4, control ind icator in
A Automatic fan speed setting
Off = Press n again button.
x Fan switched off
Control indica tor in the button. The exc hange of fresh air is reduced in air
Fan speed is regulated to provide the rate
of air flow nec essary to maintain the pre- When cooling (AC compressor) is active, air recirc ulation mode. The quality of the
selected temperature. is cooled and dehumidified. If cooling or passenger compartment air deteriora tes
dehumidification is not desired, switch off which ma y cause the vehicle occupants to
Select automatic m ode for the hig hest lev el feel drowsy. In operation without cooling
cooling in order to save fuel.
of comfort. the air hum idity increases, so the windows
Cooling switches off automatically at low
When the fan is off, the air conditioning ma y mist up. C onsequently, m anual air
outside temperatures. recirc ulation should only be run for short
compressor is also off.
period s of time.
To deactivate manual air recircula tion:
Press button 4 again. The control
indicator in the button will go out.
Hea ting Vehicles with Q uickheat 3: depending on

The amount of heat is dependent on the the outside temperature and the engine
coolant temperature and is thus not fully temperature the passenger compartment
attained until the engine is warm. is heated up m ore quickly using an
auxiliary electric heater.
For rapid warming of the p assenger
compartment: The auxiliary electric heater switches itself
z Set the air distribution sw itch to the on automatically.
desired position – see page 158. The c om fort and general well-being of the
z Set the centre rotary switch to the vehicle occupants are to a large extent
desired tem perature. We recommend a dependent on a suitab le v entilation a nd
value of about 22 ° C. hea ting setting.
z Set fan switch to A. The fan can also be To obtain a stratification of temperature in
manually set: Set the rotary sw itch to the vehicle with the pleasant effect "cool
Vent ilation position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are hea d and wa rm feet", set the air
z For max imum ventilation in head area: also possible. distribution switch to K or J , set the
set air distribution switch to M and open temperature sw itch to about 22 °C and
all vents. open the centre air v ents.
z For ventila tion to foot well: Set air

distribution switch to K .
z For simultaneous ventilation to the hea d
area and the foot well: set air distribution
switch to L .
z Set desired temperature.
z Set fan switch to A. The fan can a lso be
manua lly set: S et the rotary switch to
position 1 - 4. Interm ediate settings a re
also possib le.
Climate control 167
z Set temperature to m aximum heating ,

i.e. turn the centre rota ry switch all the
way to the right (28 °C ).
z Switch on heated rear window Ü.
O peration with cooling (air conditioning
compressor) is not possible w hen outside
temperatures a re low.
To switch off, press button V again; the
automatic a ir cond itioning system w ill
operate at the settings selected previously .

Maximum cooling for very hot i nter ior Wi nd ow demi st ing and d e-i cing
O pen windows and sun roof 3 briefly so
that warm air can escap e rapidly .
9 Warning
z Cooling n on. Failure to follow the instructions could
z Set air distribution sw itch to M. lead to misted or icy windows and
accidents stemming from impa ired
z Set the temperature switch to the d esired visibility.
temperature.
z Set fan switch to A. Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp
weather, damp clothing or low outside
z Open all vents. temperatures:
The a utomatic climate control system z C ooling n on.
provides max imum cooling down to the set
value. z Press button V: In switch position A, the
fan automatically switches to the highest
At settings below 17 °C (rota ry switch all speed and air is directed to the
the wa y to the left), the sy stem continually windscreen.
runs with m aximum c ooling. When the air
conditioning c om pressor is running, air
recirculation is sw itched on automatically.
Electronic climate control

system 3
Provides a the greatest amount of comfort
in the interior regardless of the weather, FM AS [TP] REG C Din MP3
outside tem perature or season.
To ensure a constant and com fortable
climate in the v ehicle, the tempera ture of 1 90.6 MHz
the inflowing air, the air-flow rate a nd the
air distrib ution are cha nged automatically
according to clim atic conditions outside
the v ehicle.
Tem perature cha ng es due to externa l
influences, such as direct sunlig ht, are Pict ure no: 17143t.tif Picture no: 18483s.tif
automatically compensated. Different settings are stored for each The autom atic air rec irculation system 3
Data is show n on the informa tion display . remote control. Use of a remote c ontrol will has an air quality sensor to detect harmful
Setting modifications are briefly shown in activate the settings associated with it. am bient gases, in w hich c ase it will switch
the information display, superim posing automatically to recirculation.
Manua l settings e.g. operating without
over the currently display ed menu. cooling and a ir distrib ution c an be selected When set to automa tic mode, the c lim ate
The display can vary ac cord ing to the type using the menu, see pag e 170. control sy stem provides the optimal
of presentation – see p age 122. settings for almost all conditions. If
When cooling (air conditioning
nec essary , climate control sy stem settings
The settings in the c lim ate c ontrol system compressor) is active, a ir is cooled and
can b e m od ified manually.
are stored in the v ehicle key when the dehumidified.
vehic le is locked, see "S tore personal The climate control system is only
The pollen filter removes d ust, soot, pollen
settings in vehicle key", see p age 30. operational w hen the engine is running.
and spores from the inflowing outside air.
C ooling (air conditioning compressor)
switches off autom atically at low outside
temperatures.
Climate control 169
Switching off the AC compressor (Eco Autom atic air recircul ation mod e 3
appea rs in display) can reduce comfort The ventilation system is set to recirculation
and affect safety – see pa ge 171. mode and interior a ir is recirculated.
All air vents are actuated autom atically in The automatic air recircula tion system has
autom atic mode. The a ir vents should an air qua lity sensor to d etect harmful
therefore always be open – see page 156. gases in the outside air, in whic h case it will
switch automatically to recirculation.
If outside temperatures are low and
cooling (air conditioning c om pressor) is
switched off, automa tic air recirculation is
only available in a limited cap acity so as to
prevent the windows from misting. Activate
recirc ulation ma nually if so d esired.
Autom atic m ode S witc hing a utomatic recirculation on or
Basic setting for max imum comfort: off – see pa ge 173.
z Press AUTO button. Manual recirculation mode – see page 173.
z Open all air vents.

z Air conditioning compressor activation –
see pa ge 171.
z Set pre-selected temperature to 22 °C
using left rotary knob.
The temp erature can be set higher or low er
as desired.
Temperature pr eset Climate Air distribut.

The left rotary knob ca n be used to set
Air distribut.
tem peratures between 16 °C and 28 °C .
AC
For reasons of comfort, tempera ture can Autom. blower
only be changed in sm all increments. Auto. recirc
Vehicles with Q uic kheat 3 : depending on
the outside temperature and the engine
tem perature the passenger compartment
is heated up more quickly using an
auxiliary electric heater.
The a ux ilia ry electric hea ter switches itself
on automatically.
If a temperature below 16 °C is set, Pict ure no: 17161t.tif Picture no: 17162t.tif
Lo appears in the display: the climate Manual settings Individ ual menu item s are m arked by
control sy stem runs constantly at Und er certain circumstances (e.g. iced or turning the centre knob and selected by
max imum cooling power. The temperature misted windows), the functions of the pressing it. S electing certain menus by
is not regulated . climate control system can be modified pressing the knob will open a sub-menu 3 .
manually.
If a temperature ab ov e 28 °C is set, To ex it a menu, turn the c entre knob left or
Hi appea rs in the displa y: the climate Climate control system settings can be right to Return or Ma in and select.
control sy stem runs constantly at cha ng ed v ia the centre k nob, the buttons
max imum hea ting power. The and the m enus depicted on the d isplay .
tem perature is not regula ted. Press the centre knob to call up the menu.
The menu for m anual climate control
sy stem settings appears in the disp lay.
Climate control 171
The air flow can be increased or decreased

FM AS [TP] REG C Din MP3 Climate
by turning the right knob.
Air distribut.
To return to autom atic mode: press AC Air conditioning
1 90.6 MHz button V or AUTO. Autom. blower on / off
Heated rear window – see p age 157. Auto. recirc

Window dem isting a nd de-icing Act ivat ing and d ea ctiv ating a ir
condi tioning com pressor
9 Warning If no cooling or dehum idifica tion is
required, switch the air conditioning
Failure to follow the instructions could compressor off (max imum energy sa vings):
lead to m isted or icy windows a nd Mark menu item AC from the m anual
accidents stemming from impaired settings menu and select b y pressing.
visibility. Eco appears on the display.
Inflowing air is neither c ooled nor
Misted or ic y windows, e. g. due to d amp
dehum idified. This restricts the lev el of
weather, da mp clothing or low outside
comfort provided by the electronic climate
tem peratures:
control sy stem. This may cause the
Press V button. V app ears in display: windows to mist up, for example.
control indica tor in button illuminates.
To activa te cooling: S elect menu item AC
The temperature and the air distrib ution from the manual settings menu and p ress
are ad justed automatically, the fan runs at to activ ate cooling.
a faster speed and the windows a re ra pidly
cleared of ice and m oisture.
Air distribut. FM AS [TP] REG C Din MP3 Automatic blower
Strong
1 90.6 MHz Normal
Weak
Air d istributi on Air flow Fan control in automa tic m ode 3
Press the centre knob. The possible air Turn right knob right or left. The selected Fan regulation in automatic mode can b e
distrib ution settings appear one after fa n speed in ind ic ated w ith x and the modified.
another in the display . numb er in the display . S elec t menu item Autom atic b lower from
Air distrib ution can also be set in the Air At speed 0 both the fan and cooling (air the manual settings m enu and select the
distri but. m enu: conditioning compressor) are switched off. desired fan control.
Up Air distribution to wind screen and To return to a utoma tic mode: Press A UTO Depending on the setting, the m aximum
front door wind ow s. button. air flow, and thereb y the noise level, will
Centre Air distrib ution to vehicle increa se.
occupants via front adjustable
vents.
Down Air distrib ution to footwell.
Return to automatic a ir distribution:
Dea ctivate corresp onding setting or p ress
button AUTO.
Climate control 173
Climate
Air distribut.
AC Automatic
Autom. blower recirculation
Residual air conditioning on
Auto. recirc air control at
bad outside air
Sw itching a utomat ic recircula tion 3 on Manual ai r recirculat ion mode Air conditioning with t he engine not
or off The air recirculation system prevents the running
The automatic air recirc ulation sy stem has entry of outside air and the air in the When the vehicle is stopped and the
an air q uality sensor to detect ha rm ful passenger compa rtm ent is circulated. ignition off, the hea t or cooling power still
gases in the outsid e air, in w hich case it will in the system can be used to condition the
Press button 4, the control indic ator in
switch autom atically to recircula tion. passenger compartment, for exa mple
the button will illum ina te.
when stopped at a level crossing.
Select menu item Auto. recir c from the The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air
manual settings menu a nd switch it on or Press button AUTO with the ignition off.
recirculation mode. The quality of the
off by p ressing. Residual air condi tioning on will ap pear
passenger compa rtm ent air deteriorates
briefly in the d isplay .
Switch to m anua l air recirculation as whic h may c ause the v ehicle occ upa nts to
necessary. feel drow sy . In operation w ithout cooling The air conditioning will operate for a
the air humidity increases, so the windows limited period of tim e.
may mist up. Consequently, manual air To cancel air conditioning, press the A UTO
recirculation should only be run for short button.
periods of time.
To deactiv ate m anual air recirculation:
Press button 4 ag ain. The control
indica tor in the button will go out.
Pollen filter Note

The pollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen If the windsc reen m ists up during dam p
and spores from the air entering from weather, temporarily set the system as
outside. The activ e ca rb on lay er 3 desc ribed under " Demisting and defrosting
eliminates m ost odours and harmful the wind ow s", see pages 160, 163 or 171.
ambient g ases from the air. C ooling 3 is most efficient when the
Replace the pollen filter at the intervals windows are closed. I f the interior is
given in the Service Book let. extrem ely hot due to a long period in
strong sunlight, briefly open the windows
and sun roof 3 to allow the hot air to
esca pe q uick ly .
When cooling 3 (a ir conditioning
compressor) is switched on condensation
forms, w hich is ex pelled from the und ersid e
Air intake of the vehicle.
The air inta kes in front of the windsc reen in
the engine com partment must be kept
clear to allow air intake. Remove any
lea ves, d irt or snow.
Climate control 175
At lea st one air vent must b e open while Maintenance

cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is In order to ensure continuously efficient
on in order to prevent the evaporator from performance, the air conditioning
icing up due to lack of air movement. compressor 3 must be operated for a few
Cooling switches off autom atically at low minutes once a m onth, irrespective of the
outside tem peratures. weather and time of year. The c lim ate
control system, if present, ha ndles this
Do not cover the sensor on the instrument
autom atic ally while driving. Air
panel as this could cause the climate conditioning compressor operation is not
control 3 system to malfunction.
possible when outside tem peratures are
low .
In the ev ent of a fault, contac t a workshop
for a ssistance.
176 Drivin g and operatio n
Driving and operation Easytronic 3

The semi-automatic Easytronic
tra nsmission permits manua l (manual
mode) or a utomatic gear shifting
(a utomatic mode), both with autom atic
clutch c ontrol.
9 Warning
Disregard of these instructions m ay lead
to injuries or endanger life.

Transmi ssion di sp lay
Ea sy tronic 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 176 S hows the mode and current gear.
Autom atic transm ission 3 .... .... .... ..... . 184 The display flashes for a few second s
Autom atic transm ission with when A, M or R is selected with the engine
ActiveS elec t 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 190 running and the foot brake not activated.
Driving hints .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 198
Sav ing fuel, Protecting the
environment . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 200
Fuels, refuelling .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 202
Ca ta lytic converter, exhaust g ases... . 204
Drive Control System s .. .... ..... .... .... ..... . 208
Brake system ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 221
Anti-lock Brake Sy stem (ABS u ).. ..... . 223
Wheels, ty res ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 224
Roof racks 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 231
Towing eq uipm ent 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 232
Towing ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 235
Driving and o peration 177
There is no need to select neutral before

starting the engine. If a gear is engag ed,
the transmission automatically switches to
neutra l (N) before the engine starts when
the foot brake is op erated . This can lead to
a slig ht delay in the starting process.

Sta rting t he engine Easytronic op era tion v ia the selector lever
O perate foot brake when starting the
Alway s m ove the selec tor lever in the
engine. The engine ca n only be started app ropriate direc tion as far a s it w ill go.
with the foot brake operated. "N " appears
Upon release, it automatically returns to
in the transmission display. If the foot the centre position. Pay heed to the gear/
brake is not operated the c ontrol
mode ind ic ator in the transmission display .
indicator j 3 illuminates on the
instrument panel, and "N" flashes in the Mov e selector lev er t oward N
transm ission disp la y - the engine c annot be N eutral.
started.
Also the vehic le cannot be sta rted if all
brake lights ha ve fa iled.
It is also p ossible to start off without

depressing the foot brak e if the accelerator
pedal is operated d irectly after movement
of the selector lever. If there is no
immed iate acceleration or the foot b rake is
not dep ressed, no gear is engaged a nd "A"
flashes. After a few seconds, the display
resum es showing " N". Start off by
repeating the previously described
proc edure.
In Automa tic mode, selection of other
gears is automatic irrespectiv e of d riv ing
conditions.
Pi cture no: 17174t.tif Move sel ect or lever towa rd A Picture no: 17002t.tif
Sta rting off Switch between Automa tic and Manual Mov e selector lev er t oward + or -
Dep ress the foot brake, release the ha nd mode. + Shift to a higher gear.
brake and m ove the selec tor lever to A,
Manua l gear shifting is possib le in manual - Shift to a lower gea r.
+ or - . Easytronic is in automatic mode and
first g ear is eng aged (second gear if the mode. "M " and the currently engag ed gea r If a hig her gear is selected when the
Winter p rogram me is activ e). "A1" a ppears appea r in the transm ission displa y. running speed is too low, or a lower gear
in the transmission display ("A2" if the If the engine speed is too low the Easytronic when the speed is too high, no shift is
Winter programme is active). will automatically shift to a lower g ear even effected. This p revents the engine from
in Manua l mode. This prevents the engine running at too low or too hig h revs.
The vehicle b egins to "creep" when the foot
brake is released. from stalling. Gears can be sk ip ped by m ov ing the
selector lever repeatedly a t short intervals.
If the vehicle is in autom atic mode, on Electronic ally controlled d riving

movement of the selec tor lever to + or - program mes
Ea sy tronic shifts to ma nual m ode a nd z By mea ns of delayed gear changing
changes up or down. "M " and the currently (higher eng ine speeds) following a cold
enga ged gear a ppear in the transm ission start, the operating tem perature
display. programm e in automatic mode quick ly
and a utomatica lly brings the cataly tic
Mov e selector lever tow ard R
converter to the temperature required
Reverse gear. Engage only when vehicle is
for optimum pollutant reduction.
stationary.
z Adaptive programm es automatically
Dep ress the foot brake, release the ha nd
adap t gea r shifting in autom atic mode
brake and m ove the selec tor lever to R.
to suit the driving conditions, such as if
Reverse gear is engaged . "R" appears in
the vehicle is towing a carava n/trailer,
the transmission display.
has a high payload, or is being d riv en on Picture no: 17961t.tif
The vehicle b egins to "creep" when the foot inclines. z When SPORT mode is engaged, shift
brake is released. times are reduced and the transmission
It is also possible to sta rt off in reverse shifts at higher eng ine speeds (unless
without depressing the foot brak e if the cruise control is on). SPO RT mode – see
accelerator peda l is operated directly after page 210.
movement of the selec tor lever. If there is z Winter programme: Press button T – see
no immediate acceleration or the foot next p age.
brake is not depressed, no gear is engaged
and " R" flashes. After a few sec onds, the
display resumes showing " N". Start off by
rep eating the previously described
proced ure.
If the Winter program me is activ ated,

SPORT mode is deactivated.
If the v ehicle is switched to manual mode
while the winter programme is active, the
winter programme is interrupted. The
winter programme resumes upon return to
autom atic mode.
Pi cture no: 17175t.tif Picture no: 18451s.tif

Winter progr amme T Kick down
In the event of diffic ulties starting off on Accelerator pedal pressed past the
slip pery roa ds, press button T ("A", pressure point: b elow certain speed s, the
currently engaged gear and T appea r in transmission shifts down into a low er gear.
the transmission display). Easytronic Full engine power is ava ila ble for
switches to automatic mode and the acc eleration.
vehic le sets off in second gear. During kick down no m anual gear shifting is
The w inter program is switched off by : possible.
z pressing button T a gain,
z turning off the ignition.
In order to protect the Easytronic the winter
programme automatically sw itches itself
off at extremely high clutch temperatures.
When the engine speed a pproaches its "Rock ing the car"
upper limit, the transmission shifts to a If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle
higher gear during kick down even in to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole,
Manual mode. move the selector lever between R and A
(or + or -) in a repeat pattern while app ly ing
Without kick down this automatic shift is
lig ht p ressure to the accelerator pedal. Do
not effec ted in Ma nual m ode.
not rac e the engine and avoid sudden
If S PO RT mode is engag ed, the drive acceleration.
wheels may spin slightly when starting off
This applies only to the exceptional
with kickd ow n. This allows for max imum
circum stances mentioned a bove.
acceleration of the v ehicle.
Eng ine braki ng
Autom atic mode:
When driv ing downhill, Easytronic d oes not Picture no: 18230s.tif
shift into higher gears until a fairly high Ma noeuvr ing the vehicle
engine sp eed has been reac hed. When To ma noeuv re the vehicle back and forth
braking, Easytronic shifts down in good during attempts to park or in ga ra ge
time. entrances the creeping m ov ement can be
Manual mode: utilised by releasing the foot brake.
To utilise the engine braking effect, select a N ever actuate accelerator and brake
lower gear in g ood time w hen driving pedals sim ultaneously.
downhill.
To prevent d amage, Easy tronic
disengag es the " creep function" w hen the
temperature of the automatic c lutch is
high.
Stop ping t he v ehic le Vehicle storag e

In Automatic or Manual m od e, when the Before leaving the vehicle:
vehic le has stopp ed first gear (with Winter z eng age hand brake,
mode enga ged, second gear) is engaged z rem ove the ignition key or, with the
automatically and the clutch released. In R O pen&Start system 3, remove the
rev erse remains engaged. electronic key from the vehicle.
A warning buzz er sounds when the d riv er’s The most recently engaged gear (ind icator
door is opened if the engine is running, a in transmission display) remains engaged.
gear is engaged and the foot brake is not With N , no gea r is engaged.
depressed. The vehicle creeps if the hand When the ignition is switched off the
brake is not engaged. Mov e the selec tor Easytronic no longer responds to
lev er to N and app ly the hand brake. movem ent of the selector lev er.
When stop ping on gradients, eng age the Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the battery
hand brake or depress the bra ke pedal. To Picture no: 17028t.tif
may become discharged if the vehicle is Fault
prevent overheating of the clutch, do not parked for long periods. C ontrol indicator A illuminates in the
increase engine speed to ensure smooth
idling when in gear. If the hand b ra ke has not been applied , the event of a fa ult in the Easytronic sy stem. In
control indicator R flashes for a few the event of serious faults, "F" a lso appears
To prevent dam age to the Easy tronic, the in the tra nsmission display.
second s a fter the ignition is switched off.
clutch is closed automatically at high
clutch tem peratures. With the engine off and the hand brake not It is possib le to continue driving if only
applied, when the driver’s door is opened a control ind icator A illuminates. M anual
Switch off eng ine if stop ping for a lengthy mode can then no longer be selected.
warning buzzer sounds and the control
period, e. g. in traffic jams or at level indica tor R flashes; switch on ignition, If " F" appears in the transmission d isplay ,
crossings. engage gear, switch off ignition and apply continued driving is not possible.
ha nd brake.
Hav e the cause of the fault elim ina ted by a
workshop. The self-d ia gnosis integrated
into the system facilitates rapid fault
identification.
If the cause of the power failure is not a 3. Clean Easytronic around the cap (see
discharged battery, c ontact a workshop. fig ure) so that no d irt can get into the
If the v ehicle m ust be removed from opening when the cap is removed.
flowing traffic, release the clutch on 4. Rotate ca p to sla cken a nd remove by
vehicles w ith 5-speed Easy tronic. On lifting upwa rd s – see figure.
vehicles with 6-sp eed Easy tronic, the clutch
cannot b e released 3 ; if the vehic le must 5. Turn the adjusting screw clock wise using
be moved, raise vehicle at the front to tow. a flat-head screwdriver (vehicle tools 3 ,
see page 251) until clear resistanc e can
To disengage the clutch (only on vehicles be felt. The clutch has now been
with 5-speed Easytronic): disengaged.
1. Apply hand brake and switch off
ignition. Do not turn bey ond the resistance, since
this can d amage the Easytronic.
2. O pen bonnet and engag e support.
Pi cture no: 17178t.tif 6. Fit cleaned cap ag ain. The cap must be
Interrup tion of power suppl y in full contact w ith the housing.
The c lutch is not disengaged if the vehicle
Towing the vehic le and starting the eng ine
battery is discharged and a gear has been
is not perm itted when the clutch has been
selected. The vehicle ca nnot move.
released in this way , although the vehicle
If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using can b e m ov ed a short distance.
jump leads – see pag e 243.
C ontact a workshop immediately for
assistance.
Automatic transmission 3
The a utomatic tra nsmission 3 allows
automatic selection.
The engine ca n only be started when the
gear selec tor is in position P or N. When
starting in position N, depress the foot
brake or app ly the hand brake. After
starting the engine, depress the brak e
before selec ting a gea r. Do not accelerate
whilst selecting a gear. If a gear has been
selected a nd the brak e is released, the
vehic le will " creep". N ev er operate the
accelerator and the brake pedal
simulta neously. The selected gear is Pict ure no: 17022t.tif Picture no: 17189t.tif
displayed in the transmission display. Tr ansm issi on display Selector lev er positions P, R, N and D
Display of mode or selected gear in left P Park p osition. Front wheels locked.
9 Warning position of transmission display. The g ear O nly enga ge w hen the v ehicle is
that has been selected by the transm ission stationary and the ha nd brake is
Disreg ard of these instructions may lead appea rs in the right position of the app lied. "P" appears on the
to injuries or end ang er life. tra nsmission display. transmission disp la y.
P Park position. R Reverse gear. Only engage when the
O nly select 3, 2 or 1 to prevent autom atic vehicle is stationary . "R" appears on
R Reverse gear.
upshifting or as an aid in engine braking. the tra nsmission display.
N Neutra l.
N N eutral or idle. "N" appears on the
D Drive position. transmission disp la y.
3, 2, 1 Selected gear 3. D Drive position for norm al driving in 1st
gear to highest gear. "D" and the
current gear app ear in the
transmission disp la y.
The selector lev er ca n only be moved Gea rs 3, 2, 1

from P when the ignition is switched on 3, 2, 1 Transmission does not shift above
and the foot b rake depressed (selector the selected gea r.
lev er lock).
Press button on selector lever to engage 3
To enga ge P or R, push button on selector
or 1.
lev er.
The current gear is disp layed in the
The engine can only be started with lever in
tra nsmission display.
position P or N. When position N is selected,
press foot brake or engage hand brak e
before sta rting.
Do not accelerate during the selection
proced ure.
Electronical ly cont rolled driv ing
pr og ramm es
z When SPORT mode is engaged, the
tra nsmission shifts at higher engine
speed s (unless cruise control is on).
Control indica tor 1 illum ina tes in the
tra nsmission display. SPO RT mode, see
page 210.
z Winter programme: Press button T – see
next p age.
z Automatic neutra l shift function z By mea ns of delayed gear changing

automa tic ally sets the transmission to N (higher eng ine speeds) following a cold
to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at start, the operating tem perature
traffic lights. programm e quickly and automatically
brings the ca ta ly tic converter to the
The automatic neutral is activa ted when:
temperature required for op tim um
– the selector lev er is in automatic pollutant reduction.
mode 3,
z The ada ptive programm e automatically
– the selector lev er is in position 3, 2 tailors gear shifting to the driving
or 1, conditions, e.g. greater load or
– the foot brake is depressed, gradients.
– the v ehicle is stationa ry ,

– the ac celera tor p edal is not Picture no: 17190t.tif
actuated, Winter prog ramm e T
Press button T if you are hav ing p rob lems
– the tra nsmission fluid temp erature is
grea ter than 0 °C. starting off on a slippery road surface.
To activa te
As soon as the brake is released a nd the The winter programme can b e a ctiv ated
accelerator peda l is depressed , the in P, R, N, D and 3 (T illuminates in the
vehicle starts off in the usua l manner. transmission display). The vehic le starts off
in 2nd gear.
To deactivate
The winter program is switched off b y:
z pressing b utton T again,
z shifting to 2 or 1 m anua lly ,
z turning off the ignition.
In order to prev ent dam age, the winter
program switches off automatically at high
transmission oil temperatures.
Engine bra king " Rocking the c ar"

In order to utilise the engine brak ing effect If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle
when driv ing downhill, select drive range 3, to free it from sand, m ud , snow or a hole,
2 or, if necessary, 1 in g ood time. mov e the selector lever from D to R in a
repeat p attern while simultaneously
The bra king action is most effectiv e in drive
app ly ing light pressure to the a ccelerator
ra ng e 1. I f drive ra ng e 1 is selec ted at too
pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid
high a sp eed, the tra nsmission remains in
sudden a cceleration.
second gea r until the shift point for first
gear is reached, e. g. as a result of This applies only to the ex ceptional
deceleration. circumstances mentioned above.
Pict ure no: 18451s.t if

Kickd own
Dep ressing the accelerator pedal past the
pressure point: depending on the engine
speed the tra nsmission shifts to a lower
gear. Full engine p ow er is ava ilab le for
accelerating.
Stopp ing the vehicle

The selector lever ca n b e left in the c hosen
gear w ith the engine running.
When stopping on grad ients engage hand
brake or depress brak e p edal. To prevent
ov erheating of the transmission, do not
increase engine revolutions to ensure
smooth idling while standing if a gea r ha s
been selected.
Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy
period, e.g. in traffic jams or at lev el
crossings.
Before leaving the vehicle, first apply the
Pict ure no: 18230s.t if Picture no: 17028t.tif
Manoeuvri ng the vehicle ha nd brake. Then select P. Remove the Fault
To manoeuv re the vehicle back and forth ignition key or, with Open&S tart sy stem, If there is a p roblem with the autom atic
during attem pts to park or in garage remove the elec tronic key 3 from the transmission, control indica tor A
entrances, the vehicle’s creeping vehicle. Lock the vehicle. O therwise the illuminates. The transmission no longer
movement c an be utilised by releasing the battery may become discharged if the shifts automatically. The v ehicle can
brake pedal. vehicle is parked up for long periods. continue to be driven.
Never actuate a ccelerator and brake The ignition key can only be removed when Illumination of control indicator A may
pedals simultaneously. the selector lever is in position P. also indicate a problem with the engine
With the Open&S tart sy stem 3 , "P" flashes electronics – see page 206.
in the transm ission display for 10 sec onds For diesel engines1 ) Z 19 DT and Z 19 DTH,
when the ignition is switched off if P has not illumination of control indicator A c ould
been engaged or the hand brake has not also ind icate that the diesel fuel filter must
been applied. be drained of water - see page 300.
Hav e the cause of the fault elim ina ted by a
workshop.
1)
Sales des ig nation – see p ag e 311.
The transmission no long er shifts

automatically. Vehicle ca n continue to be
driven. Second gear is not a vailable.
Forwa rd gears 1, 3 a nd 4 must b e shifted
manually using selector lever:
1 = 1st gea r
2 = 3rd gear
3, D = 4th gear

Interruption of p ower supply 3. Push the y ellow ca tc h forward with a
If the v ehicle b attery is flat, the selector screwdriver and move the selector lever
lever cannot be moved out of position P. out of P.
If the ba ttery is flat, start the v ehicle using 4. Mount selector lev er trim on centre
jump lead s – see page 243. console and refit.
If the ba ttery is not the ca use of the fault, Re-selecting P ca uses locking again. Hav e
relea se selec tor lever: a work shop eliminate the cause of the
power loss.
1. Apply hand brake.
2. Disengage selector lever trim rea rw ard
from centre console and fold upwards.
Automatic transmission with

ActiveSelect 3 9 Warning
This automatic transmission 3 allows both Disregard of these instructions m ay lead
automatic gear changes (aut omati c to injuries or endanger life.
mod e) and m anual gear changes (m anual
mod e) 3 .
Selecting D puts the transmission in
The engine ca n only be started when the autom atic mode.
selector lever is in position P or N. When
If the selec tor lever is m oved to the left from
starting in position N, depress the foot
the D position, manual mode is activated.
brake or app ly the hand brake. After the
Gear changes can then be ma de manually
engine has started, depress the brak e
by tipping the selec tor lever toward + or -.
before selec ting a gea r. Do not accelerate
whilst selecting a gear. If a gear has been
selected a nd the brak e is released, the Picture no: 17022t.tif
vehic le will " creep". N ev er operate the Transmi ssion di sp lay
accelerator and the brake pedal Display of m od e or selected gea r in left
simulta neously. The selected gear is position of transmission display. The gear
displayed in the transmission display, see that has been selected by the tra nsmission
page 184. app ears in the right position of the
transmission displa y.
P Pa rk position.
R Reverse gear.
N Neutral.
D Automatic mode.
M Manua l mode with disp la y of
selected gear.
The selector lever can only be mov ed out of

position P or N with the ignition switched on
and the foot brake app lied (selector lever
lock ). In selector lever position N the
selector lever lock is activa ted after a delay
and only if the vehicle is stationary.

Selector l ev er setti ng s P, R, N In position P or N, c ontrol indicator j
and D (autom atic mode) illuminates red in the selector lever
P Park position. Front wheels locked . indicator strip if the selector lever is
O nly engag e when the vehicle is blocked.
stationary and the hand brake is To eng age P or R, push button on selector
applied. " P" appears on the lever.
transm ission display .
The engine can only b e started with lever in
R Reverse gear. Only engage when the position P or N . When position N is selected,
vehic le is stationary . "R" appears on press foot brake or enga ge hand b rake
the transmission display. before starting.
N Neutra l or idle. "N" appears on the Do not accelerate during the selection
transm ission display . procedure.
D Drive position for norma l driving in 1st
gear to highest gea r. "D" and the
current gear appear in the
transm ission display .
If the engine revs are too low the

tra nsmission a utomatica lly shifts to a lower
gear, but not unless a c ertain speed has
been reached.
No automatic shifting to a higher gear
takes place at high engine revs.
For safety reasons, kickdown is also
available in m anual m od e – see page 194.
The selected g ear is displayed in the
tra nsmission display – see page 184.

Acti veSelect (manual mode) Electronical ly cont rolled driv ing
Move selector lever out of position D and pr og ramm es
then forwards or back wards. z When SPORT mode is engaged, the
tra nsmission shifts at higher engine
+ Shift to a higher g ear
speed s (unless cruise control is on).
- Shift to a lower gear Control indica tor 1 illum ina tes in the
If a higher gear is selec ted at a speed tha t tra nsmission display. SPO RT mode, see
is too slow or a lower g ear is selected at a page 210.
speed that is too high, the gear will not be z Winter programme: Press button T – see
changed . This prevents the revs from b eing next p age.
too low or too high.
z Automatic neutra l shift function z The op erating tem perature programme

automa tic ally sets the transmission to N automatically bring s the catalytic
to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at converter to the temperature that is
traffic lights. req uired for optimum emission reduction
after a cold start by selecting an
The automatic neutral is activa ted when:
appropriate gear (increased engine
– the selector lev er is in automatic or rev s).
manual mode,
z The ada ptive programm e automatically
– the foot brake is depressed, tailors gear shifting to the driving
– the v ehicle is stationa ry , conditions, e.g. greater load or
gradients.
– the ac celera tor p edal is not
actuated,
– the tra nsmission fluid temp erature is Picture no: 17196t.tif
grea ter than 0 °C. Winter prog ramm e T
Press button T if you are hav ing p rob lems
As soon as the brake is released a nd the starting off on a slippery road surface.
accelerator peda l is depressed , the
To activa te
vehicle starts off in the usua l manner.
Winter programm e ca n be engaged in
automatic m ode (T appears in the
transmission displa y). Depending on road
surfac e, the vehicle starts off in 2nd or 3rd
gear.
To deactivate Engine brak ing

The w inter program is switched off by : The automa tic transmission automatically
selects the driving program s w ith the best
z pressing button T a gain,
possible braking effect.
z cha nging to manua l mode,
z turning off the ignition. If necessa ry, lower gea rs ca n also b e
selected in manual mode to increase the
In order to prev ent dama ge, the winter
brak ing effect. 1st gear has the greatest
program sw itches off automatically at high
brak ing effect.
transm ission oil temperatures.
Picture no: 18451s.tif

Kick down
Depressing the ac celera tor p edal past the
pressure point: dep ending on the engine
speed the transm ission shifts to a lower
gear. Full eng ine power is available for
accelerating .
For safety reasons kickdown is a vailable in
both automa tic and manual m od e.
"Roc king t he ca r" St opping t he v ehi cle

If it becomes necessary to rock the vehic le The selector lever can be left in the chosen
to free it from sand, m ud, snow or a hole, gear with the engine running.
move the selector lever from D to R in a When stopp ing on gradients engag e hand
rep eat pa ttern while simultaneously brak e or depress brake pedal. To prevent
apply ing light pressure to the ac celera tor overheating of the transmission, do not
pedal. Do not race the engine a nd avoid increa se engine revolutions to ensure
sud den acc eleration. smooth idling while standing if a gear has
This a pplies only to the exc eptional been selected .
circumstanc es mentioned above. S witc h off engine if stopping for a leng thy
period , e.g. in traffic jams or at level
crossings.
Before lea ving the v ehicle, first app ly the
Picture no: 18230s.tif
Manoeuv ring t he v ehic le hand brak e. Then select P. Rem ove the
To manoeuvre the vehicle b ack and forth ignition key or, with O pen&Start system ,
during attempts to park or in garage remove the electronic key 3 from the
entrances, the vehicle’s creeping vehicle. Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the
movem ent can b e utilised by releasing battery ma y become disc harged if the
the brake pedal. vehicle is park ed up for long periods.
Nev er ac tuate accelerator and b rake

pedals simultaneously .
The ignition key ca n only be remov ed when 2nd gear and the highest gear c an be
the selector lev er is in position P. selected in manual mode. Dep ending on
the nature of the problem, only the highest
If the selector lever is not in p osition P when
gear may be availab le.
the ig nition is switched off, control
indicator j and P flash in the selector lev er O nly the highest gear is ava ila ble in D in
indicator strip – see page 191, Fig. 17194 T. automatic m ode.
Move the selector lev er to position P.
With the O pen&Start system 3, " P" flashes
in the transmission display for 10 seconds
when the ig nition is switched off if P has not
been eng aged or the hand brak e has not
been app lied.

Fault
If there is a problem with the automatic
tra nsmission, control indicator A
illuminates. The transm ission no longer
shifts automa tica lly . The vehicle can
continue to be d riv en.
Illum ination of control ind icator A ma y
also indicate a p roblem with the engine
electronics – see pa ge 206.
For diesel engines 1) Z 19 DT a nd Z 19 DTH ,
illumination of control indica tor A could
also indicate tha t the diesel fuel filter must
be d rained of water - see page 300.
Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a
work shop.
1)
Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ge 311.
Re-selecting P or N causes locking again.

Hav e a workshop eliminate the cause of
the power loss.

Interrup tion of power suppl y 3. To open, push the yellow catch down
If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector with a screwdriver and move the selector
lev er ca nnot be moved out of position P lever out of P or N .
or N. 4. Refit the ashtray insert 3 or rubber
If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using covering on the bottom of the stowage
jump leads – see pag e 243. compa rtm ent 3 - see page 108.
If the battery is not the cause of the fault,
release selector lev er:
1. Ap ply hand brak e.
2. Remove the ashtray insert 3 or the
rubber covering on the bottom of the
stowage compa rtm ent 3 - see page 108.
Driving hints Electro-hydrauli c power assisted st eering Sw itching off the engi ne
The first 600 mil es / 1000 km If the power-assisted steering fails when When y ou switch off, fans in the eng ine
Drive your vehicle at v arious speeds. Do being towed with the engine switched off, compa rtm ent may continue running for a
not use full throttle. Never allow the eng ine the vehicle can still be steered, but time to cool the engine.
to labour at low revs. considera bly more forc e is req uired. If the engine temperature is very high, e.g.
Make good use of all gea rs. Depress the Dr iving in mountainous terrai n or with a after driving in mountainous terrain: allow
accelerator pedal a maximum of around trailer/cara van the engine to id le for approx im ately two
three quarters of the ava ila ble ped al travel The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its minutes in order to prevent heat
in all gears. cooling p ow er is therefore independent of acc um ulation.
the engine speed.
Do not drive faster than three quarters of Vehicles with turbocharged engine 3
max imum speed. Since a considerable amount of heat is After running at high eng ine speeds or high
genera ted at high engine speeds and less eng ine loads, op erate the engine briefly at
Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the at slower speeds, do not shift d ow n when a low load or run in neutral for approx.
first 120 miles (200 km ). climbing hills whilst the v ehicle is still coping 30 seconds before switching off in ord er to
Never coa st with engine not running with the gradient in the higher g ear. protec t the turbocharger.
Many units will not function in this situation Dr iving with a roof load Sa ve energy – m ore miles
(e. g. brak e serv o unit, elec tro-hydraulic Do not exceed the permissible roof load - Plea se observe the running-in hints on the
power steering). Driving in this manner is a see p ages 231, 325. For reasons of safety, previous pa ge a nd the tips for sa ving
danger to yourself and others. distribute the load evenly and secure it energy on the following pages.
Brak e servo unit prop erly w ith retaining straps. Adjust the Good, technically correc t and ec onomical
When the engine is not running, the brake tyre pressure to the load conditions. Do not driving ensures m aximum d urab ility and
servo unit is no longer effective once the drive faster than 75 m ph (120 km /h). Check performa nc e for your vehicle.
brake pedal has been depressed once or and re-tighten the strap s frequently.
twice. Braking effect is not reduced, b ut Observ e country -specific regulations. Roof
significantly greater force is required for loa ds are not permitted on the Astra
braking. Tw inTop.
O verrun Correct g ear selection C ool ing fan

The fuel supply is autom atically shut off Engine in neutral a nd without rev ving in the The cooling fan is controlled v ia a
during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is low er gears. Stop-and-go traffic and therm oswitch and therefore only runs if
being driven down long gradients or when driving a t a speed too high for the selected nec essary .
braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to gear or transmission ratio increases wear The cooling fan a utomatica lly switches on
take effect, do not acc elerate during and fuel consum ption. when the diesel particle filter is being
overrun and, if in manual transm ission Change dow n cleaned 3 depending on the engine.
mode, do not de-clutch. To prevent When decreasing speed, shift down into
dam age to the cata ly tic converter, overrun Pedals
the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch
cut-off is temp orarily deactivated when the Do not place any ob jects in the foot well
with a high-revving engine. This is
cataly tic conv erter temperature is high. which could slip under the ped als and
especially important when hill climb ing. inhibit the pedal trav el.
Vehicles with turbocharged engine 3 Clutch op era tion
Flow -g enerated noises may be aud ible if To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited,
Alw ays dep ress the clutch ped al hard to
the a ccelerator is released quickly on there must be no mats in the area of the
the floor to prev ent shifting difficulties and
account of air flow in the turbocharger. pedals.
tra nsmission dam age.
Eng ine sp eed Bat tery ca re
When driving do not use the pedal as a
Drive in a low engine speed range for each When driving slowly or when the v ehicle is
foot rest; this will ca use substantial clutch
gear as much as possible. stationary , e.g. in slow urban traffic, stop-
wear. and-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all
Warmi ng up unnecessary electrical load s w here
Allow the engine to warm up while driving. possible (e. g. heated rear window, heated
Do not w arm it up by letting it run at idling seats).
speed. Do not app ly full throttle until the
engine has reached operating De-clutch w hen sta rting in order to relieve
tem perature. the strain on the starter and the ba ttery.
After a cold sta rt, the automatic
transm ission 3 or Ea sy tronic 3 in
automatic mode shifts into higher g ears at
higher rpm . This a llows the catalytic
converter to quickly reach the temperature
req uired for optimum pollutant reduction.
Saving fuel, protecting th e End-of-li fe v ehi cle rec overy Warm ing up
environment For detailed information on Va ux ha ll’ s on- z Full throttle and w arming up at idle
going commitment to achieving a n speed increase w ear, fuel consumption,
Trend-set ting technology
environmentally susta inab le future, ex haust em ission, the am ount of
In the dev elopment and manufacture of
including; design for recycling, take back of pollutant in the exhaust and the am ount
your vehicle, environmentally-friendly and
End-of-Life Vehicle (ELVs) a nd the of noise.
in the ma in recy clable materials were used.
recycling of ELVs, view z Driv e off as soon as possible a fter
The p roduction method s used to make
www.Vauxhall.co.uk/recy cling for d etails
your vehicle are likewise env ironmentally - starting.
friendly. Energy and environm ent-c onsci ous Uniform speed
drivi ng z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel
Recycling of production wastes keeps the
z High noise levels and exhaust em issions
circulation of material closed. Reduction of consumption, the ex haust emissions, the
are often a result of driving w ithout due
energy a nd water requirements a lso help s proportion of pollutant in the exhaust
attention to saving energy and
to conserve natural resources. gas and the noise level.
protecting the environment.
A highly adv anced design mea ns that your z Do not accelerate a nd brake
z Y ou should therefore drive with energy in
vehic le can be easily disassembled at the unnecessarily . Drive at uniform speed,
mind – "more miles with less fuel" .
end of its working life, and the individual watching the road.
materials separated for subsequent re-use. Reduce the noise level and exhaust Avoid frequent starting off and stopping
emissions b y adopting an environment-
Materia ls such as asbestos and cadmium e.g . at traffic lights, in short distance
consc ious driving style. This is ex tremely
are not used . The refrigerant in the air tra ffic and in queues of traffic by m eans
worthwhile and im proves the quality of
conditioning system 3 is C FC -free. of clever planning . Select road s w ith
life. good traffic flow .
New painting techniques employ water as
Fuel consum ption d epend s to a great
a solvent. I dling
extent on your own personal d riv ing z The eng ine also consumes fuel when
style. The following hints are intended to idling .
help you consume fuel at a rate that is as
close as possible to the specified levels – z If you have to wait for more than one
see page 316. minute, it is worthwhile switching off
the eng ine. Five minutes of idling
C heck y our v ehicle’ s fuel consumption corresponds to ap prox imately 0.6 miles
every time you refuel. This facilitates (1 k m) of driving.
early detection of any irregula rities
causing increased fuel consumption.
O verrun z Slightly relea sing the accelerator ped al Repai r and m aintenance
z The fuel supply is automatically shut off results in distinct fuel savings with no z Improper repairs or adjustm ent and
during ov errun, e. g. when the vehicle is major loss of speed. maintenance work can increase fuel
being driven down long gradients or consumption. Do not carry out w ork on
Drive at no more tha n around three
when braking – see page 199. the eng ine yourself.
quarters of max imum speed and you will
z To enable the overrun cut-off to come use up to 50% less fuel, without losing a You may out of ignorance infringe
into action and sav e fuel, do not great deal of time. environmental law s b y not disposing of
accelerate or d e-clutch during overrun. materials properly.
Tyre pressure
Corr ect gear sel ec tion z Inadequate ty re p ressure, leading to Appropriate parts might not b e recycled.
z High revs increase engine w ear and fuel higher road resistance, costs m oney in Contact with some of the materia ls
consumption. two wa ys: for more fuel and increased inv olv ed may p ose a hea lth haz ard.
tyre wear.
z Do not race your engine. Avoid d riv ing at z We recom mend that repair and
high engine speeds. z Regular checks (every 14 d ays) pay off. maintenance be entrusted to your
Making use of the tachom eter helps to Electri cal loa ds Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
save fuel. Drive in a low engine speed z The power consum ption of electrical Extr em e d riving conditions
ra nge for each gear as much a s possible equip ment increa ses fuel consumption. z Going up steep slopes, cornering, driving
with uniform engine speeds. Drive as
z Sw itch off all aux iliary electrical loads on poor road s a nd winter driving a ll
often as possible in top gear, select the (e. g. air c onditioning 3, heated rear increase fuel consumption.
next higher gear a s soon as possible,
window) when not needed. Fuel consumption increa ses dramatically
and only chang e down when the engine
is no longer running perfectly smoothly . Roof rack s, sk i-holders in urba n tra ffic a nd at winter
z Due to air resistance, a roof load can temperatures, especially on short trip s
High speed increase fuel consump tion by approx. when the engine operating tempera ture
z The higher the speed , the higher the
3.5 gal. /1000 miles (1 l/100 km). is not reached.
consumption and the noise level. At top
speed, you consume a great deal of fuel z Remove them if they are not being used. z Follow the hints given above to keep
and produce excessive noise and consumption to a m inimum under suc h
exhaust em issions. cond itions.
Fuels, refu elling Fuels with ethanol content greater than 5% Fuel for diesel engi nes
Fuel c onsum ption do not comply w ith DI N EN 228 a nd must Diesel engines m ust be operated only on
Fuel consump tion is determined und er not b e used unless the v ehicle ha s b een comm ercially av ailable diesel fuel meeting
specific driv ing cond itions – see page 316. specifically develop ed a nd approved for the specifications of DIN EN 590.
these fuels. S ince Ja nuary 2004, some oil comp anies
Special equipment increases the weight of
the v ehicle. As a result, they can increase Fuel with too low an octane number can have mix ed their diesel fuel with up to 5%
fuel consump tion and reduce the specified cause p inking. N o liability can be accepted Bio fuel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Esters)
max imum speed. for resulting dam age. like RME (Rape-Oil Methyl Ester). This is in
acc orda nce with the current DIN EN 590
For the first few thousand m iles, friction Petrol with a higher octane number can
and d oes not ha rm the fuel/injection
between the eng ine and transmission always be used.
system. The characteristics of a diesel fuel
components is higher. This inc reases fuel The ignition tim ing adjusts automatically mix ed up with 5% Bio fuel (FAME) do not
consump tion. to the grade of fuel used (octane differ from conventional diesel fuel and do
Fuel for petrol engines numb er) – see pa ge 310. not influence the vehicle’s driveability.
Normal c om mercial high-quality fuels with Use of petrol w ith a n oc ta ne rating of 95 I mporta nt: Diesel fuel m ixed with 5% FAM E
a m aximum ethanol content of 5% in will ensure economica l driving. acc ording to DI N EN 590 m ust not be
accordance with DIN EN 228 are suitable confused with 100% Bio Diesel, which is not
For vehicles with Z20 LEH 1) engine, use of
(for catalytic converter see pag e 204, for to be used in Vauxhall eng ines.
95 RO N fuel reduces p erform ance a nd
octane numbers see page 310). The
torque. The flow and filterability of diesel fuel a re
quality thereof has considerable effect on
the p erformance, running and serv ice life temperature-dependent.
of the engine. The additives mix ed with the Diesel fuels w ith improved low temp erature
fuel are extremely im portant. For this properties are therefore a vailable on the
rea son you must only refuel with high- ma rk et during the winter months. Make
quality fuels containing additives. sure that y ou fill the tank with winter fuel
before the start of the cold weather
season.
Additives can be used with diesel fuels with
winter prop erties that are guaranteed by
the manufa cturer and when using diesel
fuel filters that are heated depending on
the outside temperature.
Diesel fuels must not be diluted with fuels
that are intended for petrol eng ines.
1)
Sales d esigna tion , see pa ge 310.
C orrect filling depends to a large extent on

proper operation of the fuel disp ensing
pump:
1. Fully insert the pump nozz le and switch it
on.
2. After automatic switch off, the specified
tank capa city is reached after continued,
mea sured filling. Leav e the filler nozz le in
place until the stop.
To close, position the fuel filler cap a nd
rotate past the resistanc e until the ca p
audibly clicks over the reta iner.
Pi cture no: 17197t.tif Pict ure no: 17198t.tif C lose fuel tank cov er.
Fuel fi ller cap Fuel filler neck at right rear side of vehicle.
Wipe off a ny ov erflowing fuel immediately .
If replacing the fuel filler cap, be sure to use The tank flap is locked together with the
a g enuine fuel filler cap for your model to
ensure full func tionality. Diesel-eng ined
doors – see page 38. 9 Warnin g
vehic les have special fuel filler caps. Open the tank flap .
Fuel is flam mable and explosiv e. When
Refuel ling Unscrew the fuel filler cap, remove and ha nd ling fuel or in the im med ia te vicinity,
suspend from the tank flap. avoid naked flames or spa rk s. Do not
9 Warning sm ok e. This also applies w here the
The fuel tank has a limiting sy stem which
prevents ov erfilling of the tank. presence of fuel is rev ealed by its
Care must b e tak en when ha ndling fuel.
characteristic smell. If fuel odours occur in
Before refuelling , switch off the engine the car, have a workshop eliminate the
and where applicable any auxiliary fault im med ia tely.
heating with combustion c ham bers (see
sticker on fuel filler ca p). Switch off
mobile phones.
Damage to the ca talytic converter or the z If unb urned fuel enters the cataly tic
vehicle may result if the follow ing points conv erter, this may result in overheating
are not observed: and irreparable damage to the c atalytic
conv erter.
z O n ignition faults, uneven running after
cold start, a clear d rop-off in eng ine You should therefore av oid
power or other unusual opera ting unnecessarily long use of the starter
symptoms which could indica te a fault in when starting off, running the tank dry
the ig nition system, contac t a workshop (an irregular fuel supply w ill lead to
as soon a s p ossible. Continue driving if overhea ting) and starting the engine by
necessary for a short time at low speed pushing or towing.
and low revs. z If the control indicator Z flashes to
Irregular engine running and a loss of ind ic ate emissions, back off until the
eng ine power when the Electronic fla shing stop s a nd the control ind icator
Pi cture no: 17199t.tif Stab ility Prog ra m (ES P®P lu s 3 ) comes illuminates. Contact a work shop
Catalytic converter, exhaust into action are the result of operating immediately. Control indicator for
gases conditions and are therefore of no emissions Z, see pag e 205.
Ca talytic conv er ter for petrol engines significance - see pag e 208.
Leaded fuel will damage the catalytic
converter and parts of the elec tronic
system, rendering them inoperative.
High qua lity fuels other tha n those listed on
pages 202, 310, 311 (e. g. LRP 1)) could
dam age the catalytic conv erter.
1)
LRP = L ea d Replacement P etrol.
Ca talytic conv er ter for diesel engi nes

Damag e to the catalytic converter or the
vehic le ma y result if the following points
are not ob served:
z On uneven running, a clea r drop-off in
engine power or other unusual operating
sym ptoms, contact a workshop as soon
as possible. C ontinue driving if necessary
for a short time at low speed a nd low
revs.
Irregular engine running and a loss of
engine p ow er when the Electronic
Stability Program (ESP® Pl us 3) comes
into action are the result of operating Pict ure no: 17004t.tif Picture no: 17352t.tif
conditions and are therefore of no Controlli ng exhaust emission C ontrol indicator Z for ex haust
significance - see page 208. Some of the dam aging sub stances in the Illuminates when the ig nition is switched on
exhaust such a s ca rb on monox ide (C O), and d uring the start attempt. Goes off
hy drocarbons (HC ) and nitrous oxides shortly after the engine starts running.
(N Ox ) are reduced to a minimum b y Illuminated with the engine running
making struc tural c hanges – ma inly in the indicates a fault in the exhaust ga s
injection system and the ig nition system in cleaning sy stem. The perm itted emissions
conjunction with the cataly tic converter. ma y be ex ceeded. C ontact a workshop
imm ediately.
Flashing with the engine running indica tes
a fa ult w hich could lead to c atalytic
converter dam age. You ma y continue
driving w ithout dam age if you back off
until flashing stops a nd the control
indicator comes on. Contact a work shop
imm ediately.
If it illum ina tes briefly , but does not recur, it Exhaust g ases
is of no significa nce.
9 Warnin g
Illum ination of A can indicate wa ter in the
diesel fuel filter 3, at the same time a Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous
message appea rs in the service displa y, carbon monoxide, w hich is colourless and
see p age 120. Have a workshop check the odourless and c ould b e fatal if inhaled.
fuel filter for possible water residue.
If ex haust gases p enetrate the v ehicle
If it flashes after the ignition is switched on, interior, open a window and contact a
there is a fa ult in the immobiliser system. workshop.
The engine cannot be started – see
Avoid driving with an open luggage
page 29.
compartment. Otherw ise, exhaust g ases
could penetra te the interior.
Control ind icator A for engine electronics During the first drive sm ok e m ay develop
Illuminates for a few seconds after the because of wax and oil ev aporating on the
ignition is switched on. exhaust system . Park the vehicle in the
open for a while a fter the first drive and
If it illum ina tes when the engine is running, av oid inhaling the fum es.
there is a fault in engine or tra nsmission
electronic s. The electronic system sw itc hes
to a n em ergency running program me. Fuel
consump tion ma y be increased and the
driveability of the vehicle m ay be impaired.
In some c ases, faults can be eliminated by
switching off the engine and restarting . If
the control indicator comes on again when
the engine is running, contac t a workshop
to elim inate the cause of the fault.
Diesel p artic le fi lter 3 Maintenance Y ou are thereby making an im portant

The d iesel pa rticle system filter polluting Have all maintena nce work c arried out at contribution towards keeping the air clean
soot partic les out of the exhaust. the intervals spec ified. We recomm end and c om pliance w ith emissions legislation.
that y ou entrust this work to your Vauxhall
The system contains a self-c leaning C hecking and adjustment of the fuel-
Authorised Repairer, who ha s p roper
func tion at certain intervals. The filter is injection and ignition systems is part of the
equipment and trained personnel
cleaned by burning the soot particles at scope of inspec tion. For this reason you
available. Electronic testing sy stems permit
high tem perature, This procedure runs should hav e a ll maintenance work carried
ra pid diagnosis and remedy of faults. This
automatically under certain v ehicle out a t the intervals specified in your Serv ice
way y ou can be certain that all
conditions and c an take up to 25 m inutes, Booklet.
components of the vehic le’s electrical,
during which time fuel consump tion ma y
injection and ignition system s operate
increase. The smell and the noise that
correctly, that your vehicle has a low level
occur are norm al.
of polluta nt em ission and tha t the cataly tic
The system cannot autom atically clean conv erter system will have a long serv ice
itself under certain vehicle conditions suc h life.
as driving short distances.
If the control indicator ! flashes, y ou
should continue driv ing a nd as soon as the
road and tra ffic situation permits it,
increase speed to more than 25 mph
(40 km /h) and diesel particle filter cleaning
will start. C leaning is quicker at faster
speeds and under load. The engine speed
should not drop b elow 2000 rpm. The
control indica tor goes off as soon as
cleaning is com plete.
We recommend that you do not turn the
ignition off during cleaning.
Drive Control Systems Electronic Stab ility ESP® Pl us is read y for operation as soon as
Interac tive Driv ing System (= IDS+ ) 3 Prog ramm e ( ESP® Pl us ) 3 the ignition is switched on and c ontrol
IDS+ unites the sensors and control units of ESP® P lu s im proves driving stability as indicator v goes out.
the Electronic Stability Program (ES P®P lu s ), necessary in any driving situation When ESP® Pl us comes into a ction, v
Anti-lock Brake Sy stem (ABS) and regardless of the ty pe of road surface or flashes.
Continuous Damping Control (C DC). This tyre g rip . It also prevents the d riv e wheels
from spinning irrespec tiv e of road surface The vehicle is now in a critical situa tion;
provides both excellent driving dynamics
and tyre grip. ESP® Pl us allows you to keep control of the
and greater safety .
vehicle a nd reminds you to m atch your
The system m onitors vehicle movements. speed to the road conditions.
As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve
(understeers/oversteers) engine output is 9 Warnin g
reduced (the sound of the engine cha ng es)
and individual wheels are specifically Do not let this special safety feature
braked . This considerab ly improves the tempt you into ta king risk s w hen driving.
driving stability of the vehicle on snow and
ice and on wet or slippery road surfa ces. Tra ffic safety can only b e ac hieved by
adopting a responsible d riv ing sty le.
Illum inates while driving:

The system is switched off or a fault is
present. C ontinued driving is possible. The
driving sta bility can howev er d eteriorate
depending on road surface conditions.
Re-eng age ESP® Pl u s or hav e the cause of
the fault eliminated by a workshop. The
self-d ia gnosis integrated into the system
fa cilitates rapid fault identification.
Switching off 3
With S PO RT mode 3 engaged (LED in
SPORT b utton illuminated), the ES P®P lu s
can be disengaged for sp orts
Control indicator v performance. ESP® Pl us is reactivated by pressing the
Illuminates for a few seconds when the Hold the S PO RT button depressed for SPO RT button a gain or sw itching on the
ignition is switched on. The system is now around 4 sec onds. C ontrol indicator v will ignition.
rea dy for opera tion. illuminate. ESPoff will also appear in the
service display – see p age 120. S PO RT mode – see p age 210.
Flashing during driving:
This shows the system has com e into 9 Warning
action. The engine output may be reduced
(the sound of the engine cha nges) a nd the ESP® P lu s should not b e deac tiv ated if one
vehic le ma y be braked automatically to a of the run-flat tyres 3 has no pressure.
small degree.
Cont inuous Dam ping C ontrol 3 SPO RT mode 3

(CDC) SPO RT mode is used to cha nge da mping 3,
CDC ad apts vehicle da mping to the current steering 3, throttle application 3 and the
driving situation a nd roa d conditions. shift point for autom atic transmission 3
and Easytronic 3 while driving.
The sy stem continually monitors w heel and
vehic le mov ements and immediately Damp ing and steering become more direct
modifies the damping of each shock and p rov ide b etter contact with the road
absorber. Chassis calibration is optimally surfac e. The engine reacts more quickly to
adap ted to the driving situation and road acc elerator m ov ements.
conditions. For autom atic transm ission 3 and
When SPO RT mode is engaged, the Easy tronic 3, the shift times are red uc ed
dam ping control is ada pted to a sp ortier and gear changes occur at a higher engine
driving style ("harder" chassis setting). speed (except when cruise control is on).
SPO RT mode - see right column. Control indica tor I DS+ for C ontinuous
Damping C ontrol
Lights for around 10 seconds after opening
the driver's d oor. Illum ination during
driving indicates a fault in the system. The
sy stem is not functioning. For safety
reasons, switches to the harder chassis
setting. Have the cause of the fault
eliminated by a workshop. The self-
diagnosis integrated into the system
fa cilitates rapid fault identification.
To deactiv ate
Briefly press the SPORT button again or
switch off the ig nition. The LED in the
button goes out.
Holding it pressed switches off ESP® P lu s,
see p age 209. SPO RT mode rem ains
engaged.
SPORT mode is deactivated if the Winter
prog ra mme 3 is switched on (vehicles w ith
autom atic transmission 3 or Ea sy tronic 3 ).
Winter prog ra mme - see
pages 180, 186, 193.

To activate C ontrol indicator IDS+ for SPORT mode
Press the SPO RT button. The LED in the Lights for around 10 seconds after opening
button illuminates. the driver's door. Illumination during
driving indicates a fault in the sy stem. The
In vehicles with automatic transmission 3
system is not functioning. Have the cause
or Ea sy tronic 3 , control indica tor 1 also
of the fault eliminated by a workshop. The
illuminates.
self-diagnosis integ rated into the sy stem
SPO RT mode cannot be activated if the facilitates rapid fault identification.
Winter programme 3 is running (vehicles
with automatic transmission 3 or
Ea sy tronic 3 ). Winter programme - see
pages 180, 186, 193.
Crui se control 3 With automatic transmission 3, only use

Cruise control can store and maintain cruise control in D or in automatic mode
speeds between 20 mph (30 km/h) and with Easytronic 3.
125 mp h (200 km/h). Deviation from the When the cruise control is active, reaction
stored speed ma y occ ur when driving up or tim es ma y b e increased due to the d ifferent
downhill. position of the feet.
For safety reasons the cruise control
cannot be activated until the foot brake 9 Warning
has been operated once.
The driv er is alway s responsible for
Cruise control is operated with buttons m ,
ensuring tha t vehicle speed is
g, and § on the turn signal stalk.
appropriate for the speed limit and
Do not use the c ruise control if it is not driving conditions - ev en if cruise control
adv isable to maintain a c onstant sp eed is engag ed. Failure to follow the Picture no: 17202t.tif
(e. g. in situations presenting a danger to instructions c ould lead to injuries or C ontrol indicator m
yourself and other road users, in heavy end ang er life. When driving, control indicator m will
traffic or on winding , slippery or greasy illuminates as soon a s the sy stem is
roads). switched on.
Increase To deactivate
With cruise control active, hold down Briefly press button §: C ruise control is
button m or briefly press it repeated ly: switched off, control indicator m goes out
speed is increa sed continuously or in steps and the vehicle slowly decelerates. To
of 1.2 m ph (2 k m/h) without using the continue driving, depress the accelerator
accelerator ped al. pedal in the usual ma nner.
When button m is released the current For reasons of safety , cruise control
speed is stored and maintained. deactivates under certain d riv ing
conditions.
Decelerate
With cruise control active, hold down For ex ample:
button g or briefly press it repeatedly : z the vehicle’s sp eed drops b elow approx.
speed is reduc ed continuously or in steps of 20 mp h (30 km/h) or
1.2 m ph (2 km/h).
Pi cture no: 16990t.tif z the brake pedal is depressed or
To activate When button g is released the current
speed is stored and maintained. z the clutch pedal is dep ressed or
Briefly p ress button m: the c urrent speed is
stored and m ainta ined. The accelerator z selector lever of a utoma tic
pedal can be released. tra nsmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in N.
Vehicle speed can be increased by Resuming the stored speed
depressing the accelerator pedal. When Briefly press button g at a sp eed above
the a ccelerator peda l is released, the 20 mph (30 km/h): the speed selected
previously stored speed is resum ed. before the cruise control w as switc hed off is
resumed.
The value of the stored speed is deleted
when the ignition is turned off.
If the v ehicle approaches an obstacle when

reversing, a series of signals can be hea rd
in the vehicle interior. The interv al b etween
the signals becomes shorter as the
distance is reduced. If the distance is less
than 30 cm, the sig nal will be continuous.
9 Warnin g
Under certain circumstances, various
reflective surfac es on objects or clothing
as well a s external noise sources may
cause the system to fail to detect
obstacles. For this rea son, care must be
Pi cture no: 17203t.tif Pict ure no: 17016t.tif taken when reversing even if the p arking
Park ing dista nc e sensor 3 To activate distance sensor is operational. This is of
Parking distance sensor mak es rev erse The parking d istance sensor system particula r importance when in the vicinity
parking easier by measuring the distance activates a utoma tica lly when the ig nition is of pedestrians.
between the v ehicle and an obsta cle in the switched on and reverse gear is eng aged.
rea r, and giving an acoustic signal in the To deactivate
Its op erational readiness is indicated by
passenger com partment. The sy stem deactivates automatically
illumination of the LED in button r.
The system record s the distance using four when reverse gear is disengaged .
sensors in the rear bumper. To deactivate the system when reverse
gear is engag ed, press button r. The
LED in the button goes out.
To reactivate, press button r a gain.
Flashing: C aravan/trailer towing equipm ent 3,

The fault is d ue to sensors obstructed with carav an/trailer towing
snow or ice. The sensors must be The sy stem automatically detects if a
undam aged a nd free of d irt, snow and ic e. towbar is properly fitted to the vehicle.
Interference due to ex ternal sources of When towing, p arking dista nce sensor is
ultra sound (e.g . pneum atic drills, rota ry automatically deactivated when the trailer
machines). Once the source of interference cab le is plugged into the socket.
is removed, the sy stem will operate Fitting rear load ra cks 3
normally . Rear load rack s, e.g . bicy cle rack s, fitted
nea r the sensors could disrupt the system .
O bserve the note on the Astra TwinTop on
pag e 58.
Control indicator r
Lights:
Fault in system. The sy stem is not
func tioning.Hav e the cause of the fault
elim inated by a workshop. The self-
diagnosis integ rated into the sy stem
facilitates rapid fa ult id entifica tion.
The vehic le is automatically ra ised at the

rear, increasing the spring tra vel and
ground c learance.
The automatic level control system is
activated after ap prox . 2 miles (3 k m),
depending on the vehicle load ing and the
na ture of the road surface.
Head lig ht range adjustment – see
page 146.
On function faults, do not utilise full loa d
capacity. Have the cause of the fault
eliminated immediately by a workshop.
Autom atic l ev el control 3
Autom atic level control makes it possible to
keep the height of the vehicle constant
when subjected to different loads in the
rea r (e.g . when towing a caravan or trailer).
This significantly improves driving
conditions.
Control indica tor w

If control indicator w illuminates red while
driving, there is a loss of pressure. Stop
immed iately and check tyre pressures.
A maxim um sp eed of 50 m ph (80 km /h) is
permitted for run-flat tyres 3. O bserve the
information on page 229.
If the control indicator w illuminates yellow,
there is a fa ult in the sy stem. H ave the
cause of the fault elimina ted b y a
work shop. The self-diagnosis integrated
into the sy stem facilitates rapid fault
identification.
Pi cture no: 17018t.tif The control indica tor flashes three times Picture no: 17019t.tif
Deflation d etect ion system when the system is initialising . S ystem initialisa tion
(DDS = Deflati on Detecti on System) 3 After c orrecting tyre pressure or changing
The d eflation detection sy stem 9 Warning a tyre/wheel, the system must be initialised:
continuously monitors the speed of all With the ignition switched on, press the
wheels while driving. If a ty re loses The deflation detection sy stem does not DDS button for approx. 4 seconds. Control
pressure, it grows smaller and rotates m ore rep lace manua l checks with a suitable indicator w fla shes 3 times. The system is
quickly than the other w heels. If the sy stem gauge. operational a fter driving a certain
detects a difference in speed, control distance.
C heck ty re pressures at least every
indicator w illuminates red.
14 days and p rior to any long journey ; O nly initialise the system if all tyres hav e
Stop imm ediately and chec k tyre p ressure. the ty res should b e checked when cold. the prescribed pressure.
Mount the spare wheel if necessary – see Don’t forget to c heck the sp are 3 .
pages 249, 252.
The sy stem is op erational when the ignition Ty re p ressure – see pages 225, 337.
is switched on and c an detect pressure loss
from a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h).
Tyre pr essure monitoring system 3 Once the ignition is switched on, the system
The ty re pressure m onitoring system is operational and will continuously
continually checks the pressure a nd speed monitor the tyre pressures a t speed s of
of all four wheels w hile driving. approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) and above. Ü Board Computer
A pressure sensor is integrated in each
wheel. Once a m inute, the pressure of each
9 Warning BC 1
BC 2
tyre is sent to a control unit, where it is
The tyre pressure monitoring system does Timer
compared. I f the system detects one or
not replac e m anual checks with a
more pressure differences, a m essag e Tyres
suitab le ga uge.
appears on the inform ation d isplay .
C heck ty re pressures at least every
The current tyre pressures a re displayed in
14 days and p rior to any long journey ;
the I nfo display .
the ty res should b e checked when cold.
For the sy stem to be opera tional, all wheels Don’t forget to c heck the sp are 3 . Picture no: 17334t.tif
must be equipped with pressure sensors Display of current ty re pressure
and all ty res must be filled to the Ty re p ressure – see pages 225, 337. S elec t menu item Tyr es from the Board
prescribed pressure. The tyre pressure C omputer m enu.
monitoring system automatically d etec ts if
the vehicle is being driven with a load of up The current pressure of eac h ty re is
to 3 persons or a full loa d. displayed.
Warning messages
A m essag e is given on the inform ation
display to warn of inc onsistent tyre
pressures. In some v ersions, the message is
displayed in abb reviated form.
For ex ample, the following messages can
be displayed:
Navi active Navi active
Tyre pressure Attention!

che ck rea r F ron t left tyre
left pressure loss
(value in bar) (va lu e in b ar)
OK OK
A graphic indicating the left rear tyre is A graphic indicating the front left ty re is C ontrol indicator w
shown together with the current tyre shown together with the current ty re If c ontrol indicator w illum inates yellow
pressure: S light pressure dev ia tion, reduce pressure: Significant pressure deviation or while driving, there is a fault in the ty re
speed. C heck pressure at next opportunity direct pressure loss! Steer out of flow of pressure monitoring system . Fitting a w heel
with appropriate gauge and correct if tra ffic a s q uick ly as possible without without pressure sensor (e.g. spare
necessary. endangering other drivers. S top and check wheel 3 ) will also generate a fault in the
the tyres. system. Have the cause of the fault
O n the colour information display this
remedied by a workshop. The sy stem’s
rep ort w ill appea r in yellow. Mount the spare wheel 3 if necessa ry - see
integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to
pages 249, 252. A m aximum speed of
be quickly remedied .
50 mp h (80 km/h) is permitted for run-flat
tyres 3. Observ e the informa tion on
page 229.
On the colour information disp la y this
report will app ear in red.
Ac know ledgement of wa rnings – see
page 130.
General information S ensors for the ty re pressure m onitoring

The tyre pressure monitoring sy stem does system can be fitted on request by a
not function when the emergency or a workshop.
spare wheel not fitted w ith a pressure When m anually chec king tyre pressure with
sensor is used, and the control indicator w a pressure gauge, sc rew the adapter onto
illuminates yellow. The tyre pressure dis- the valve. Tyre pressure – see p age 337.
play shows –.–. The tyre pressure is then
monitored by the deflation d etec tion O n each tyre change, the valve inserts and
sy stem, see page 217. sealing rings for the ty re pressure
monitoring sy stem must be replac ed b y a
If a comp lete set of wheels w ithout tyre workshop.
pressure control system sensors is m ounted
(e.g. four winter tyres), no error m essa ge The use of commerc ially ava ila ble liquid
will be displa yed. The ty re pressure filled run-flat systems or repair kits can
monitoring system is not operational. The impa ir the function of the sy stem.
Sy stem initialisation tyre p ressure of a set of wheels without Vauxhall-approved systems can be used.
The system must be initialised after a sensors is m onitored by the defla tion Rad io transmitters (e.g. radio headphones,
wheel/ty re change: detection system – see pa ge 217. walk ie-talkies) operated in the area could
With the ig nition switched on, press button cause interference in the ty re pressure
DDS approx. 4 seconds. C ontrol indicator w monitoring sy stem.
flashes 3 tim es. The sy stem is operational
after driv ing a certain distance.
O nly initialise the system if all tyres have
the p rescrib ed pressure (c heck w hen tyres
are cold).
Brake system Foot bra ke

The b ra kes are an important factor for The foot brak e comprises two independent
traffic sa fety. brak e circuits.
To improve effectiveness, do not b ra ke If one brake c ircuit fails, the vehicle can still
unnecessarily hard for the first 120 miles be braked with the other brake circuit.
(200 km) after new brake pads have been However the brak ing effect will occur at a
fitted. lower ped al position and considerably
more forc e is required. The braking dis-
Brake pad wear must not exceed a sp eci- tance is longer. Contact a workshop before
fied limit. Reg ular maintenance a s detailed continuing to d riv e.
in the S ervice Booklet is therefore of the
utmost importanc e for traffic safety. To ensure the full peda l travel can be
utilized, especially in case of a fault in one
Hav e worn brak e pa ds replaced by a of the b ra ke circuits, there m ust be no ma ts
workshop. Pict ure no: 17206t.tif in the vicinity of the pedals – see page 199.
Brake assist
Tested and approved pa ds give optim um When the engine is not running, the sup-
If the brak e p edal is operated with a pow-
braking p erformance. port of the brake servo unit disa ppears
erful push, the vehic le is automatically
Brake pads worn to the minimum lev el braked at full braking power in order to once the brake pedal has been depressed
cause g rinding noises. Y ou m ay continue achieve the shortest possible braking dis- once or twice. Braking effect is not
to drive but have the p ads replaced as tanc e when full-on b ra king occurs (brak ing reduc ed, but braking requires signific antly
soon as possible. To change the pads, con- assista nt). greater force. This is especially im portant
tact a workshop. to bear in mind w hen towing .
Mainta in steady p ressure on the brake
pedal for a s long a s full-on braking is to
continue. When the brak e pedal is
relea sed, the maxim um brake forc e am pli-
fica tion is taken away .
Adapt ive brak e light 3
During full-on braking, all three b ra ke
lig hts flash for the duration of ABS control.
Check the brake lights b efore starting out

on a journey. On v ehicles with check
control 3 the brake lights are check ed
automatically – see page 138.
Shortly after starting each journey the
effectiveness of the b ra ke system should
be tested at low speed and without
inconv eniencing other tra ffic, especia lly if
the b ra kes are wet, e. g. after the vehicle
has been washed.
The b ra ke fluid level should be check ed
reg ularly . If the brake fluid level is too low
and the hand brake is not applied, control
indicator R on the instrument panel Pict ure no: 17207t.tif Picture no: 17208t.tif
illuminates – see pa ge 114. Hand bra ke Brak e system control indicat or R
Alw ays a pply hand brake firmly. On slopes The control indicator illuminates when the
Hill Start Assist 3 (HSA) apply the hand brake a s firmly as p ossible. ignition is switched on if the hand brak e is
The system helps pull away on inclines. app lied or if the b ra ke or clutch fluid level is
After releasing the footbrake, if the ha nd The mechanic al hand brake acts on the
too low. B ra ke fluid - see p age 302.
brake is not applied the brak es are only brakes on the rear wheels. It engages
released a fter 2 seconds. As soon as the autom atic ally when applied. For vehicles with Easytronic 3, the control
acceleration is sufficient to prevent rolling indicator flashes for a few second s w hen
To release the hand brake pull the lever up
back , the brake is released . the ignition is turned off if the hand b rake
slightly, press the ratchet knob , and fully
is not applied.
low er the lever.
To red uc e the operating forces of the hand 9 Warnin g
brake, depress the foot brake at the same
tim e. If the control indicator comes on when
the handbrake is released, stop driving
immediately. Contact a workshop for
assista nce.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u ) Fault

ABS continually monitors the brake system
and prevents the wheels from locking 9 Warnin g
reg ardless of the type of road surfac e or
tyre grip. If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may
be subject to locking due to braking that
It starts to regulate the braking p ressure as is heavier tha n normal. The ad vantages
soon as a w heel shows a tendency to lock. of AB S are no longer opera tional. The
The v ehicle remains steera ble, even in the vehicle can no longer b e steered and may
event of very heavy braking, for instance swerve.
on bends or when sw erving to av oid an
obstacle. Even in the ca se of full-on Y ou can continue driving, provided y ou
braking, the ABS makes it p ossible to drive drive with care and anticipation.
round an obsta cle without releasing the
Pict ure no: 17209t.tif Hav e the cause of the fault elim ina ted by a
brakes.
Control i nd icator u for ABS workshop. The self-d ia gnosis integrated
ABS control is made app arent though a into the system allows rapid fault
It comes on for a few seconds after the
pulse in the brake peda l and the noise of identification.
ignition is turned on. The sy stem is read y
the regulation proc ess. for operation when the control indicator
goes out.
9 Warning
If the control indicator does not go out
For optimum b ra king, keep the brak e after a few sec onds, or if it illuminates while
pedal fully depressed throughout the driving, there is a fault in the ABS . The
braking p rocess, despite the fac t that the brake sy stem rem ains operational without
pedal is pulsating. Do not red uce the AB S reg ulation.
pressure on the pedal. Self-check
Do not let this special safety feature Each time the ignition is turned on and the
tempt y ou into taking risks when driving. engine started , after moving away from a
speed of around 2 mph (3 k m/h) the system
Traffic safety can only be achieved by
performs a self-check which may be
adopting a responsib le driving style. audible.
Wheels, tyres Vehicles wit h tyre pr essure monitoring Fitti ng new tyr es
see page 337 for suitab le tyres and system 3 Fit tyres in pa irs or in sets, which is even
restrictions. With winter tyres or after conv ersion to better. Ensure tha t tyres on one axle are
different wheel sizes, sensors for the tyre z the same siz e
Tyres fitted in the factory are a dapted to pressure monitoring system can be fitted z the same design
the c hassis a nd provide optimum driving by a workshop on request. O therwise the z the same make
comfort and safety . sy stem would not show the tyre pressure z and have the same tread pattern.
devia tions.
Cha ng ing tyre/w heel type
Before conversion to other ty res or wheels, Deflation detection system 3 – see Fit directional tyres such that they roll in the
note the changes req uired. page 217, tyre pressure monitoring direction of trav el. The rolling direction is
sy stem 3 – see page 218. indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on
If tyres of a different size than those fitted the sidewall.
at the factory are used, the electronic Vehicles wit h run-flat t yres 3
speedometer may require reprogramm ing When switching wheels, e.g. w hen Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction
to ensure that the correct speed is switching to winter ty res, use run-fla t tyres (e.g. when a tyre is changed) should be
displayed. as there is no spare wheel or tyre repair kit refitted as soon as possible. This is the only
in the vehic le. way to obtain full benefit from the design
9 Warning Run-flat tyres - see page 229. properties of the tyre.
Use of unsuitable tyres or wheels may

lead to a ccidents and rend er the vehicle
unroadworthy.
Run-fla t tyres 3 must not be comb ined with Some b ra nd s of tyres have a b eaded ed ge
conventional tyres. for a lloy wheels to protect against
damage. If wheel trim is used on steel
When disposing of ty res, follow the legal
wheels with beaded-edg e ty res, the
req uirements.
following spec ification must be followed:
z Use of w heel trim s and tyres that
approved b y Vauxhall for the vehicle in
question and thereby fulfil all
req uirements for the wheel a nd tyre
combination.
z If the wheel trims and ty res used are not
Vauxhall-approved, the tyres must not
have a b eaded edge.
9 Warning Tyre p ressure
C heck ty re pressure, including the sp are
Use of unsuitab le tyres or wheel trim s wheel, a t least every 14 da ys and prior to
could lead to sudden loss of air and any long journey ; the ty res should b e
thereby a ccidents. checked when cold. Don’ t forget to chec k
the spare 3.
Use the valve cap key to mak e unscrewing
the valv e caps easier. The key is located on
the inside of the tank flap.
Hidd en tyre dama ge is not elim inated by

adjusting the inflation p ressure.
9 Warnin g
Incorrect ty re pressure could lead to a flat
tyre.

In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring After having chec ked the tyre pressure,
system 3 there is an adapter in the va lv e tig hten the va lv e ca ps using the v alve cap
cap key . Sc rew ad apter to v alve before key .
attaching tyre pressure gauge – see Incorrect infla tion pressures will imp air
page 218. safety, v ehicle handling, comfort and fuel
Tyre pressure, see page 337 a nd the economy and will increase tyre wear.
adhesive foil 3 on the inside of the tank If the pressure is too low, this can result in
flap. H ave adhesive foil replaced after considera ble ty re warm -up and internal
changing to different tyre size. damage, leading to trea d separation and
Do not reduce tyre pressure when the ty res even to tyre blow-out at high sp eeds.
are warm. Otherwise the pressure m ay
drop below the permissible minim um when
the ty res cool down.
Check tyres regularly for dama ge

(p enetrated foreign bodies, punctures,
cuts, c ra cks, bulges in side walls). Chec k
wheels for dam age. If dam age or unusual
wear is found, contact a work shop.
9 Warning
Dama ge m ay lead to ty re blow-out.

Tyre cond ition, w heel condi tion Tread d ep th
Drive over edges slowly and at a rig ht C heck tread depth regularly.
angle if p ossible. Driving ov er sha rp edges If w ear in the front is greater than that in
can lead to hidden ty re damage a nd wheel the rear, m ov e the rear wheels to the front
dam age which is only noticed later on. ax le and vice versa.
When pa rk ing, ensure that the tyres a re not C orrect tyre pressure. For vehicles with
pressed against the ed ge of the kerb . deflation d etec tion system 3 or tyre
pressure control system 3 , initialise the
system – see pages 217, 220.
For reasons of safety , tyres should be
replaced when their tread depth has worn
down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm).
General i nformati on Tyre d esigna tions

Meaning s:
z The danger of aq uap laning is greater if
the ty res are worn. e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 H
z Tyres age, even if they a re used only very 195 = Tyre width in mm
little or not at all. A spare wheel which
65 = Cross-section ratio
has not b een used for six years should be
(ty re d epth to width) in %
used only in emergencies; drive slowly
when using suc h ty res. R = Belt ty pe Radial
z Never fit used tyres the prev ious history RF = Type: Run-flat
and use of w hich y ou do not know. 15 = Wheel d ia meter in inch
z So as not to im pair brake cooling , use 91 = Load ind ex
only wheel trims app rov ed for use on e.g . 91 corresp onds to 618 k g
Pi cture no: 17216t.tif your vehicle. H = Speed cod e letter:
The legally permissible minimum tread
depth (1.6 m m) has been reached when S peed code letters:
the tread has worn down as far as one of
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
the w ear indicators (TWI 1 )). A number of
wear indicators a re spaced at equal S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
intervals around the ty re within the tread. T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Their position is indicated by markings on H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
the ty re sidewall.
V up to 150 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
1)
TWI = T read Wea r I ndicator.
Run-flat tyres (RFT) 3 Driv ing with a dam aged tyre Winter tyres 3
Run-fla t tyres have reinforced, self- A loss in tyre pressure is ind icated by the For notes on fitting new tyres – see
sup porting sidewalls, w hich ensure that the tyre p ressure monitoring system 3 or the pag e 224.
tyres a lways have a certain amount of deflation detection sy stem 3 . Limitations - see pa ges 229, 337.
driveability, ev en when there is no p ressure. If a tyre has no pressure, continued driving Winter tyres improve safety at
Run-fla t tyres are only permitted on is p ossible temperatures b elow 7 °C and should
vehic les with ES P®P lu s and tyre pressure z at a sp eed of max. 50 mph (80 k m/h), therefore be fitted on all the wheels.
monitoring sy stem or defla tion detection z up to a distance of 50 miles (80 k m).
system. The design of summ er ty res means they
have limited qualities for winter driving.
9 Warning
9 Warning If the max im um perm issible speed for the
When driving w ith a flat tyre, do not winter ty res is less than that of the v ehicle,
Even the tyre pressure of run-flat tyres a notice indicating the m aximum
exceed a sp eed of 50 m ph (80 km /h) or
must be checked regularly. permissible sp eed for the tyres must b e
a d istance of 50 m iles (80 km ).
Check tyre pressures a t least ev ery affixed within the driver’s field of v ision 1).
The vehicle will be more difficult to steer
14 day s and prior to any long journey; If y ou use the spare wheel when it is fitted
and handle and the brak ing d istance will
the tyres should be checked when cold. with a summer tyre, the vehicle’s
be longer.
driveability ma y be affected , especially on
Dep ending on tyre manufacturer, run-fla t Adapt driving sty le and speed to the
slippery road surfaces. O btain a
tyres c an be identified from a marking on conditions at hand. replacem ent for the faulty ty re as soon as
the ty re wa ll. E. g. RO F = Run-on-Flat for possible, and ha ve the wheel balanced
Goodyear or S SR = Self Supporting R un-flat Do not use a tyre repa ir kit.
and fitted to the v ehicle.
Tyre for Continental. Deflation detection system 3 – see
Run-fla t tyres ma y only be used in page 217, tyre pressure monitoring
combination with Vauxhall-app rov ed alloy sy stem 3 – see page 218.
wheels; this a lso app lies to winter tyres.
1)
Varies from coun try to coun try on a ccount of
nationa l regu la tion s.
Wheel c overs 3 Wheel trim on steel wheels could come into

If the wheel trims and tyres used are not contact with parts of the cha in and be
Vauxhall-approved , mak e sure that the dam aged . Remove the wheel trim – see
tyres d o not hav e a bea ded edge – see pag e 252.
page 225. Tyre cha ins may only be used at sp eeds up
to 30 mph (50 km/h) and, when trav elling
on roads that are free of snow , they m ay be
used for brief periods only since they are
subject to rap id wea r on a hard road a nd
ma y sna p.
Temporary spare wheel 3
Tyre chains must not be used on the
temporary spare wheel. If y ou need to use
Pict ure no: 17217t.tif tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre,
Tyre chains 3 fit the temporary spa re on the rear ax le
Limitations and further information – see and transfer one of the rea r wheels to the
page 337. front axle.
Ty re chains are only permitted on the drive For notes on the tem porary spare wheel –
wheels (front axle). They must be fitted to see page 250.
the tyres sym metrically in order to achiev e
a concentric fit. Wheel changing – see pag e 252.
Alw ays use fine mesh chains that add no C orrect tyre pressure. Defla tion detection
more than 10 m m to the ty re tread and the system 3 – see p age 217, tyre pressure
inboard sides (including chain lock). control sy stem 3 – see page 218.
Roo f racks 3
9 Warning
Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to
injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle
according ly .
For safety reasons, and to prevent roof

dam age, we recommend use of the
Vauxhall roof ra ck system approved for
your vehicle.
Roof loads are not permitted on the Astra Pict ure no: 17218t.tif Picture no: 18498t.tif
TwinTop . Version wit hout roof rail ing Versi on with roof ra iling 3
Fasten the roof rack following the Lift the covers from the fitting openings. To attach the roof ra ck, insert mounting
instructions that ac company the sy stem. bolts in the bores shown in the p icture, see
Attac h roof rack a t app ropriate points, see
instructions prov ided with the roof rack
Driving hints – see page 198. enclosed roof luggage rack system
system.
instructions.
Towing equipment 3
9 Warning
Disreg ard of these notes ca n lead to
injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle
according ly .
O nly use a trailer towing dev ice a pproved

for the vehicle. Have a towing device fitted
by workshop, who will inform you of any
possible trailer load inc reases. They will
have the instructions for fitting the dev ic e
and any necessary c hanges to the vehicle Pict ure no: 17220t.tif Picture no: 17221t.tif
concerning cooling, hea t shields or other Stowa ge of coupling b all b ar Fitti ng the coupling b all b ar
devices. In H atchbacks, the coupling ball bar is in a Disengage and fold d ow n the soc ket.
pouch, fastened in the lug gage Remove the sea ling plug from the hole for
O bserve the note on the Astra TwinTop on compartment c argo box with a strap - see the coupling ball bar and stow it in the
page 58. page 235. luggage compa rtm ent.
Do not mount towing equipment to In Estates, the c oupling ball bar is fastened
vehic les with Z 20 LEH1) engine. with a strap in a compartment in the spare
wheel well of the luggage compartment.
9 Warning
The coupling ball bar is to b e removed
when not towing .
For installation dimensions of the tra iler

towing equipm ent – see pages 351, 353.
1)
Sa les desig nation – see pa ge 31 0.
Checking the tensioning of the c oupling Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must be Inserting the coupling b all bar
ball b ar tensioned before it is inserted into the Insert the tensioned coupling ball ba r into
coupling housing: the coupling housing and push firmly
z Red m arking on turn knob points
upwards until the coup ling ball bar audibly
towa rd s w hite marking on coupling ba ll z Unlock coupling ball bar (key to
eng ages in position.
bar. position 1) – see Fig. 17222 T.
The turn knob snaps back into its home
z Gap of approx. 6 millimetres between z Pull turn k nob out and then turn it
position resting a gainst the coup ling ball
rotary knob and coupling ball bar. clockwise as far as it will go – see
bar.
Fig. 17223 T.
z Key is in lock at p osition 1.
9 Warnin g
Do not touch the turn k nob when
inserting the coupling ball bar - risk of
injury.
Imp or tant
Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly
installed:
z Green marking on turn knob points
towards white marking on coupling ball
bar.
z No gap between turn k nob and coupling
ball b ar.
z C oupling ba ll bar must be seated firm ly
in coupling housing.
z C oupling ba ll bar must be locked and
key m ust be rem oved.
Loc k coupling ball ba r (key to position 2 – 9 Warning Dismounti ng the coupling b all b ar
see page 233, Fig. 17222 T). Remove key Unlock coupling ba ll bar (key to
and press protective flap into position. Towing a c aravan/trailer is only position 1 – see page 233, Fig. 17222 T).
When the coupling b all bar is locked the permitted w ith a correctly mounted Pull out turn knob and then turn it clockwise
towbar. If the towbar cannot b e correctly
turn knob can no longer b e pulled out. as far as it will g o. Pull coup ling ball bar
mounted, conta ct a workshop for down out of the coupling housing and stow
assistance. in compa rtm ent in the lugga ge
compa rtm ent – see p age 232.
Eye for b reak-aw ay st opping c able
In the case of carava ns/trailers with brake,
attach the break-away stop ping cable to
the eye (a rrow in Fig. 17225 T).
Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the Towing

coupling ball ba r. Fold away the socket – C arava n and tra iler loads 1 )
see page 232, Fig. 17221 T. The permissib le carav an/trailer load s a re
Do not use steam-jet clea ners or other vehicle- a nd engine-dependent max imum
high-pressure cleaners to c lean the va lues whic h must not be exceeded. The
coupling ball ba r. actual caravan/trailer load is the difference
between the ac tual gross weig ht of the
carav an/trailer and the actual c oupling
socket loa d with the ca ra van/trailer
coupled . When the caravan/trailer load is
being check ed, therefore, only the
carav an/trailer wheels – and not the jockey
wheel – must b e standing on the weighing
Pict ure no: 17220t.tif app aratus.
Stowa ge of coupling b all b ar The permissib le carav an/trailer load s for
Hatch y our v ehicle are giv en in the vehicle
Stow the coupling ball bar in the p ouch and documents. Unless otherwise stated, they
fa sten it in the luggage compa rtm ent are valid for g ra dients up to max . 12%.
cargo box with the stra p.
Estate
Stow the coupling b all bar in the
compartment in the spare wheel well of the
lugg age compartment, fastening it with
the stra p.
1)
Ob serve n atio nal regula tions.
The permissible cara van/trailer load should The actual carav an/trailer load plus the C oup ling sock et load
be fully utilised only by drivers who are actual gross weight of the towing vehicle The coupling socket load is the load
adequately experienced in towing large or must not exceed the max imum permitted exerted by the trailer/carav an on the
heav y carav ans/trailers. tow ing weight. For example, if the coupling ball. It can be va ried by changing
permitted gross v ehicle weight is utilised, the weight distribution when loading the
The permitted carav an/trailer load ap plies
the trailer/caravan load must only b e used trailer/caravan.
up to the specified incline and up to an
until the maximum permitted towing
altitude of 1000 m etres abov e sea level. The m aximum permissible coupling socket
weight is rea ched. The max imum
Since engine power decreases as altitude load (75 kg) is specified on the towing
permitted towing weight is shown on the
increases because of the air becom ing equipment identifica tion plate and in the
identification plate, see p age 308.
thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability, vehicle d oc um ents. Always aim for the
the p ermitted towing weig ht a lso ma ximum load, especially in the case of
decreases by 10% for every 1000 m etres of hea vy ca ravans/trailers. The coupling
additional altitude. The towing weight socket loa d should never fall below 25 kg.
does not have to be reduced when driv ing When measuring the coupling socket load ,
on roads with slight inclines (less than 8%, ma ke sure that the drawbar of the loaded
e. g. motorwa ys). trailer/caravan is at the same height as it
will be when the trailer/caravan is coupled
with the towing vehic le loa ded. Particularly
important for trailers/ca ra vans with
tandem ax le.
Rear axle load during tow ing Trai ler Stabi lity Assist 3 (TS A)
With a trailer c oupled and the towing TSA monitors vehicle movements when
vehic le fully loaded (including all towing a caravan or trailer. If the system
occupants), the permissible rear a xle load detects lurching movem ents, engine power
(see identification plate or v ehicle is reduced and the vehic le/trailer
documents) may be ex ceeded by 65 kg comb ination is selec tiv ely braked until the
and the p ermissible g ross vehic le weight by lurching ceases.
45 kg for the H atch. For the Estate, the TSA is a function of the electronic stability
permissible rear ax le load may be programm e (ESP®P lu s ), see page 209.
exceeded by 60 kg and the permissib le
gross v ehicle weight by 30 k g. If the
permissible rear ax le load is exceed ed
a m aximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h)
applies (50 mph / 80 km/h if approved for
use as a com mercial vehicle). If national Pict ure no: 17213t.tif
Tyre pressure
reg ulations specify a lower m aximum
Increase the tyre pressure on the towing
speed for vehic les towing a trailer, this
vehicle to the v alue specified for a full
must be observed .
loa d – see pa ge 337. Check the pressure
of the spare w heel and caravan/trailer
wheels.
Tra ilers with LED turn signals must ha ve a Parking distance sensor 3 is d eactiva ted
prov ision that enab les light monitoring for when tow ing.
commerc ia l bulbs. Handling is greatly influenced by the
Turn signal control indica tor - see loading of the trailer/c aravan. Loads
page 116. should therefore b e sec ured so that they
cannot slip and be placed in the centre of
the tra iler/ca ra van if possible, i.e. ab ov e
the axle.
In the case of trailers with low driv ing
stability or caravans w ith a p ermitted gross
vehicle w eight of over 1300 kg (Hatch)/
1200 kg (Estate), do not exceed a speed of
50 mp h (80 km/h); the use of a friction-typ e
Pi cture no: 17227t.tif stabiliser is hig hly recomm ended.
Driv ing chara cteristics, tow ing tip s
In the case of trailers/caravans with b ra kes, Do not drive faster than 50 m ph (80 km/h)
attach breakaway stop ping cable to ey e. if possible, even in countries where higher
speeds are permitted.
Before attaching the trailer/carav an,
lubricate the ball of the trailer/c aravan Mak e sure that y ou ha ve enoug h room
towing device. However, do not lub rica te when cornering and avoid sudden
the b all if a stabiliser, which acts on the ma noeuv res.
coupling ball, is being used to da mp
hunting.
Check cara van/trailer lig hting b efore
starting to drive. The fog tail lights on the
vehic le are deactivated when towing a
carava n or tra iler.
If the tra iler/ca ra van starts to sway , drive When driving downhill, the bra kes are Automatic transm ission 3 or Easy tronic 3
more slowly, do not attem pt to correct the under consid erably more load when towing in automatic m od e will automa tic ally
steering and brake sharply if necessary. a carava n/trailer. For this reason, drive in select the d riv ing programme with the
the sam e gear as if driving uphill and driv e optimum engine b ra king effec t.
If it is nec essary to apply the brak es fully ,
at a similar speed.
depress the brake pedal as hard a s Gear position 3, 2 or 1 can a lso be
possible. ma nually selected if req uired.
Remem ber that the braking distance for The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its
vehic les towing caravans/trailers w ith a nd cooling power is therefore independent of
without brake is a lways grea ter than that the engine speed.
for vehicles not towing a caravan/trailer. S ince a c onsiderab le am ount of heat is
generated at high engine speeds and less
at slower speeds, do not shift down when
climb ing hills whilst the vehic le is still coping
with the gradient in the hig her gear.
Sta rting on i nc lines Before starting off under extreme

For vehicles with m anual transmission, the conditions (high c om bination w eight,
most favourable engine speed when mountainous terrain with steep inc lines),
starting off on an incline is b etween switch off all unnecessary elec trica l loa ds
2500 and 3000 rpm for petrol eng ines a nd (e.g. heated rear wind ow , air conditioning
between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel sy stem 3, heated front seats 3).
engines. Hold engine speed constant,
enga ge c lutch grad ually (let slip), release
hand brake and op en throttle. If p ossible,
the engine speed should not drop during
this procedure.
For vehicles with automatic transm ission 3
or Ea sy tronic 3 in autom atic mode, app ly
full throttle.
Self-help, Vehicle care 241
Self-help, 9 Warning
Vehicle care Disregard of these notes can lead to
injuries whic h may be fatal. Vehicle
Diesel fuel system, bleeding . .... .... ..... . 241 accordingly.
Bonnet ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 241
Starting .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 242 Diesel fuel system , bleeding
Starting the engine with jump Nev er let the tank run dry ! If c ontrol
leads 3 .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 243 indica tor Y illuminates, refuel as soon a s
Towing ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 244 possible. Refuel immediately if it fla shes.
Warning triangle ¨ 3 , . .... ..... .... .... ..... . 247 Restarting after running out of fuel is
First-aid k it (c ushion) + 3, .... .... .... ..... . 247 possible, but sta rting b ehaviour will be Picture no: 17053t.tif
Spa re wheel 3 . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 249 delay ed. Turn on the ignition three times Bon net
Jac k £ 3 and vehicle tools 3 .. .... ..... . 251 for 15 seconds eac h tim e. Then start the To open the bonnet, pull the release lever
Changing wheels . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 252 engine for a maximum of 40 seconds 1) . If it located on the driv er’s side b elow the
Tyre repair kit 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 256 does not start, repeat the p rocess after instrument panel. The bonnet will then be
Electrical system .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 259 waiting at least 5 seconds. If the engine still unlocked and will partially open. R eturn
does not start, contac t a workshop . release lever to its original position.
Fuses and the most important c ircuits
they p rotect .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 262
Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 269
Halogen headlight system .... .... .... ..... . 269
Xenon headlight system 3, Ad aptive
Forward Lighting system 3 .... .... ..... . 273
Front turn sig nal lights . .... ..... .... .... ..... . 276
Side turn signal lig hts ... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 276
Fog lights 3 . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 276
Tail lights . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 277
Numb er plate light .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 286
Courtesy lig hts ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 287
Vehicle care. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 289
1)
On eng in e Z 17 DTH , fo r tech nica l reaso ns
on ly 30 second s is po ssible. Sales des ig nation
see p ag e 311.
242 Self-help, Vehicle care
The bonnet is held open automatically 3. Starting

In another design, to lock the bonnet in the Do not sta rt wit h quick charger
op en position, insert the rod lying a cross This prevents d amage to electronic
the radiator into the small slot on the components.
bonnet und ersid e. Press rod firmly into its Do not sta rt by pushing or tow ing
holder before closing. Because your vehicle is fitted with a
Lower the bonnet and a llow it to d rop into cataly tic converter, it must not be started
its ca tc h. by pushing or towing – see page 204.
Check tha t the bonnet is lock ed in position Vehicle with the O pen&Start system 3 must
by pulling at its front edge. I f it is not not be sta rted by pushing or towing if the
engaged, repea t the procedure. battery is discharged, since the steering
column lock c annot be released.
Pi cture no: 17054t.tif The v ehicle can only be started using jum p
There is a safety catch on the underside of leads – see follow ing page.
the b onnet: lift this upwards and op en the
bonnet.
Dirt on snow on the bonnet can slide onto
the windscreen when opened and block the
air intake.
Air intake, see page 174.
Starting the en gine with jump z Use auxiliary battery with sam e v olta ge
leads 3 (12 volts). Its capacity (Ah) m ust not be
considera bly less than that of the
A vehicle with a discharged battery can be
discharged ba ttery. Voltage and
started using jump lead s and the battery of
capacity information can be found on
another vehicle.
the batteries.
9 Warning z Use jump leads with insulated terminals
and a cross section of at least 16 mm2
Be extrem ely careful when starting with (25 mm 2 for diesel engines).
jump leads. Any dev iation from the
z Do not disconnect the discharged
following instructions can lead to injuries battery from the vehicle.
or damage caused by battery explosion
or damage to the elec trical sy stems of z Switch off all unnecessary electrical
both v ehicles. consumers.
z Never ex pose the b attery to nak ed z Do not lean over the ba ttery during jump
flames or spark s. starting.
z A discharged battery can freeze at z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to
temperatures of 0 °C . Defrost the frozen touch those of the other lead .
battery in a warm room before
z The vehicles must not come into contact
connecting jump leads.
with each other during the jump starting
z Do not allow battery fluid to come into process.
contact with eyes, skin, fa bric s or
z Apply hand brak e. Ma nual transmission
painted surfaces. The fluid contains
or Easytronic 3 in neutral, autom atic
sulp huric ac id which can cause injuries
tra nsmission 3 in P.
and d amage in the event of d irect
contact.
z Wear eye protec tion and protective
clothing when handling a b attery.
z Do not connect leads to negative

term inal of discharged battery!
z The connection p oint should be as far
away from the discharged battery as
possible.
z Route the lead s so that they cannot
catch on rotating parts in the engine
compa rtm ent.
z Start the engine of the vehicle providing
the jump start.
z After 5 minutes, start the other engine.
Start attempts should b e m ade at
Pi cture no: 17230t.tif intervals of 1 minute not last longer tha n Picture no: 17231t.tif
Connect the lea ds in the order shown in the 15 second s. Towing
illustration: Towi ng of vehicle
z After starting, allow both engines to idle
1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to for approx. 3 minutes with the leads To open the cover concealing the towing
the positiv e terminal 1 of the battery connected. eye socket at the front right of the v ehicle:
prov iding the jump start (identified by disengag e the cover at the bottom and p ull
z In order to avoid excess v oltage in the it off downwards.
"+" sign on battery case or terminal).
electrical system, before remov ing a
2. Connect the other end of this lea d to the lead, switch on an electrical consum er For versions w ith ty re repair set 3 , the
positive terminal 2 of the discharged (e. g. light, heated rear window) in the towing ey e is in the stowag e compa rtm ent
battery (" +" sign). vehicle receiving the jump start. in the boot below the loading floor cover,
see page 256.
3. Connect the first end of the other jump z Reverse above sequence ex actly when
lead to the negativ e terminal 3 of the rem oving lead s. For versions with spare w heel 3, the towing
battery prov iding the start ("–" sign). eye is in the stowage compartment for the
jack 3 and tool k it 3 below the spare
4. Connect the other end of the second wheel, see pa ge 251.
jump lead 4 to ground on the other
vehicle, e. g. engine block or screw
connection in the engine suspension.
Vehicles with the O pen&Start system 3 Vehicles with automatic tra nsmission 3
must not be towed when the battery is should be towed facing forward only and
discharged because the steering column must not be tow ed faster than 50 mph
lock cannot be relea sed. Towing is only (80 km/h) or further than 60 miles (100 km).
possible with the ignition switched on. Use If the transmission is defective, or if the
jump leads to start the engine if necessary. abov e speed or distance is to be exceeded,
the front ax le m ust be raised off the
Manua l transmission or Easy tronic 3 in
ground.
neutra l, automatic transmission 3 in N .
C ontact a workshop for a ssistance.
Driv e slowly. Do not driv e jerkily. Excessive
tra ctiv e force can dam age the vehicle. O n vehicles with Easytronic 3, if the
automatic c lutch has been released
9 Warning ma nually on a power failure, towing is not
possible, see page 183. In this ca se contact
Pi cture no: 17232t.tif For braking and steering, significa ntly a work shop imm ediately for assistance.
Screw in the towing eye a nticlockwise as far higher forces a re required: b ra ke
as it will go until it stops in a horiz ontal After towing, unscrew the towing eye
assistance and steering a ssistance are
position. clockw ise and refit the cover.
effective only with the engine running.
Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a Towi ng serv ice
tow rod 3 – to the ey e. To prev ent the entry of exhaust fumes from Entrust your vehicle only to the towing
the towing vehic le, switch on the air service of your choice and obtain an
The towing eye must only be used for recirculation 3 and close the windows. estimate on towing costs before employing
towing and not recov ering a vehicle. any tow ing service. In this way y ou avoid
Switch on ignition to release steering unnecessary c osts and possible insurance
column lock and to permit operation of problems during claim processing.
brake lights, horn a nd windscreen w ip er.
Towing another vehicle On some versions 3 : rem ov e the cover S crew in the towing ey e anticlock wise as far
To open the cover concealing the towing concealing the towing ey e at the rear right as it will g o until it stops in a horizontal
eye socket at the rear right of the vehicle: of the vehic le by disengaging the tabs at position.
disengage the cover at the bottom and pull the bottom and pulling off the cover from Attach a tow rop e 3 – or better still a
it off downwards. the top. tow rod 3 – to the ey e.
For versions with tyre repair set 3, the The tow ing eye must only be used for
tow ing eye is in the stowage c om partment towing and not recovering a vehicle.
in the boot below the loading floor cover,
see p age 256. Drive slowly . Do not drive jerkily . Excessive
tractive force c an damage the vehicle.
For versions with spare wheel 3, the towing
eye is in the stowa ge com partment for the After towing, unscrew the towing eye
ja ck 3 and tool kit 3 below the sp are clockw ise and refit the cover.
wheel, see page 251. Version with cover 3: insta ll by inserting
the bottom lugs of the cover 3 in the
bumper, folding and then press the lugs at
the top into place.
Warning triangle ¨ 3, Estat e, Van First-aid kit (cushio n) + 3,
Hat ch, Astra Tw inTop Insert the warning triangle in the retaining Hat ch
Store warning triang le in rear luggage straps of the ta ilg ate inner p anelling. S ecure the first-aid kit to the right luggage
compartment w all: first fit warning triangle compa rtm ent wall using the retaining
into recess on left and the insert in guide on strap.
right.
To rem ov e the warning triangle, lift to the
right and pull out to the right.
For vehicles w ith c argo box 3 : Lift the
warning triangle w ith the right half of the
cargo box . Pull out the w arning triangle to
the right.
Est ate Va n Astra TwinTop
Fasten the first-aid kit (cushion) to the left Plac e first aid kit in stowa ge com partment S tore the first-aid kit (cushion) in the recess
luggage compartment wall with a behind driver’s seat. To open the cov er, behind the strap in the left luggage
retaining strap. press the locking tab. compa rtm ent wall.
Spare wheel 3 St owing w heels wit h wide tyres in the

Some vehicles are equipped with a tyre spare w heel w ell
rep air kit instead of a spare wheel. S ee The spare w heel well is not designed for all
page 256. permitted ty re sizes. If a wheel w id er than
the spare must be stowed in the spare
wheel well after changing wheels, the floor
cover can be placed on the projecting
wheel.
This must b e observ ed w hen loading the
luggage compa rtm ent, esp ecially for the
Astra TwinTop.

Spare w heel pla ced in lugg age
compa rtment
The spare wheel is located in the lugg age
compartment below the floor cov er and is
fa stened with a nut. On Estates, there is
also a spa cer over the retaining nut.
General i nformati on Not es on temp orary sp are wheel 3

Depend ing on version, the spare wheel z Using a temp orary spare w heel may
may be in the form of a temporary spare chang e the driving behaviour of the
wheel 3. Refer to the notes on this pag e vehicle, particularly if using winter
and pages 230, 255, 337. tyres 3 . Replace defective ty re a s quickly
On vehicles with alloy w heels 3 the spare as possible, balance wheel and fit to
wheel may ha ve a steel rim . vehicle.
If you use winter ty res 3, the spare wheel z Fit only one tem pora ry spare wheel.
may still be fitted with a summ er tyre. If you z Do not drive faster than 50 mph
use the spare wheel the vehicle’s handling (80 km /h).
may be a ltered. Ob tain a repla cement for
z Take curv es slow ly .
the faulty tyre as soon a s p ossible, and
ha ve the wheel balanced and fitted to the z Do not use the temporary spare wheel
Pi cture no: 17240t.tif vehicle. for a lengthy p eriod.
Estate
The spare wheel may hav e a sm aller tyre z Replac e temporary spare w heel with full
Take adap ter 3 and hook s 3 from the
and a smaller rim than the wheels m ounted specification wheel without delay.
rails 3 in the lugg age compartment walls.
Raise the rear lashing ey es and lift the floor on the vehicle 1): Using the spa re wheel may z Tyre cha ins are not permitted on the
cover to the vertical position so that it rests alter vehicle handling. Have the defective temporary spare wheel. If ty re chains are
on the roof lining . tyre replaced as soon as p ossible, b alance necessary after a front wheel puncture,
the wheel and hav e it m ounted on the fit the temporary spare wheel to the rear
When closing, guide the lashing eyes vehicle. and a rear wheel to the front. C heck tyre
through the slots in the floor cover.
pressure and adjust if necessary see
Vehicles with cargo box 3: Rem ov al - see page 337.
page 81.
z Follow temporary spare wheel
Astra TwinTop instructions on pages 230, 255, 337.
Accessing the spa re wheel when the roof is
open: Engag e lugga ge com partment cover
on the rear window fram e and activate the
loading aid (see pa ge 82). Raise the floor
cover in the luggage comp artm ent.
1)
Coun try-sp ecific version : T he sp are wheel is
on ly to be u sed a s a temp orary spa re w heel.
Notes on direct ional tyres 3

Directional tyres only provide maxim um
performance when they are mounted in the
correct direction of rota tion. If the tyres or
spare wheel must b e m ounted opposing
the specified d irection of rotation (e. g.
after cha nging a flat tyre), observe the
follow ing:
z Vehicle handling may c hange. Hav e the
defec tiv e ty re replaced as soon as
possible, and have the wheel b alanced
and mounted on the vehicle.
z Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Pict ure no: 17241t.tif Picture no: 17242t.tif
Jack £ 3 and vehic le tools 3 Vehicles with spar e w heel 3
z Be especially careful when driving in rain The ja ck and tool kit are in a stowage
The jack and the v ehicle tools have been
and snow. compa rtm ent in the boot below the sp are
specially d eveloped for y our vehicle and
Further information on directional tyres - must only b e used on that v ehicle. O nly use wheel. Remove spare wheel, see page 249.
see page 224. ja ck for changing wheels. After use, stow away the jack and tools in
On Astra VXR and vehic les with w heelarch the compartment as shown in illustration.
trim s 3 or after-mark et trims, jack s m ay Astra TwinTop: The tools for emergency
not b e used 3. The vehicle may be operation of the convertible hardtop are
damaged. stowed in the glove compartment.
Vehicles wit h tyre repai r set 3
The tool kit and ty re repair set are in a
storage compartment below the floor
cover in the luggage compartment.
Changing wheels z Never change m ore than one w heel at z No people or a nima ls m ay be in the
There may be a tyre repair kit instead of a once. vehicle when it is jack ed up.
spare wheel – see page 256. z Block the wheel diagonally op posite the z Never cra wl und er a ja cked-up vehicle.
To ensure y our safety , ma ke the following wheel to be changed by placing wedge z Do not start or run the engine while the
preparations and observ e the following blocks or equiv alent in front a nd behind vehicle is on the jack.
inform ation w hen changing wheels: the wheel.
z Before inserting the wheel bolts w hen
z Park the vehicle on a level, firm and non- z Use the jack 3 only to change wheels. chang ing wheels, lig htly grease the cone
skid surface. z If the ground on which the vehicle is of each bolt. For this reason, carry some
z Switch on hazard wa rning lights, apply standing is soft, a solid board (max. 1 cm conv entiona l grease.
hand brake, automatic transmission 3 - thick) should be p laced under the ja ck 3.
selector lev er in P, manual transmission Using a thicker b oard c ould dam age the
or Easytronic 3 - engage 1st or reverse jack 3 and the vehicle.
gear.
z Correctly set up the w arning triangle 3.
Warning triangle, see page 247.
z Remove spare wheel from luggage
com partment, see previous page 249.
z Before raising the v ehicle, set the front
wheels to the straight-ahead position.
z On the Astra TwinTop, the roof m ust be
closed before the v ehicle is raised .
1. Prise off the wheel trim using the hook Alloy w heels 3: Disengage the wheel bolt 2. Turn wheel b olts half a turn using the
included with the vehicle tools 3 . For caps with a screwdriver and rem ove. wheel bolt wrench 3 , pushing the
vehicle tools, see pag e 251. Protect the wheel by inserting a soft cloth wrench 3 on a s far a s p ossible.
between the screwd riv er and ally wheel.
For wheel trim s with visible wheel bolts 3:
The trim can remain on the w heel. Do not
remove the retaining washers 3 on the
wheel bolts.
3. The location of each jack ing point 3 is 4. Before positioning the jac k 3, set it to the Atta ch crank to ey e of threa ded rod and
indica ted by a mark on the bottom edge necessary height by rota ting the eye by turn crank to raise vehic le.
of the vehicle. hand. Position the jack 3 at the front or If this is not the ca se, carefully lower the
rea r so that the jack c la w spans the
On Astra VXR a nd vehicles with vehicle immediately and reposition the
vertical base and grips in the recess in
wheelarch trims 3 or a fter-market trim s, jack.
the vertical b ase. Make sure it is properly
ja cks may not b e used 3. The vehicle
positioned. 5. Unscrew w heel bolts and wipe clean with
may b e da maged. a cloth. Then ap ply a lig ht coa ting of
The ja ck base must b e on the ground grease to the wheel bolts. Do not grease
directly below the jack ing point in a the thread of the bolts. Do not put the
manner that prevents it from slipping. wheel bolts d ow n in a location where
they m ay b ecome soiled.
If the wheel b olts have retaining
washers 3, they must not be removed.
10. Before refitting the w heel trim, clean the 13. Have the tightening torque of the wheel
wheel around the retaining clips. Valv e bolts on the new wheel checked on the
sym bol 3 on back of wheel trim must vehicle using a torque wrench as soon
point towards va lv e on wheel. as possib le and , if necessary, corrected.
Tightening torque – see page 337.
Align and refit wheel trim or wheel bolt
ca ps 3. 14. Replace the faulty tyre on the wheel
that was rem oved.
Alloy wheels 3 : Align and refit w heel
bolt c aps 3. 15. Replace temporary spare wheel 3 with
a full specification wheel without delay .
11. S tow replaced wheel, tools and warning
triangle 3 in luggage comp artm ent, 16. Initialise the d eflation detection
see pag es 247 to 251. system 3 or tyre pressure monitoring
system 3 – see pag es 217, 220.
12. C heck the tyre pressure of the newly
Pi cture no: 17249t.tif fitted wheel. Adjust as necessary.
6. Change the wheel. N otes on spare
wheel – see page 249, notes on
temporary spare wheel – see page 250.
7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slig htly,
inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far
as possible.
8. Lower vehicle.
9. Tighten wheel bolts crossw ise, putting on
wheel bolt wrench 3 as fa r as possible.
Tyre repair kit 3

Minor damag e to the tyre tread or side
wall, e.g. from foreign bodies, can be
rep aired using the tyre repa ir kit (does not
apply to run-flat ty res).
Do not rem ov e the foreign body from the
tyre.
Tyre d amage exceeding 4 mm or that is on
the rim cannot be repaired with the ty re
rep air kit.
9 Warning
Vehicles with insufficient or no tyre Pict ure no: 17250t.tif Picture no: 17251t.tif
The tyre repa ir kit is in a compartm ent 3. Remov e the electrical connection cable
pressure can lead to invisible d amage to under the floor cover luggage and air hose from the stowage
the tyre. This dam age cannot be rep aired
compartment. compartments on the underside of the
with the tyre repair kit. Park the vehicle compressor.
and conta ct a workshop for assistanc e. 1. Take the pouch w ith the tyre repair k it
from the compartment. C arefully remove
Imp ortant information – see page 259. the components from the pouch.
In the event of a flat tyre: 2. Remove the comp ressor.
z Switch on hazard wa rning lights, apply
hand brake, automatic transmission 3 -
selector lev er in P, manual transmission
or Easytronic 3 - engage 1st or reverse
gear.
z Correctly set up the w arning triangle 3,
warning triangle, see page 247.
4. Screw the compressor air hose to the 7. Sc rew the filler hose to the ty re v alve. 10. Set the rocker switch on the com pressor
connection on the sealant bottle. to I. The tyre is filled with sea lant.
8. The switch on the compressor m ust be
5. Fit the sealant bottle into the retainer on set to §. 11. While the sealant bottle drains (a pprox.
the compressor. 30 seconds) the pressure ind icator on
9. C onnec t the compressor plug to the
the com pressor briefly points to 6 b ar.
Set the compressor near the ty re in such accessory socket or cigarette lighter
Pressure then sink s a gain.
a way tha t the sealant b ottle is up rig ht. socket. Accessory socket – see page 107.
12. All of the sea la nt is pump ed into the
6. Remove the v alve cap from the defective To avoid discharging the battery , we
tyre. Afterwards, the tyre is filled with
ty re. rec om mend running the engine.
air.
13. The presc rib ed ty re pressure – see
page 337 should be reached within
10 m inutes. Switch off the com pressor
when the correct pressure is obtained.
Drain excess tyre pressure with the

button over the pressure indicator.
Do not run the com pressor for more
than 10 minutes - see "Imp ortant
information" on page 259.
14. Detach the ty re repair kit. Screw the
filler hose to the free connection on the
sea lant bottle. This prev ents sealant
leakage. S tow the ty re repair kit in the
luggag e com partment.
15. Wipe away any sea la nt spill with a
cloth.
Pi cture no: 17255t.tif 16. Disassemble the warning triangle 3 Picture no: 17256t.tif
If the specified ty re pressure is not and store in luggage com partment, see If tyre pressure is more tha n 1.3 ba r,
reached within 10 m inutes, remove the pa ge 247. adjust to the prescribed va lue. Repea t
tyre rep air kit. Move the vehicle through the p rocedure until there is no more
17. The enclosed sticker shows the
one tyre rotation, approx. 2 metres, in pressure loss.
m aximum permitted speed at which the
either direction. Reconnect the ty re
ty re repair m ay be used. App ly sticker in If the tyre p ressure ha s fallen below
repair k it and continue the filling
the driver’ s field of vision. 1.3 bar, the vehicle may no long er be
process for 10 minutes. If the specified used. C onta ct a workshop.
tyre pressure is still not rea ched, the ty re 18. C ontinue driving immediately to allow
is too badly damaged. Park the vehicle the sealant to distrib ute evenly 19. Stow the tyre repair k it in the luggage
and contact a work shop. throughout the tyre. Stop after approx. compartment – see pag e 256.
6 miles / 10 km (no m ore than 10
m inutes) a nd check tyre pressure. Screw
the compressor air hose directly onto
the tyre valve (see Fig. 17256 T).
Im portant The sealant can only be stored for approx. Electrical system
4 years. After this time, the sealing
9 Warning prop erties can no longer be gua ra nteed. 9 Warnin g
Heed the exp iration date on the sealant
Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph bottle. Electronic ignition system s generate very
(80 km/h). hig h voltages. Do not touch the ignition
The sealant bottle can only be used once.
sy stem; high voltage can b e fatal.
Do not use the temporary spare wheel for Replace a used sealant bottle.
a lengthy period.
The compressor and seala nt c an be used Fuses
Steerability and d riv ing behav iour m ay from approx. -30 °C . The vehic le ha s two fuse boxes: one behind
be im paired. a cover on the left side of the luggage
Dispose of a used tyre repa ir kit in
compa rtm ent and one in the front left of
accordance with applicable legislation.
The d riv ing comfort of the rep aired ty re is the engine com partment.
severely affected, therefore have this ty re The adap ters supplied 3 can be used to
rep la ced. inflate other item s e.g. footba lls, a ir 6
mattresses, infla ta ble d inghies etc.
If the compressor makes abnorm al noises
or heats up greatly, switch it off for at least They are located on the underside of the
30 minutes. compressor. To remove, screw on
compressor air hose and withdraw
The integrated safety valv e opens a t a
adapter.
pressure of 7 bar.
When using the ty re repair set, no
Protect the compressor from m oisture and
consumers ma y be connected to the front
rain.
accessory soc ket.
We recommend c arry ing a complete set of Different versions of fuses are used.
fuses. Fuse, Fuse,
Fuse, Fuse, colour rating
Put sp are fuses in the provided location in
colour rating Blue 20 A
the fuse box in the lug gage compartment.
O pen cover, see pag e 262. Brownish y ellow 5A Tra nsparent 25 A
Brown 7.5 A Pink 30 A
Before replac ing a fuse, turn off the
respective switch and the ignition. Red 10 A Green 40 A
Blue 15 A
A blown fuse (see figures to the right) can
be recognised by its melted w ire. Do not Y ellow 20 A
install a new fuse until the cause of the Transp arent 25 A
fault has been remedied . Green 30 A
Pi cture no: 17258t.tif Pict ure no: 18449t.tif Picture no:

There is a fuse ex tractor in the luggage Plac e the fuse ex trac tor on the various O nly fit fuses of the sp ecified current
compartment fuse box to fac ilitate types of fuse from the top or sid e, and rating. Each fuse has its current rating
rep la cement of fuses - see figure a bove for withdra w fuse. written on it, in addition the ratings are
an example. colour coded .
Fuses and the m ost importan t

circuits they protect
Fuse box in lugg age comp artment
Dep ending on the equipment version,
there are two different fuse box es in the
luggage compartment for differing
electrical circuits.
z Version A – see figure 18504 T,
z Version B – see figure 17958 T
Astra TwinTop always has version B.
Spa re fuses, fuse extrac tor – see p age 259.
The fuse b ox is located on the left side of
the luggage compartment b ehind a cover. Pict ure no: 17261t.tif Picture no: 18022t.tif
5-door Ha tc h, Estate, Va n Astra TwinTop
Do not store any objects behind the cover. To open, turn both catc hes with a coin and To open, pull the two knob s, remove the
fold cover d ow n. clips and fold the cover upwards.
3-door Ha tc h
To op en, fold the cover up wards.
Fuse box, version B No. Circuit Rating

Some functions are protected by sev eral
fuses. 13 Pa rk ing distance sensor 5A
14 Heating, air conditioning 7.5
No. Ci rcuit Rat ing
sy stem
1 Electric windows, front 25 A
15 – –
2 – –
16 Sea t occupancy rec og nition, 5 A
3 Instruments 7.5 A Open&S tart sy stem
4 Heating , air conditioning 5A 17 Rain sensor, a ir quality 5A
system, climate control sensor, ty re pressure
system monitoring system, interior
5 Airbags 7.5 A mirror
Pi cture no: 18504t.tif 6 – – 18 Instruments, switches 5A

Fuse box, version A 7 – – 19 – –
Some functions are protected by severa l
8 – – 20 CDC 10 A
fuses. To replace a fuse, pull off its
protective cap . 9 – – 21 heated ex terior mirrors 7.5 A
10 – – 22 Sun roof 20 A
No. Cir cuit Rati ng
11 Heated rear window 25 A 23 Electric windows, rear 25 A
1 Fog lights 15 A
12 Rear sc reen w iper 15 A
2 – –
3 Lugg age compartment 15 A
soc ket
4 Reverse lights 7.5 A
5 Electric windows, rea r 30 A
6 Air conditioning system 10 A
7 Electric windows, front 30 A
8 Heated exterior mirrors 7.5 A
No. Circuit Rating

38 Central lock ing sy stem, 25 A
terminal 30
39 Sea t heater (left) 15 A
40 Sea t heater (right) 15 A
41 – –
42 – –
43 – –
44 – –

No. Cir cuit Rati ng No. Ci rcuit Rat ing
24 Diagnostics plug 7.5 A 32 – –
25 – – 33 O pen&Start system 15 A
26 Electrically retractable 7.5 A 34 Sun roof, TwinTop 25 A
ex terior mirrors 35 Rear sock et 15 A
27 Ultrasonic sensor, 5A 36 Towing equipm ent 20 A
Vaux hall alarm system
37 – –
28 – –
29 Ciga rette lighter, front 15 A
sock et
30 Rea r sock et 15 A
31 – –
Depend ing on the equip ment version, Fuse la yout, v ersi on A

there are two different fuse lay outs for the S om e functions are protected by several
engine c om partment fuse box , handling fuses.
different electrical circuits:
z If the lug gage compartment fuse box is No. Ci rcuit Rat ing
version A - see Fig. 18504 T on 1 ABS 20 A
page 263 - the fuse layout in the engine 2 ABS 30 A
compa rtm ent is version A - see next
3 Interior fan clima te control 30 A
column.
system
z If the lug gage compartment fuse box is 4 Interior fan, heating, air 30 A
version B - see Fig. 17958 T on
conditioning system
page 264 - the fuse layout in the engine
compa rtm ent is version B - see nex t 5 Radiator fan 1 1 ) 30 A
page. 40 A
Fuse box in engine compa rtment Astra TwinTop alway s ha s v ersion B.
The fuse b ox is at the front left side of the
engine compartment. Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 259.
9 Warning
Turn off engine before opening engine
com partment fuse box ; risk of injury – see
page 297.
To open the cover, release the catch by

inserting a screwdriver into the op ening as
far as it w ill go and swivelling it to the side.
O pen the cover upw ards and remov e.
1) Different ratings depending on

engine and equipm ent lev el.
No. Ci rcuit Rat ing

21 Engine electronics 20 A
22 Engine electronics 7.5 A
23 Headlight range adjustment 5 A
24 Fuel pump 15 A
25 – –
27 Heating, air conditioning 7.5 A
system, air quality sensor
28 – –
Pi cture no: 17264t.tif Picture no: 29 Power steering 5A
No. C ircuit R ating No. Circuit R ating 30 Engine electronics 10 A
6 R adiator fan 21 ) 20 A 14 Windscreen wiper 30 A 31 Rear screen wiper 15 A
30 A 15 Windscreen wiper 30 A 32 Brake light switch 5A
40 A
16 Horn, ABS, 5A 33 Headlight range 5A
7 C entral locking system 20 A brake lig ht switch, adjustment, light switch,
8 Windscreen wash system , 10 A air cond itioning system clutch switch, instrument
tailga te 17 Diesel filter or a ir 25 A assembly , driver’s door
9 H eated rea r window, 30 A conditioning system 20 A module
heated exterior mirrors 18 Starter 25 A 34 C ontrol unit, steering column 7.5 A
10 Diag nostics plug 7.5 A module
19 – –
11 I nstruments 7.5 A 35 Infotainm ent system 20 A
20 Horn 15 A
12 M ob ile telephone, digital 7.5 A 36 C ig arette lighter, front 15 A
rad io, Twin Audio, display socket
13 C ourtesy light 5A

engine a nd equipment lev el.
Fuse layout, v ersion B No. Circuit R ating No. Circuit Rating

Some functions are protected by severa l
fuses. 7 Windscreen wash sy stem 10 A 16 Electronics control units, 5A
8 Horn 15 A Open&S tart sy stem, ABS ,
No. Cir cuit Rati ng brake light switch, Tw inTop
9 Headlight w ash system 25 A
1 ABS 20 A 17 Diesel filter heating 25 A
10 – –
2 ABS 30 A 18 Starter 25 A
11 – –
3 Interior fan climate control 30 A 19 Tra nsmission electronics 30 A
system 12 – –
20 Air conditioning system 10 A
4 Interior fan, heating, air 30 A 13 Fog lights 15 A
conditioning system 14 Windscreen wiper 30 A
22 Engine electronics 7.5 A
5 Radiator fan 1 1) 30 A 15 Windscreen wiper 30 A
40 A 23 Adaptive Forward Lighting, 10 A
6 Radiator fan 2 1) headlight range adjustment
20 A
30 A
40 A

engine a nd equipment lev el.

No. C ircuit R ating No. Circuit R ating
24 Fuel p um p 15 A 31 Ad aptive Forward Lighting, 10 A
25 Transmission electronics 15 A headlight range adjustment
26 Engine electronics 10 A 32 Bra ke system , 5A
air cond itioning system,
27 Power steering 5A clutch switch
28 Transmission electronics 5A 33 Ad aptive Forward Lighting, 5 A
29 Transmission electronics 7.5 A headlight range adjustm ent,
30 Engine electronics 10 A lig ht switch
34 Control unit, 7.5 A
steering column module
35 Infotainment system 20 A
36 Mobile telephone, digital 7.5 A
ra dio, Twin Audio, display
Bulb replacement
Before replacing a bulb , switch ignition off
and switch relevant switch off.
O nly hold new b ulb at base! Do not touc h
the b ulb glass with b are hands, otherwise
fingerprints on the glass evap orate.
Residue builds up on the reflector
eventually resulting in a dull reflector.
Inadvertently stained bulbs may b e
cleaned with a clean lint-free cloth, using
alcohol or white spirits.
The replacement bulb must be in
accordance with the d ata on the ba se of
the defective bulb . Do not ex ceed wattage
given on bulb base.
The bulbs of the front outer lights are Halogen headlight system
replaced throug h op enings in the front Headlights with separate sy stems for main
wheel arches: turn relevant wheels to gain beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipp ed beam 2
access, release ca tch and rem ov e c ov er. (outer bulbs).
Hea dlight aiming
We recommend tha t headlight a djustment
be c arried out by a workshop, who will
ha ve special equip ment.
On hea dlight adjustment, the m anua l
headlight range a djustment 3 must b e set
to 0.
Dipp ed beam 3. Rotate left bulb holder and disengage. 4. Remov e the bulb holder w ith b ulb from
the reflector.
1. Replace bulb through the opening in the
front wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to
gain access, release catch and rem ove
cov er – see page 269.
2. Remove hea dlight protective cover.
5. Detach b ulb from bulb holder. Main beam 5. Disengage sp ring clip from retainer by
pressing forwa rd and then swing
6. Insert new bulb into bulb holder, 1. O pen bonnet and engag e support.
downward.
without touching the gla ss. 2. Replace bulbs from engine
6. Remove bulb from reflector housing.
7. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on com partment out.
the bulb holder engage in the recesses 7. When fitting a new bulb, eng age the
To replace the bulb on the right-hand
in the reflector. lugs in the rec esses on the reflector
side, rem ov e the air hose from the air
without touching the g lass.
8. Rotate b ulb holder to right as far as it filter.
will go. To replace the bulb on the left-hand
9. Place headlight protective cover in side, rem ov e the plug from the fuse
position and close. box .
10. Position cover on opening in wheel arch 3. Remove head lig ht p rotective cover.
and enga ge. 4. Detach plug connector from bulb.
8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector

onto b ulb.
9. Place headlight protective cover in
position and close.
After bulb replacem ent on the
right-hand side, re-attach air hose to air
filter and engage.
After bulb replacem ent on the left-
hand side, reconnect the fuse box p lug
and enga ge.

Pa rking lights 4. Remov e pa rk ing light socket from
reflector.
1. O pen bonnet and engag e support.
2. Replace bulbs from engine compa rtm ent
out.
To rep lace the bulb on the rig ht-hand
side, remove the air hose from the air
filter.
To rep lace the bulb on the left-ha nd
side, remove the plug from the fuse box.
3. Remove main beam head lig ht protective
cover.
5. Remove bulb from socket. Xenon headlight system 3, Ma in beam
6. Insert new bulb, without touching the Adaptive Forward Lighting 1. Replac e bulb through the opening in the
glass. system 3 front wheel arch: turn relevant w heel to
Head lig hts with separate systems for gain access, release catch and remove
7. Insert holder in reflector. Place headlight
dipped bea m 1 (inner bulbs) and main cover – see page 269.
protective cap in position and close.
beam 2 (outer bulbs). 2. Remov e headlight protective cover.
After bulb rep la cement on the right-
hand side, re-attach air hose to air filter Di pped beam
and engage.
9 Warning
After bulb replacement on the left-ha nd
side, reconnect the fuse box plug and Dipped beam w orks with a very high
engage. electrical voltage. Do not touch, risk of
injury . H ave a workshop replac e the b ulb.
3. Rotate left bulb hold er and d iseng age. 4. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from 5. Detac h bulb from bulb holder.
the reflector. 6. Insert new bulb into bulb holder,
without touching the g lass.
7. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on
the b ulb holder enga ge in the recesses
in the reflector.
8. Rotate bulb hold er to right as far as it
will go.
9. Place headlight protec tiv e cov er in
position and close.
10. Position c ov er on opening in wheel arch
and engage.
Park ing light s 4. Remove parking light socket from 5. Remov e bulb from socket.
reflector.
1. Open bonnet and engage support. 6. Insert new b ulb, without touching the
glass.
2. Replace bulb through the opening in the
front wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to 7. Insert holder in reflector. Place headlight
gain access, release catch and rem ove protective cap in p osition and close.
cov er – see page 269. 8. Position cover on opening in wheel arch
3. Remove m ain beam headlight protec tiv e and enga ge.
cov er.
6. Insert bulb holder in reflector, rotate

clockwise and engage in position.
7. Position cover on opening in wheel arch
and enga ge.
Side turn signal lights

Hav e the bulb changed by a workshop .
Fog lights 3

Fro nt turn signal lights 4. Push bulb into socket slightly, rotate left
1. Open bonnet and engage support. and remove.
2. Replace bulb through the opening in the 5. Insert new bulb, without touc hing the
front wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to glass.
gain access, release catch and rem ove
cov er – see page 269.
3. Rotate bulb holder to left and
diseng age.
Tail lights 2. Deta ch plug connector from bulb holder. 4. Detach bulb housing tow ards the rea r.
Hat ch 5-d oor 3. Hold outside of b ulb housing, loosen
1. To replace bulbs on the right side, use a fastening nuts with wheel bolt wrench 3
coin to open the lock as indica ted in the and unscrew b y hand. Wheel bolt
Fig. and fold the cov er down. wrench 3 – see v ehicle tools on
To replace bulbs on the left side, use a page 251.
coin to turn both locks as illustrated on
page 262 in Fig. 17261 T and fold the
cov er d own.
6. Remov e bulb from socket.

7. Insert new b ulb, without touching the
glass.
8. Engage bulb holder in bulb housing,
ensuring that it properly engages. Insert
three screws w ith washers and tighten a s
far as possible.

5. Unscrew three screws using a screw driver Bulbs in bulb holder:
(v ehicle tools – see pa ge 251). Press 1 = Reversing light
lock ing tabs on outside of bulb hold er
inward and rem ove the bulb holder. 2 = Turn signal
3 = Tail light/b ra ke lig ht
4 = Tail light
5 = Fog tail light
11. Carry out the follow ing steps to ensure

proper function of the tail lights:
– S witch on ignition
– O perate brak e
– S witch on parking lights

9. Ensure tha t the seals are applied to the 10. I nsert the bulb housing in the body,
bulb holder a nd fix ing sc rews. engaging the lug and the ball pin in the
recesses. Tighten the fastening nuts
using a wheel bolt wrench 3. Attach the
plug connector. Close a nd engage the
flap.
Hat ch 3-d oor 2. Deta ch plug connector from bulb holder. 4. Detach bulb housing tow ards the rea r.
1. To replace bulbs, fold the c ov er down. 3. Hold outside of b ulb housing, loosen
fastening nuts with wheel bolt wrench 3
and unscrew b y hand. Wheel bolt
wrench 3 – see v ehicle tools on
page 251.

7. Insert new b ulb, without touching the
glass.
8. Engage bulb holder in bulb housing,
ensuring that it p roperly engages.

5. Remove the round sea l from the Bulbs in bulb holder:
fastening bolt. Press the loc king tabs on 1 = Reversing light
the outside of the bulb holder outward
and remov e the bulb holder. 2 = Turn signal
3 = Tail light/b ra ke lig ht
4 = Tail light
5 = Fog tail light
11. Carry out the follow ing steps to ensure

– S witch on ignition
– O perate brak e
– S witch on parking lights

9. Ensure tha t the seals are applied to the 10. I nsert the bulb housing in the body,
bulb holder a nd fix ing sc rews. engaging the lug and the ball pin in the
recesses. Tighten the fastening nuts
using a wheel bolt wrench 3. Attach the
plug connector. Close a nd engage the
flap.
Est ate, Van 2. Deta ch plug connector from bulb holder. 4. Unscrew the three screws with a
1. Disenga ge c ov er by pressing retaining screwdriver (vehicle tools – see
3. Hold the outside of the bulb housing,
lugs and remove. page 251) and remove the bulb holder.
unscrew the three fastening nuts and
rem ove the bulb housing rearwards.
6. Insert new bulb without touching the

glass. Insert bulb holder in bulb housing
and screw in place. Insert bulb housing
into body and tighten fastening nuts by
hand. Attach plug connector. Close and
lock c ov er.
7. C arry out the following steps to ensure
– Switch on ignition
– Op erate brake
– Switch on park ing lights

Bulbs in bulb holder: Astra TwinTop
1. Unscrew retaining nuts.
1 = Ta il light/brake light
2 = Turn Sig nal
3 = Reversing light
4 = Fog tail lig ht
5. Remove bulb from socket.
2. Remove bulb housing from outside. 4. Disengage soc kets by turning and Bulb s in b ulb holder:
Disenga ge plug by pressing on flap a nd rem ove. Press lock ing tabs on the long 1 = Tail light/brake light
remove from bulb holder. sides of the bulb holder outwards; lift
bulb holder at front end (arrow) and 2 = Tail light
3. Detach seal from bulb hold er.
rem ove. 3 = Fog ta il light
4 = Rev ersing lig ht
5 = Turn signal
5. Remove bulb from socket.

6. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
7. Insert bulb hold er in bulb housing b y first
inserting the lug at the front of the plug.
Fold together bulb hold er, ensuring tha t
it engages properly. Insert sock ets and
engage by turning.

8. Fit seal on bulb holder as illustrated . Number plate ligh t
Ensure that the seal is flat in the area of 1. Insert screw driver vertically in b ulb insert
the sc rews. as illustrated in figure. Press to the side
9. Engage plug. Insert light housing in and release spring.
bod y, ensuring proper positioning of
the ba ll pins in the recesses. Tig hten the
retaining nuts.
10. C arry out the following steps to ensure
– Switch on ignition
– Op erate brake
– Switch on park ing lights
2. Remove bulb housing d ownwa rd , taking 4. Rotate bulb soc ket a nticlockwise and Courtesy lights
care not to pull on the cable. disengage. Front courtesy l ight, read ing light s 3
3. Lift flap and disconnect plug from bulb 5. Remove bulb from socket. To ensure that no power is supp lied to the
socket. lights, close the doors before removing.
6. Insert new bulb, without touc hing the
glass. 1. Diseng age lens by hand a t location
illustrated in figure, press it downward
7. Insert bulb holder in bulb housing and
slightly a nd remove at a downward
twist to right. angle.
8. C onnec t plug to bulb socket.
9. Insert and engage bulb housing. 3. Insert new b ulb, without touching the
glass.
4. Mount lens a nd engage in position.
Rear court esy lights 3, rea r reading

lig ht s 3
Hav e the bulb changed by a workshop.

Glove comp artm ent l ighting, luggag e 2. Press b ulb slightly towards spring clip
compa rtment li ghting, foot well lighting 3 and rem ov e.
To ensure that no power is supplied to the 3. Insert new b ulb, without touching the
lig hts, close the doors or hold the contact glass.
switch depressed before removing.
4. Insert light in opening and engage in
1. Prise the lig ht out with a screwdriver. position.
I nstrum ent illumi na tion, I nform ation
di sp lay illumina tion 3
Vehicle care Vehicle ca re a ids 3 Washing

When caring for your vehicle, observe all Vehicle wash: The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to
nationa l environmental regulations, z Wash brush env ironmental influenc es, e.g. c ontinuous
particularly when washing it. z Sham poo changes in w eather conditions, industrial
z Sp onge waste gases and dust or thawing salts, so
Regula r, thorough care helps to imp rov e z Insect Removal Sponge wash a nd wax your vehicle regularly . When
the a ppearance of your vehicle and z C ham ois using autom atic car wa shes, select a
maintain its value ov er the years. It is also programm e w hich includes w axing.
prerequisite for warranty claim s for any Vehicle care:
paint or corrosion dam age. The following z Paintwork Cleaner Bird d ropp ings, dead insec ts, resin, pollen
pages contain tip s for vehicle care which, if z Paintwork Polish and the like should be cleaned off
used properly, w ill help comba t the z C ream Polish imm ediately, a s they contain aggressive
unavoidable, dam aging effects of the z Metallic Paintw ork Wax constituents which can ca use paint
env ironment. z Hard wax dam age.
z Vauxhall Touc h-up Paint If using a car wash, comply with the
z Vauxhall Touc h-Up /Aerosol Paint pertinent instructions of the car wash
z Wheel Preserver ma nufacturer. The windscreen wiper a nd
z Insect Remover rear sc reen w iper m ust be switched off –
z Window Cleaner see pages 12, 13. Remove antenna 3 and
z Vauxhall Wind screen Wash Solvent roof rack 3 . Stand on the door sill to reach
z Silicone Oil for Rubber Seals them more easily.
z C leaner
If y ou wash your vehicle by hand, make
sure that the insides of the wings are also
thoroughly rinsed out.
Clean edges and folds on opened doors Pol ishi ng Paintw ork d amag e
and flaps as well as the areas they cover. Polishing is necessa ry only if the paint has Repair minor paintwork da mage such as
become dull or if solid deposits have stone chips, scratches etc. immediately
Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the
become attached to it. using the Vauxhall touch-up paint or
vehic le. R inse leather frequently. Use
Vauxhall a erosol sp ra y before rust form s. If
separate lea thers for pa int a nd window Pa intwork polish with silic one form s a
rust has already formed, have a workshop
surfaces: remnants of wa x on the windows protective film , ma king waxing
elimina te the cause. Also check the
will impa ir vision. unnec essary .
surfac es and edges facing the road surface
O bserve na tional regulations. Plastic body parts should not be treated on which rust may hav e develop ed
with wax a nd polish. unnoticed for some tim e.
Waxing
Wax y our vehicle regularly, in particula r Use Metallic Paintw ork Wa x on vehic les Exterior lights
after it ha s b een washed using shampoo with a metallic-effect paint finish. Headlight and other protectiv e light bezels
and at the latest when water no longer are made of plastic. If they require
Sun roof 3
forms bead s on the paintwork, otherwise add itional cleaning after the vehicle has
Nev er clean with solv ents or abrasive
the p aintwork will dry out. been wa shed , clean them w ith C ar
agents, fuels, aggressive m edia (e.g. pa int
Also wax edges and folds on opened doors cleaner, acetone-conta ining solutions etc .), S ham poo. Do not use any a brasiv e or
and flaps as well as the areas they cover. acidic or highly alkaline media or a brasiv e caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper,
pads. and d o not clean them dry.
No stickers ma y be app lied to the sun roof.

Wheels
Use a p H-neutral wheel clea ning a gent to
clean the wheels.
Wheels are painted a nd can be treated
with the sam e agents as the body . For a lloy
wheels we recommend use of Alloy Wheel
Preserver.
Plastic and rubb er p arts Open Velcro fasteners on clothing c ould Windscreen wiper b lades
For additiona l cleaning of plastic and damage seat upholstery. Ma ke sure Velcro Wax, such as that used in car w ashes, can
rubber parts use Cleaner. Do not use any fa steners are closed. cause strea ks to form on the windscreen
other agent, and in p articular d o not use when the wiper is used.
Seat belts
solv ents or petrol. Alw ays keep seat belts clean and dry. S mearing wiper blades c an be cleaned with
Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. a soft cloth and Vauxhall Wind screen
Clea n only with luk ewarm water or C leaner.
Wash Solvent, and rep la ced if necessary –
Wheels and tyres Wi nd ows see page 303.
Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. When cleaning the heated rear w indow,
Locks
Interior and upholstery make sure that the hea ting element on the
The locks are factory-lubricated with a hig h
Clean the v ehicle interior, includ ing the inside of the window is not dama ged.
quality lock cylinder grease. This p revents
instrument panel fascia, using interior Use a soft lint-free c loth or cham ois leather the lock s from freezing. O nly use de-icer in
cleaner. in conjunction with Window C leaner and urgent c ases as this destroys the grease
The instrum ent panel should only be Insect Rem over. and d amages the func tion of the loc ks.
cleaned using a soft damp cloth. After using de-ic er, hav e a workshop
Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent is
Clean fabric upholstery with a vacuum suitable for de-icing windows. re-grease the locks.
cleaner and b rush. To rem ove stains, use For mechanical rem oval of ice, use a
cleaner that is suita ble for both fab ric s and commerc ia lly availab le sharp-edg ed ice
vinyl. scraper. Press the scraper firmly ag ainst
Do not use cleaning agents such a s the glass so that no dirt c an get under it
acetone, tetrachloride, p aint thinner, paint and scra tch the glass.
rem ov er, na il varnish remover, washing
powder or bleach. Petrol is also unsuitable.
Eng ine compar tment Engine washing also removes subseq uently Underbod y
Areas of the engine compartment that are applied protective wax . Therefore after Y our v ehicle ha s a factory -applied PVC
painted in the same colour as the vehic le washing, hav e a workshop protect the undercoating in the wheel arches
must be looked after lik e any other p ainted engine, parts of the braking system in the (including the longitudinal members) whic h
surface. engine b ay, axle elements with steering, provides perma nent protection and needs
body elements and cavities, thoroughly no special maintenance. The surfa ces of
It is adv isable to wash the engine
with protective wax. the v ehicle underb od y not cov ered by PVC
compartment before and after winter and
are provided with a durable protective wax
preserve it with wax. Cover alternator and An engine w ash ca n be p erformed in the
coating in critical a reas.
brake fluid reserv oir with plastic sheets spring in order to remov e dirt that has
before washing the eng ine. adhered to the engine comp artment, O n vehicles w hich are washed frequently in
whic h may also have a high salt content. automatic c ar washes with underbody
When washing the engine with a steam-jet
Check protectiv e w ax la yer and ma ke good washing facility, the protective wax
cleaner, do not d irect the steam jet at
if necessary. coating may be im paired by dirt-dissolving
components of the anti-lock b ra ke system,
add itiv es.
the a ir cond itioning system, the climate Do not use high-pressure jet clea ners.
control sy stem or the b elt drive and its
components.
Check the underbody after washing and Ast ra TwinTop

have it wax ed if necessary. Before the start Treat all seals, e. g. on the roof and
of the cold weather season, check the PVC wind screen frame, with silicone oil from
coating and protectiv e w ax coating. H ave tim e to tim e. Good contact between the
them restored to perfect condition if fine rubber lips and the sealing surfa ces
necessary. prevents leaks and reduces clamp ing
forces.
Ca ution - com mercially available bitumen/
rubber materials can d amage the PVC Intermediate roof position for cleaning -
coating. We recomm end that y ou hav e see p age 58.
underbody work carried out by a Do not use high-pressure jet clea ners.
workshop, who knows the prescribed
materials and has exp erience in the use
thereof.
The underbody should be washed
follow ing the end of the cold w eather
season to remove any dirt adhering to the
underbody since this may also contain salt.
Check protectiv e w ax coating a nd, if
necessary, have it restored to p erfect
condition.
294 Service, Maintenance
Service, Maintenance In our experience the most common cause large investment in his business a nd is
.t fi
of all complaints is the result of proud of his reputation and

misunderstanding or lack of professionalism and fully realises that
communication betw een the customer a nd satisfied customers are his key to success.
the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. In the unlikely event that you are still not
We sincerely hope y ou will never have happy with the answer your Vaux hall
cause to complain ab out y our vehicle. Authorised Repa irer has given, or the
However, if things do go wrong, the best action he proposes to c orrect the problem ,
course of action for y ou to ta ke is to y ou m ay contact the Custom er C are
contact your Vaux hall Authorised Department 1 ) where a team of C ustomer
Repairer’s Serv ice Reception S taff and C are C onsultants will spare no effort to
exp la in the difficulty you are having. We ensure y our complete satisfaction.
are confident they will d o their utmost to Vauxhall Motor s Ltd.
resolv e the problem to your complete C ustomer Care,
satisfaction. Griffin House,
Inspection system .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 296 Sometim es, howev er, despite the best of O sborne Road,
Genuine Vauxhall Parts and intentions of all concerned, LUTON ,
Accessories ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 297 misunderstandings can occur. If y our Beds. , LU1 3Y T
A note on safety .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 297 prob lem has not been resolved to y our Telephone: 0845 090 2044
Checking and topping up fluids ... ..... . 298 satisfaction, please make an appointment They w ill review all the facts involved. Then
to discuss the matter with the M ana ger of
Engine oil . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 298 if it is felt some further action can be tak en,
the department c oncerned.
Diesel fuel filter .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 300 the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will b e
Coolant .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 300 The majority of areas of concern can be adv ised accordingly. In any case, y our
Brake fluid ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 302 quic kly resolved in this way. contact will b e ac knowledged confirm ing
Vauxhall Motors’ position in the m atter.
Wind screen wiper .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 303 Should you wish to pursue the matter
Wind screen and headlight wash further, the Principal of the Vauxhall If y ou are not satisfied with the outcome,
sy stems 3.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 305 Authorised Repairer should be made y ou ca n if you wish, seek advice from an
Battery ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 306 aware of your concern. It is ad visab le in independent third p arty suc h as:
cases such as this to write to him to confirm
Protecting electronic components .... . 306 Autom obile Association (A. A. )
your problem and the solutions that have
Vehicle decomm issioning. ..... .... .... ..... . 307 Fanum House,
been offered.
Vehicle recommissioning.. ..... .... .... ..... . 307 BASI NGSTO KE,
You can be assured the Authorised Hants., R G21 2EA
Repairer’s Principal w ill only be too anxious
to fully inv estigate y our prob lems and
correct any errors m ade. After a ll, he has a 1)
Ca lls may b e mon itored a nd record ed for
training purpo ses.
Servic e, Mainten ance 295
Royal Autom obile Club (R.A.C. ), General Motors Belgium N.V. General Motors Hellas S. A.
R.A.C . Motoring Services Ltd., Noorderlaan 401 – Haven 500 56 Kifisia s Av enue & Delfon str.
89-91 Pall Mall, 2030 Antw erp – Belgium Amarousion
LON DO N, SW1Y S 45 Telep hone 00 32-34 50 63 29 151 25 Athens – Greece
General Motors Southeast Europe, Tel 00 30-1-6 80 65 01
The C ustomer Rela tions Depa rtm ent,
Soci ety of Motor Manufacturers and org. slož ka General Motors Southeast Europe Ltd.
Traders Ltd. (S .M.M. T. ), Olbrachtova 9 S zabadsag utca 117
Forbes House, Ha lk in Street, 140 00 Prague – C zech Republ ic 2040 Budaörs – H ung ary
LON DO N, SW1X 7DS Tel. 00 420-2 39 004 321 Tel. 00 36-23 446 100
Customer C omplaints Serv ice, General Motors Denm ark General Motors India
Scot tish Motor Trad e A ssocia tion, Jaegersborg Alle 4 S ix th Floor, Tower A
(S.M .T.A.), 2920 C harlottenlund – Denm ark Global Business Park
3 Palmerston Place, Telep hone 00 45-39 97 85 00 Mehra uli – Gurgaon Road
EDI NBURGH, EH12 5AQ Gurga on – 122 022, Har yana – India
Vauxhall M otors Ltd . Tel. 00 91-124 280 3333
The N ationa l Conciliation Service, Customer Ca re
Retail Motor Ind ust ry Fed era tion, Griffin House, O sborne Road General Motors Ireland Ltd.
9 North Street, Luton, Bedfor dshi re, LU1 3YT – Engla nd O pel House, Unit 60, Heather Road
RUGBY , CV21 2AB Tel. 00 44-15 82-42 72 00 Sa ndyford , Dublin 18 – Ireland
General Motors Finland Oy Tel. 00 353-1-216 10 00
If you have a p roblem w hilst abroa d:
The S ervice Departments of ADAM O PEL Pa juniityntie 5 General Motors Italia Srl
GmbH and General Motors branches 00320 Helsinki – Finl and Piazza le dell’Industria 40
everyw here will provide information and Tel. 00 358-9 817 101 47 00144 Rome – It aly
assistance: General Motors Franc e Tel. 00 39-06-5 46 51
In Luxemb ourg please contact 1 – 9, avenue du M arais General Motors Ned erland B. V.
the General M otors Service Department in Angle Q ua i de Bezons Lage Mosten 49 – 63
Antwerp – Belg ium 95101 Argenteuil C edex – France 4822 NK Breda – N et herla nds
Telephone 00 32-34 50 63 29 Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 51 Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 83 00
General Motors Austria GmbH ADAM OPEL Gm bH General Motors Norge AS

Groß-Enzersdorfer S tr. 59 Bahnhofsp la tz 1 K jeller-Vest 6
1220 Vi enna – Austria 65423 Rüsselsheim – Germ any 2027 Kj el ler – Norw ay
Tel. 00 43 1-2 88 77 444 or Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or Tel. 00 47-23 50 01 04
00 43-1-2 88 77 0 00 49-61 42-7 70 General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o.
Domaniewsk a 41
06- 672 Wa rsa w – Pola nd
Tel. 00 48- 22-606 17 00
General Motors Portugal The service interval display takes acc ount
Q uinta d a Fonte of off-the-road periods during which the
Ed ificío Fernão M agalhães, Piso 2 battery is disconnected.
2780-190 Pa ço d’Arc os – Portugal For vehicles with flexib le engine oil change
Tel. 00 351- 21 440 75 00 and serv ice intervals, the length of these
General Motors S outheast Europe, interva ls is based on several parameters
org. z ložk a stemm ing from usage. For this reason,
Apollo Business Centre va rious engine-specific data is continually
Mlynské Nivy 45 gathered a nd is used to calculate the
821 09 Bra tislav a – S lovak ia remaining distance until the nex t service.
Tel. 00 421-2 58 275 543
This remaining distance can be displa yed
General Motors España S. L. with the ignition off: briefly press the trip
Paseo de la C astellana, 91 odometer reset button, the m ileage
28046 M adrid – Spa in Pict ure no: 17008t.tif reading shows. Press the button aga in for
Tel. 00 34-902 25 00 25 In spec tion system around 2 second s, InSP and the remaining
In order to guarantee econom ical and safe distance is shown.
General Motors N orden AB
Årstaä ngv ägen 17 vehicle operation and to m ainta in the If the rema ining d istance is less than 1000
value of y our v ehicle, it is of vital
100 73 S tockhol m – S weden miles (1500 k m), InS P is d isplay ed w ith a
Tel. 00 46-20 333 000 importanc e that all maintenance work is remaining distance of 600 m iles (1000 k m)
carried out at the proper intervals as when the ignition is switched on and off.
General Motors S uisse S .A. specified.
Stelzenstraße 4 I nS P is display ed for several seconds if the
8152 Glatt brugg – Swit zerland For vehicles with fixed oil change and remaining distance is less tha n 600 miles
Tel. 00 41-44 828 28 80 service intervals, InSP appea rs in the (1000 km). Have the serv ic e work tha t is
od om eter disp la y when the ignition is due carried out w ithin one week or 300
General Motors Türkiy e Ltd. S ti. miles (500 km). H ave this work carried out
turned on before the service work b ecomes
Kemalpa sa y olu üz eri due: arra nge for the next service to be by a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer in order
35861 Torb ali/Izmir – Tur key to av oid inv alidation of warranty claims.
performed by a w orkshop within one week
Tel. 00 90-2 32-8 53-14 53 or 300 miles (500 km ).
In Alb ania, Bosnia-H erzegovina ,
Bulga ria, C roatia, Estonia, La tvia ,
Lithuania, Macedonia, Romania ,
Serbia -Monteneg ro and Sl ov enia
please contact the
General Motors S ervice Department in
Budaörs – Hungary
Tel. 00 36-23 446 100
Further information on maintenance and Genuine Vauxhall Parts and

the inspec tion system can be found in the Accessories
service booklet, which is in the glove We rec om mend that you use "Genuine
compartment. Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" a nd
Hav e serv ic e work – and repairs to the conv ersion p arts expressly ap prov ed for
bodyw ork and components – performed your vehicle type. These parts ha ve
properly by a workshop. We recommend undergone spec ia l tests to establish their
your Vauxhall Authorised R epairer, who reliability, safety a nd specific suitability for
has ex cellent k nowledge of Va ux ha ll Vauxhall v ehicles. Despite continuous
vehic les and is in possession of the market monitoring, we ca nnot assess or
necessary tools and c urrent service guarantee these attributes for other
instructions from Vauxhall. To exclude the prod uc ts, even if they hav e b een granted
possibility of loss of warranty, use of a approval by the releva nt authorities or in
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer is some other form. Picture no: 17304t.tif
recom mended in particular during the A note on safety
"Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories"
warranty p eriod. For further information and conversion parts approved by To av oid injury from moving parts and
see the S ervice Booklet. Vauxhall c an be ob tained from y our cab les conduc ting ignition voltage, only
Separ ate anti-cor rosion servi ce Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, w ho c an carry out engine c om partment checks
Hav e the work performed b y a workshop at prov ide com prehensive advice about (e. g. checking b ra ke fluid or engine oil
the interv als specified in the Service permissib le technical chang es and ensure level) when the ignition is switched off.
Booklet. that the part is installed correc tly .
9 Warnin g
The cooling fan is controlled by a
thermosw itc h and can therefore start
unexpectedly ev en if the ig nition is
switched off. Risk of injury .
Electronic ignition system s generate very
hig h voltages. Do not touch the ignition
sy stem; high voltage can b e fatal.
Never carry out any repairs or adjustm ent Engine oil The engine oil level 3 is chec ked
and m aintenance work on the vehic le Information on eng ine oils is found in the automatically 1 ), see p age 116. Before
yourself. This especia lly applies to the Serv ic e Booklet. embarking on a long journey it is ad visab le
engine, chassis and safety parts. You may to check the engine oil level.
unwittingly infringe the provisions of the Engine oil l ev el and consumpt ion
law a nd , by not performing the work Every engine consum es engine oil for
properly , end ang er y ourself and other technical rea sons. The engine oil
road users. consumption cannot be assessed until a
fa irly long dista nce has been driven, and
Checking and to pping up fluids may be above the spec ified v alue when the
vehicle is first being driven (run-in period).
To aid id entific ation, the caps used when
Frequent driving at high revs increases
topping up engine oil, coolant and w ash
engine oil c onsumption.
fluid as well as the oil dipstick are coloured
yellow.
9 Warning
Do not allow the engine oil level to drop
below the m inimum level!
1)
No t on Z 14 XEP or Z 20 LEH engine. Sales
desig nation – see pa ges 310, 311.
Check ing the engine oil level, t op ping up To check the engine oil level, insert wiped Top up w ith the same brand of engine oil
engine oil oil dipstick into handle as far as it will go. that was used during the prev ious oil
The pictures show the inspection of a petrol Top engine oil up if the level has dropped change, follow ing the instructions in the
and two d iesel engines. into the range of the top-up mark MIN. service booklet.
The oil level must be c hecked with the The engine oil lev el must not ex ceed the To close, position the cap and screw it into
vehic le on a level surface and with the up per m ark MAX on the dipstick . Ex cess place.
engine (which must b e at operating engine oil must be d ra ined off or ex tracted. C apacities – see page 349.
tem perature) switched off. Wait at lea st If the engine oil level is ab ov e the MAX
5 minutes before check ing the level to mark there is a risk of dam age to the
allow the norma l engine oil accumulation engine or the catalytic conv erter.
in the engine to drain into the oil pan. Capacity betw een MIN and MAX mark s –
see p age 349.
9 Warning
It is the ow ner’s responsibility to maintain
the correc t lev el of an appropriate quality
oil in the engine.
Diesel fuel filter Coolant

On each engine oil change, ha ve the fuel The glycol-based coolant p rov id es
filter check ed for any water resid ue by a excellent corrosion protection for
work shop. the heating and cooling systems as
well as antifreez e protection d ow n to
Illum ination of A indica tes water in the
around -28 °C. It rem ains in the cooling
fuel filter 3.
system throughout the year and need
Have fuel filter checked at shorter interv als not be changed.
if the vehicle is sub jected to ex treme
Use of certain antifreez es can lead to
op erating c onditions such as high humidity
eng ine damage. We therefore recommend
(p rim arily in coastal areas), ex tremely hig h
that you only use antifreezes that ha ve
or low outside temp eratures and
been ap prov ed.
substantia lly vary ing daytime and night-
tim e temperatures.
Pi cture no: 17311t.tif 9 Warnin g
Eng ine oi l change, oil filter change
Hav e a workshop change the oil a t the Antifreeze is a danger to health; it m ust
specified service intervals. therefore be kept in the original container
We recommend that you use genuine and out of the reach of children.
engine oil filters.
9 Warning
Drained eng ine oil cans cannot be
disposed of with domestic refuse.
Observe the legal requirements for
disposal of old oil and filters to protect
the environment and your health.
When the engine is at op erating

temperature, coolant lev el rises. It falls
aga in when the system cools. If it falls
below the KALT/C OLD mark when the
system is cold, top up to just above the
ma rk .
Top up a ntifreeze. If no antifreeze is
av ailable, top up with clean tap water.
If tap water is unavailab le, distilled water
can b e used.
After topping up with water or distilled
water, check the antifreeze concentration
and a dd antifreeze if necessary. H ave a
Pi cture no: 17312t.tif Pict ure no: 17313t.tif workshop eliminate the c ause of the
Antifreeze and corrosion protecti on Coolant lev el coolant loss.
Before the start of winter, have a w orkshop Hardly a ny losses occur since the cooling
check the a ntifreeze protection. The sy stem is sealed and it is thus rarely Too low a coolant level can cause engine
antifreez e lev el must guarantee protection necessary to top up the coolant. dam age.
to approx. -28 ° C. Insuffic ient antifreez e To close, position the cap and screw it into
The coolant should be a little above the
will reduc e the frost protec tion level and place.
KALT/COLD ma rk in the expansion tank
the c orrosion p rotection. If necessary add with a cold cooling system. The coolant
antifreez e. level can also be read off from the outsid e
If coolant loss is topped up with water, of the ex pansion tank.
have concentration checked and add
antifreez e if necessa ry . 9 Warning
Allow engine to cool down before
rem oving coola nt filler cap . Rem ov e filler
cap carefully so that p ressure can escape
slow ly, otherwise there is a risk of
scalding.
Coola nt temperat ure The use of certain brak e fluids can cause
Control indicator W illuminates when dam age or loss of braking power. We
coolant temp erature is too high. C heck therefore rec om mend the use of high-
coolant lev el imm ediately: performa nc e brak e fluid that has been
app rov ed.
z Coolant level too low:
Ad d coolant, see notes under "Antifreez e When topping up, ensure max imum clean-
and corrosion protection", and " Coolant liness as conta mina tion of the brake fluid
level". H ave a workshop eliminate the can lead to function problems in the
cause of the coolant loss. brak ing sy stem.
z Coolant level O K: After c orrecting the brak e fluid level, have
Have the cause of the raised c oolant a work shop eliminate the cause of the
temperature elim ina ted. Contact a brak e fluid loss.
work shop.
Brake fluid
Brake fluid lev el
9 Warning
C aution – brake fluid is p oisonous and
corrosive. Do not allow it to come into
contact with eyes, skin, fabric or p ainted
surfaces. Direct contact could cause
injury and da mage.
The fluid lev el in the reservoir must be

neither higher than the MAX mark nor
low er than the M IN m ark.
Brak e fluid chang e Windscreen wiper We recommend releasing froz en wiper

Brake fluid is hy groscopic, i.e. it absorbs Clea r vision is essential for safe driv ing. blad es with Va ux ha ll De-icer sp ra y.
water. If the brakes b ecome hot, suc h as
Perform regular checks on the windscreen S mearing wiper blades c an be cleaned with
when d riv ing on long downhill stretches,
wiper a nd headlight wash system 3 to a soft cloth and Vauxhall Wind screen
vap our bubb les can occur in the w ater,
ensure they are operating correctly. We Wash Solvent.
which can have an extrem ely adverse
effect on braking power (depending on the recommend wiper blade rep la cement at Wiper blades whose lips have become
proportion of w ater). least once a year. hardened, crack ed or covered with silicone
If the windscreen is dirty, operate the must be replac ed. This may be necessary
The fluid change intervals specified in the
wind screen wash system before switching as a result of the effects of ic e, thawing salt
Service Booklet m ust therefore be
on the windscreen wiper or setting the or hea t, or the incorrect use of cleaning
observed.
wiper to automatic operation with the rain agents.
9 Warning sensor 3. This will avoid wiper blad e wear. S witc h off the windsc reen w ip er or
Do not switch on the wind screen wiper or automatic w ip er with rain sensor 3 in car
Have the brake fluid changed by a work - set them to automa tic operation with the washes – see pages 12, 13, 289.
shop. O bserve the legal requirements for ra in sensor 3 if the windscreen is iced up as Windscreen w ip er care – see p age 291.
disposal of brake fluid to protect the env i- this could dama ge the wiper b la des or the
ronment and your hea lth. wiper system .
To ensure proper operation of the ra in Service set ting for front wind sc reen wip er Wiper bl ades on the windscreen
sensor 3 the sensor a rea must be free from (e.g. for cha nging or cleaning the front Activate service setting - see previous
dust, dirt and ice, w hich is why the wiper b la des). column. Raise wiper arm, tilt wip er blade at
windscreen wash system m ust be operated a 90° to the wiper arm and remove to the
Within 4 seconds from turning off the
at regular intervals and the sensor area de- side.
ignition, with the key still in the lock 3 or for
iced. Vehicles with rain sensor 3 ca n be the O pen&Start S ystem 3 after switching
identified by the sensor area near the top off the ignition and before op ening the
of the w indscreen. driver’s door, press the wiper stalk down.
Release wiper sta lk as soon as the wiper is
vertical.
The wind screen wash system and

hea dlight wash system will not freeze in
winter:
Frost protection Mix ture

down to Vauxhall
Windscreen Wash
Solvent: Water
-5 °C 1:3
-10 °C 1:2
-20 °C 1:1
-30 °C 2:1
Pi cture no: 17318t.tif Pict ure no: 17319t.tif When closing the reservoir, press the lid
Wiper bla de on the rea r window 3 Windscreen and headligh t wash firmly ov er the bea ded edge all the way
Lift wiper arm . Disengage wiper blade as systems 3 round.
shown in illustra tion and remove. The fluid reservoir filler neck for the
wind screen wash system and headlight
wash system 3 is located at the front next
to the left headlight.
Capacities – see page 349.
Fill only with clean water to prev ent the
nozz les from clogging. To im prov e
cleaning efficienc y, w e recommend tha t
you ad d a little Vauxhall Windscreen Wash
Solvent.
Lay ing up the v ehicle for m ore than Protecting electronic compo nen ts
4 weeks can lead to battery discharge, In order to prev ent faults in elec tronic
whic h may reduce the service life of the components in the electrical system, never
battery. Disconnect battery from on-board connect or d isconnect b attery w ith engine
power supply b y detaching negative running or ignition switched on. Nev er start
terminal. eng ine with battery disconnected, e. g.
The Vauxhall a larm system 3 siren must be when starting using jum p lead s.
deactiv ated a s follows: switch the ignition To av oid damaging the vehic le, d o not
on then off, disconnec t the vehicle’s ma ke a ny modifications to the electrical
battery within 15 seconds. system, e. g. c onnec ting additional
Ensure that ignition is switched off before consum ers or tampering with electronic
connecting battery . Then perform the control units (chip tuning).
following actions:
Pi cture no: 17320t.tif 9 Warnin g
z Setting date and tim e in the inform ation
Battery display – see pages 124, 127, 132.
The b attery is m aintenanc e-free. Electronic ignition system s generate very
z If necessary ac tiv ate the windows 3 and hig h voltages. Do not touch the ignition
9 Warning sun roof 3 – see pages 52, 54. sy stem; high voltage can b e fatal.
In order to prevent the battery from
Have the ba ttery changed by a work- discharging, some consumers such as the
shop. O bserve the legal requirements for courtesy light autom atically switch off
disposal of used ba tteries to protect the after approx . 20 minutes.
environment and y our health.
Di sc onnecti ng/connect ing the bat ter y
Fitting of electrical or electronic ac cessories from/to the elec trica l system
at a la ter date can discha rge or add ex tra Before c harging, isolate the b attery from
load to the battery . Take adv ic e on the the on-board network. First rem ov e the
tec hnical p ossibilities, e. g. use of a more negative and then the positiv e terminal.
powerful ba ttery. Do not reverse the polarity of the battery,
i.e. the term ina ls for the positive and
negative lea ds. When connecting, start
with the positiv e lead and then connect the
negative lea d.
Vehicle decomm issioning Vehicle storag e Vehicle recommissioning

O bserve na tional regulations. z Park vehicle in dry, well v entilated plac e. O bserve national regulations.
With manual transmission or
If the vehicle is to be parked for severa l Easy tronic 3 , enga ge 1st or rev erse Perform the following work before
months, to avoid da mage have the gear. With automatic transm ission 3, recommissioning the vehicle:
follow ing work performed by a workshop. selector lever in P. Use chocks or the lik e z Connect ba ttery – see page 306.
z Wash and preserve the vehicle – see to prevent the vehicle from rolling .
z Check tyre pressure and correc t if
page 289. z Do not apply hand brake. necessary – see page 337.
z Check corrosion protection in engine z Disconnect battery by disengaging z Fill up w indscreen wash system – see
com partment a nd on underbody a nd neg ativ e terminal from vehicle electrical page 305.
repair if necessary . system – see page 306.
z Check engine oil level – see p age 298.
z Clean and wax the rubber seals of the
bonnet, doors and roof. Intermediate z Check the coolant level; top up with
position of the Astra TwinTop roof for antifreeze if necessary – see page 301.
cleaning - see page 58. z Fit the num ber p la tes if necessary.
z Change engine oil – see page 300.
z Check antifreeze and c orrosion
protection – see page 301.
z Check the coolant lev el, top up with
antifreeze if necessary – see page 301.
z Empty windsc reen w ash system and
headlight wash system.
z Inc rease ty re pressure to value sp ecified
for full load – see page 337.
308 Tec hnic al data
Technical data
Vehicle docum ents, identification Pict ure no: 17321t.tif Picture no: 17322t.tif
plate. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 308 Veh icle doc umen ts, identification Information on identification plate:
Vehicle identification d ata.... .... .... ..... . 309 plate 1 Manufa cturer
Coolant, b ra ke fluid, oils .. ..... .... .... ..... . 309 The tec hnical d ata is determined in 2 Type approval numb er
Engine data. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 310 accordance with European C ommunity 3 Vehicle identifica tion number
Performance.... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 312 standards. We reserve the right to make 4 Gross vehicle weight rating
modifications. S pecifications in the vehic le
Fuel consump tion, CO 2 emissions ..... . 316 5 Permissib le gross train w eight
docum ents alwa ys have priority ov er those
Weights, pay loa d and roof load .. ..... . 325 given in this manual. 6 Maxim um perm issible front axle load
Tyres ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 337 7 Maxim um perm issible rear ax le load
The identification plate is affix ed to the
Electrical system .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 348 8 Vehicle-specific or country-specific
front right door frame.
Ca pacities ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 349 data
Dimensions.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 350
Insta lla tion dim ensions of trailer
tow ing equipment. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 351
Technical data 309
Coolant, brake flu id, oils

O nly use app rov ed fluids.
Use of unsuitab le fluids can cause serious
dam age to the vehicle.
Engine oils
Information on engine oils is found in the
S ervice Booklet.

Vehicle identification data The vehic le identification number may be
The v ehicle identification numb er is embossed on the instrument pa nel.
stamped on the identification plate and in Engine code and engine number: stamp ed
the v ehicle floor on the rig ht-hand side on left-ha nd side of engine on crankcase.
under a cover between the driver’ s d oor
and sea t.
Engine data
Sales designation 1.4 1.6 1.6 1.8 VXR
Eng ine identifier code Z 14 XEP Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER Z 20 LEH
Numb er of cylinders 4 4 4 4 4
Piston displacement (cm 3) 1364 1598 1598 1796 1998
Brake horse power (k W/bhp) 66 85 132 103 177

at rpm 5600 6000 5500 6300 5600
Torque (Nm ) 125 155 230 1751 ) 320

at rpm 4000 4000 1980 to 5500 3800 2400 to 5000
Type of fuel Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol

O ctane requirement (RO N) 2 )
unleaded 95 (S) 3) 95 (S) 3 ) 95 (S )3 ) 95 (S)3 ) 95 (S) 3) 5 )
or unleaded 98 (SP) 3) 98 (S P) 3 ) 98 (SP)3) 98 (SP)3) 98 (SP) 3)
or unleaded 91 (N) 3 ) 4 ) 91 (N ) 3) 4) 91 (N)3) 4 ) 91 (N)3) 4 ) 91 (N ) 3) 6)
Cetane requirement (CN) 2 ) –
Max . permissible engine speed,

continuous operation (rpm) approx. 6200 6500 6500 6800 6400
O il consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
1)
For versions w ith a uto ma tic transm ission 170 N m.
2)
Stan da rd high-q uality fuels , e.g . unlea ded DIN EN 228; value p rinted in b old: reco mmend ed fuel.
3)
Kn ock contro l s ys tem a utoma tically a d jus ts ig nition tim ing a ccording to typ e o f fuel used (octa ne nu mber).
4)
Use of 91 RON fuel reduces p ower an d torq ue.
5)
Use of 95 RON fuel reduces p ower an d torq ue. Slig ht in crease in fuel con sump tio n.
6)
If no unlea ded P rem iu m fuel is availab le, 91 R ON ca n b e u sed to avoid hig h engine loa d or full loa d a s well a s fo r d riving in moun ta in ous terrain
with a caravan /trailer loa d o r hig h pa ylo ad .
Technical data 311
Engine data
Sales designation 1.3 C DTI 1.7 C DTI 1.9 C DTI 1.9 C DTI
Eng ine identifier code Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH
Numb er of cylinders 4 4 4 4
Piston displacement (cm 3) 1248 1686 1910 1910
Brake horse power (k W/bhp) 66 74 88 110

at rpm 4000 4400 3500 4000
Torque (Nm ) 200 240 280 320

at rpm 1750 to 2500 2300 2000 to 2750 2000 to 2750
Type of fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel

Cetane requirement (CN) 1 ) 49 (D) 2) 49 (D) 2) 49 (D) 2) 49 (D) 2)
Max . permissible engine speed,

continuous operation (rpm) approx. 5020 to 5180 5100 to 5200 5020 to 5180 5020 to 5180
O il consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
1)
Stan da rd high-q uality fuels , e.g . Diesel DIN EN 590; D = Diesel; value printed in bo ld : recom mend ed fuel.
2)
A lo wer va lue is pos sib le with w inter diesel fu els.
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h) , 5-door Hatch bac k
Eng ine 1 ) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER
Max imum speed2)

Manual tra nsmission 178 191 221 208
Easytronic 176 192 – –
Automatic transmission – – – 188
Eng ine 1 ) Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH

Max imum speed2)
Easytronic 172 – – –
Automatic transmission – – 188 –
1)
Sa les desig nation, see p ag es 310, 311.
2)
The ma xim um s peed ind ica ted is achieva ble a t kerb weig ht (with out driver) p lu s 200 kg p ayloa d. Optiona l eq uipm ent cou ld red uce the s pecified
maximu m sp eed of th e vehicle.
Technical data 313
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h) , 3-door Hatch bac k
Eng ine 1 ) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER Z 20 LEH
Max imum speed2)

Manual tra nsmission 180 193 223 210 244
Easytronic 178 194 – – –
Automatic transmission – – – 190 –

Max imum speed2)
1)
2)
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h) , Estate
Max imum speed2)

Easytronic – 192 – –
Automatic transmission – – – 188

Max imum speed2) 193 207
Manual tra nsmission 172 180 – –
Easytronic 172 – 187 –
Automatic transmission – –
1)
2)
Technical data 315
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h , Van
Eng ine 1 ) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XER Z 16 LET
Max imum speed2)

Manual tra nsmission 178 191 –
Easytronic – 192 –
Automatic transmission – – –

Max imum speed2)
Easytronic – – – –
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h) , TwinTop
Eng ine 1 ) Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER Z 19 DTH
Max imum speed2)

1)
2)
Fuel consumption, CO 2 emissions The direc tiv e is oriented to actual driving The figures given m ust not be taken as a
Directive 80/1268/EEC (last c hanged practices: Urban driv ing is rated at approx. guarantee for the actual fuel consumption
1/ and off-road d riv ing with approx. 2/
by 1999/100/EC) has applied for the 3 3 of a p artic ular vehicle.
measurement of fuel consumption (urban a nd ex tra-urban c onsumption). All values are b ased on the EU base model
since 1996. Cold starts and acceleration phases are with standard equipment.
also tak en into consideration.
The calculation of fuel consumption as
The specification of CO 2 emission is also a spec ified by directive 1999/100/EC takes
constituent of the directive. acc ount of the v ehicle’ s kerb weight,
ascertained in accordance with these
regula tions. O ptional extras ma y result in
slightly higher fuel consumption and CO 2
emission lev els than those quoted.
To convert l/100 k m into mpg, divide 282
by num ber of litres/100 km.
S aving fuel, p rotecting the environm ent –
see page 200.
Technical data 317
Fuel cons umption (approx. l/100 km ) , CO2 emissions (ap prox . g/km) , Hatch 5-door (tyre width up to 205 mm1 ))
Manual transm ission/Ea sytronic/

Autom atic transm ission
urban 8.0/ 7.7/– 8.7/ 8.5/– –/–/– 9.9/–/10.5
extra-urban 5.0/ 4.9/– 5. 2/ 5.0/– –/– /– 5.8/–/ 6.2
total 6.1/ 5.9/– 6. 5/ 6.3/– –/– /– 7.3/–/ 7.8
CO 2 146/142/– 156/151/– –/– /– 175/–/187

urban 6.2/ 6.4/– 6.4/–/– –/– /– –/–/–
extra-urban 4.0/ 4.2/– 4. 2/–/– –/– /– –/–/–
total 4.8/ 5.0/– 5. 0/–/– –/– /– –/–/–
CO 2 130/135/– 135/–/– –/– /– –/–/–
1)
On en gine Z 17 D TH a nd Z 13 DTH with Easytro nic up to tyre width 195 m m.
2)

urban 8.2/ 7.9/– 8.9/ 8.7/– 10.3/– /– 10.1/– /10. 7
extra-urban 5.2/ 5.1/– 5.4/ 5.2/– 6.2/–/– 6.0/–/ 6.4
total 6.3/ 6.1/– 6.7/ 6.5/– 7.7/–/– 7.5/–/ 8.0
CO 2 151/146/– 161/156/– 185/–/– 180/–/192

urban –/– /– 6.5/–/– 7.4/–/ 9.7 7.4/–/–
extra-urban –/– /– 4.3/–/– 4.9/–/ 5.4 4.9/–/–
total –/– /– 5.1/–/– 5.8/–/ 7.0 5.8/–/–
CO 2 –/– /– 138/–/– 157/–/189 157/–/–
1)
For Z 1 7 DTH engine - tyre width up to 195 mm .
2)
Technical data 319
urban 8.0/ 7.7/– 8.7/ 8.5/– –/– /– 9.9/– /10. 4
extra-urban 5.0/ 4.9/– 5.2/ 5.0/– –/– /– 5.8/– /6.1
total 6.1/ 5.9/– 6.5/ 6.3/– –/– /– 7.3/– /7.7
CO 2 146/142/– 156/151/– –/– /– 175/–/ 185
Eng ine 2 ) Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Z 20 LEH

urban 6.2/ 6.4/– 6.4/– /– –/– /– –/–/– – /– /–
extra-urban 4.0/ 4.2/– 4.2/–/– –/– /– –/–/– – /– /–
total 4.8/ 5.0/– 5.0/–/– –/– /– –/–/– – /– /–
CO 2 130/135/– 135/–/– –/– /– –/–/– – /– /–
1)
2)

urban 8.2/ 7.9/– 8.9/ 8.7/– 10. 3/–/– 10.1/–/10.6 13.0/– /–
extra-urban 5.2/ 5.1/– 5.4/ 5.2/– 6.2/– /– 6. 0/–/ 6. 3 7.0/–/–
total 6.3/ 6.1/– 6.7/ 6.5/– 7.7/– /– 7. 5/–/ 7. 9 9.2/–/–
CO 2 151/146/– 161/156/– 185/–/– 180/–/190 221/–/–
urban 6.2/ 6.4/– 6.5/–/– 7.4/– / 9.6 7.4/– /–
extra-urban 4.0/ 4.2/– 4.3/–/– 4.9/– / 5.3 4. 9/–/–
total 4.8/ 5.0/– 5.1/–/– 5.8/– / 6.9 5. 8/–/–
CO 2 130/135/– 138/– /– 157/–/186 157/–/–
1)
For Z 2 0 LEH eng in e - tyre w id th up to 235 m m.
2)
Technical data 321
Fuel cons umption (approx. l/100 km ), CO 2 e miss ions (approx. g/km ) , Es tate (ty re width up to 205 mm1 ))
urban 8. 0/–/– 8.8/ 8. 6/– –/–/– 10.0/–/10.5
extra-urban 5. 0/–/– 5.3/ 5. 1/– –/–/– 5. 9/–/ 6.2
total 6. 1/–/– 6.6/ 6. 4/– –/–/– 7. 4/–/ 7.8
CO 2 146/–/– 158/154/– –/–/– 178/–/ 187

urban 6. 2/–/– 6.4/– /– –/–/– – /– /–
extra-urban 4. 0/–/– 4.2/– /– –/–/– – /– /–
total 4. 8/–/– 5.0/– /– –/–/– – /– /–
CO 2 130/–/– 135/–/– –/–/– – /– /–
1)
2)
Fuel cons umption (approx. l/100 km ), CO 2 e miss ions (approx. g/km ) , Es tate (ty re width up to 225 mm)
urban 8. 2/–/– 9.0/ 8.8/– 10.3/–/– 10. 2/–/10.7
extra-urban 5. 2/–/– 5.5/ 5.3/– 6.2/–/– 6.1/– / 6.4
total 6. 3/–/– 6.8/ 6.6/– 7.7/–/– 7.6/– / 8.0
CO 2 151/–/– 163/158/– 185/–/– 182/–/ 192
Eng ine 1 ) Z 13 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH

urban 6. 2/–/– 7.5/–/ 9. 7 7.5/–/–
extra-urban 4. 0/–/– 5.0/–/ 5. 4 5.0/–/–
total 4. 8/–/– 5.9/–/ 7. 0 5.9/–/–
CO 2 130/–/– 159/–/189 159/–/–
1)
Technical data 323
Fuel cons umption (approx. l/100 km ), CO 2 e miss ions (approx. g/km ) , V an (tyre w idth up to 205 mm 1 ))
Eng ine 2 ) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH
urban 8. 0/–/– 8.8/ 8. 6/– –/–/– 6.2/–/– 6. 4/–/– – /–/– –/–/–
extra-urban 5. 0/–/– 5.3/ 5. 1/– –/–/– 4.0/–/– 4. 2/–/– –/–/– –/–/–
total 6. 1/–/– 6.6/ 6. 4/– –/–/– 4.8/–/– 5. 0/–/– –/–/– –/–/–
CO 2 146/–/– 158/154/– –/–/– 130/–/– 135/–/– –/–/– –/–/–
1)
2)
Fuel cons umption (approx. l/100 km ), CO 2 e miss ions (approx. g/km ) , V an (tyre w idth up to 225 mm)
Eng ine 1 ) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 13 DTH
urban 8.2/– /– 9.0/ 8.8/– –/– /– –/–/–
extra-urban 5.2/– /– 5.5/ 5.3/– – /–/– –/–/–
total 6.3/– /– 6.8/ 6.6/– – /–/– –/–/–
CO 2 151/– /– 163/158/– – /–/– –/–/–
Eng ine 1 ) Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH

urban 6.5/– /– 7.4/–/ 9.7 7.4/–/–
extra-urban 4.3/– /– 4.9/–/ 5.4 4.9/–/–
total 5.1/– /– 5.8/–/ 7.0 5.8/–/–
CO 2 138/– /– 157/–/189 157/–/–
Fuel cons umption (approx. l/100 km ), CO 2 e miss ions (approx. g/km ) , TwinTop (tyre width up to 225 mm)
Eng ine 1 ) Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER Z 19 DTH

urban 9.1/ 8.9/– 10.5/– /– 10.3/–/10.8 7.6/– /–
extra-urban 5.6/ 5.4/– 6.4/–/– 6.2/–/ 6.5 5.1/– /–
total 6.9/ 6.7/– 7.9/–/– 7.7/–/ 8.1 6.0/– /–
CO 2 166/161/– 190/–/– 185/–/ 194 160/– /–
1)
Technical data 325
Weights, payload and roof load The combined total of front a nd rear ax le Roof loa d
The p ayload is the difference between loa ds must not exceed the perm issible The permissib le roof load is 75 kg and
the p ermitted gross vehicle w eight (see gross vehicle weight. For exa mple, if the 100 k g for caravan w ith roof railing. The
identification plate, page 308) and the front ax le is bearing its m aximum roof load is the c om bined weight of the
EC kerb weight. permissib le load, the rear axle can only roof rack a nd the load.
bear a load that is eq ua l to the gross
To calculate the kerb weight, enter the Roof loads are not permitted on the Astra
vehicle weig ht m inus the front axle load.
data for y our vehicle below: TwinTop.
With a connected trailer and full load on
z Kerb weight from Driving hints – see page 198. R oof rack s,
the towing vehicle including all passengers,
ta ble 1, page 327 +... ..... .... .. kg carav an and trailer towing – see page 231.
in the hatch the m aximum permitted rear
z Ad ditional w eight for axle load (see rating plate or vehicle
equipment versions docum ents) may be exceeded by 65 kg
from ta ble 2, page 334 +... ..... .... .. kg (5-door) or 70 k g (3-d oor), and the
z Weight of heavy maximum gross vehic le weight by 45 kg.
accessories from In the Estate, the max im um permitted rear
ta ble 3, page 337 +... ..... .... .. kg axle load may be ex ceeded by 60 kg and
Total =... ..... .... .. kg the max imum gross v ehicle weight by
is the EC k erb w eight. 30 kg. If the m aximum permitted rear ax le
loa d is ex ceeded, a top speed of 60 mph
O ptional equipment and accessories (100 k m/h) applies. If lower top speeds are
increase the kerb weight, which m eans that stipulated na tionally w hen towing a trailer
the p ayload will also change slig htly. these must be observed.
Note the weights given in the vehicle See the identification plate or v ehicle
documents. docum ents for permissib le ax le loads.
Table 1, kerb weight in kg 1) , Hatch 5-do or

Model Engi ne2 ) Manual tr ansm issi on Easytronic Automa tic tr ansm ission
Astra Z 14 XEP 1240 1240 –
Z 16 XER 1270 1270 –

Z 18 XER 1278 – 1303
Z 13 DTH 1340 1340 –

Z 17 DTH 1365 – –
Z 19 DT 1395 – 1425
Z 19 DTH 1393 – –
1)
According to EC D irective, inclu ding ass umed weights for d river (68 kg), lugg ag e (7 kg ) a nd a ll flu id s (ta nk 9 0% fu ll).
2)
Technical data 327
Table 1, kerb weight in kg 1) , Hatch 5-do or

Model Engi ne 2 ) Manual t ransmission Ea sytronic Automat ic tra nsm ission
Astra Z 14 XEP 1260 1260 –
wi th
air conditioning Z 16 XER 1290 1290
system or Z 16 LET 1355 – –
clim ate control
system Z 18 XER 1298 – 1323
Z 13 DTH 1355 1355 –
Z 17 DTH 1380 – –
Z 19 DT 1410 – 1440
Z 19 DTH 1408 – –
1)
2)
Table 1, kerb weight in kg 1), Hatch 3-door

Model Engi ne 2 ) Manual t ransmission Easyt ronic Automa tic tra nsm issi on
Astra Z 14 XEP 1220 1220 –
Z 16 XER 1250 1250 –

Z 18 XER 1265 – 1278
Z 13 DTH 1320 1320 –

Z 17 DTH 1345 – –
Z 19 DT 1375 – 1393
Z 19 DTH 1390 – –
1)
2)
Technical data 329
Table 1, kerb weight in kg 1), Hatch 3-door

Model Engi ne2 ) Ma nua l transmi ssion Ea sytronic Automat ic transmi ssion
Astra Z 14 XEP 1240 1240 –
wi th
air conditioning Z 16 XER 1270 1270 –
clim ate control
system Z 18 XER 1285 – 1298
Z 20 LEH 1393 – –
Z 13 DTH 1335 1335 –

Z 17 DTH 1360 – –
Z 19 DT 1390 – 1408
Z 19 DTH 1405 – –
1)
2)
Table 1, kerb weight in kg 1) , Estate

Model Engine 2) Ma nua l transmi ssion Easyt ronic Automat ic transmi ssion
Astra Z 14 XEP 1278 – –
Z 16 XER 1315 1315 –

Z 18 XER 1325 – 1350
Z 13 DTH 1380 1380 –

Z 17 DTH 1393 – –
Z 19 DT 1435 – 1465
Z 19 DTH 1450 – –
1)
2)
Technical data 331
Table 1, kerb weight in kg 1) , Estate

Model Engi ne2 ) Manual t ransmission Ea sytronic Automat ic transmi ssion
Astra Z 14 XEP 1298 – –
wi th
clim ate control
system Z 18 XER 1345 – 1370
Z 13 DTH 1395 1395 –
Z 17 DTH 1408 – –
Z 19 DT 1450 – 1480
Z 19 DTH 1465 – –
1)
2)
Table 1, kerb weight in kg 1), Van

Model Engi ne2 ) Manual t ransmission Ea sytronic Automat ic transmi ssion
Astra Z 14 XEP 1235 – –
Z 16 XER 1270 1270 –

Z 13 DTH 1335 – –
Z 17 DTH 1365 – –
Z 19 DT 1385 – 1420
Z 19 DTH 1395 – –
Astra Z 14 XEP 1250 – –
wi th
system or Z 13 DTH 1350 – –
clim ate control
system Z 17 DTH 1380 – –
Z 19 DT 1400 – 1435
Z 19 DTH 1410 – –
1)
2)
Technical data 333
Table 1, kerb weight in kg 1) TwinTo p

Model Engi ne2 ) Manual t ransmission Ea sytronic Aut om atic transmission
Astra Z 16 XER 1495 1495 –
Z 18 XER 1500 – 1503

Z 19 DTH 1613 – –
Astra Z 16 XER 1515 1515
wi th
air conditioning Z 16 LET 1575 – –
system or Z 18 XER 1520 – 1523
clim ate control
system Z 19 DTH 1628 – –
1)
2)
Table 2, additional weight for equipment versio ns in kg

Hat ch
Ex pression / Life 2) – – – – –
Club / Energy 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 –
Design / Elite 12 12 12 12 –
SXi, S Ri 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5 –
VXR2 ) – – – – –

Ex pression / Life 2) – – – –
Club / Energy 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9

Design / Elite 12 12 12 12
SXi, S Ri 24.5 24.5 12.6 12.6

VXR2 ) – – – –
1)
2)
Va lues no t a va ila ble at tim e of p rinting.
Technical data 335

Est ate
Club / Energy 2.9 2. 9 2.9 2.9
SXi, S Ri 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5
VXR2 ) – – – –

Club / Energy 2.9 2. 9 2.9 2.9

SXi, S Ri 24.5 24.5 12.6 24.5

VXR2 ) – – – –
1)
2)

Van
Eng ine 1 ) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XER Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH
Ex pression / Life 2) – – – – – –
Club / Energy – – – – – –
Design / Elite – – – – – –
SXi, S Ri 19.3 10.5 19.3 10. 5 10.5 10.5
VXR2 ) – – – – – –
Table 3, heavy accessories in kg

Accessories Sun roof Towing equip ment Sp lit rear seat b enc h
Weight 23 21 (except TwinTop) 20 (Estate)
26 (TwinTop) 9 (Hatch 3/5-door)
1)
2)
Technical data 337
Tyres Winter tyres are perm itted on the Astra O n vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spa re
Not a ll tyres ava ila ble on the market VXR only on spec ia l Va ux ha ll-ap prov ed wheel m ay have a steel rim.
currently meet the structural requirem ents. alloy wheels. The spare wheel ma y be fitted w ith a
We recommend that you consult a Further inform ation – see page 229. smaller tyre1 ) and smaller wheel than the
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning wheels fitted to the vehicle.
suitab le tyre mak es. Tyre ch ains 3
Ty re c hains may be used on the front Tyre pressure in bar / psi 2)
These ty res have und ergone special tests wheels only. The specified ty re pressures are valid for
to establish their reliab ility , safety and cold ty res. The increased ty re pressure
specific suitability for Vaux hall vehicles. We rec om mend the use of fine-link snow
resulting from ex tensiv e d riv ing must not
Despite continuous ma rk et monitoring, we cha ins which am ount to max 10 mm on the
be reduced. The tyre pressures specified on
are unab le to assess these attributes for tread a nd tyre inner wall with chain lock.
the following pages ap ply to both summer
other tyres, ev en if they hav e been g ra nted Ty re c hains are not permitted on the and w inter tyres.
approva l by the relevant authorities or in emergency w heel 115/70 R 16 and on tyres
som e other form. Alway s inflate the spare wheel 3 to the tyre
of size 225/45 R 17, 225/40 R 18 and
pressure for full load - see tables on
Further information – see pa ge 224. 235/35 R 19.
following pages.
Winter tyres 3 Ty re c hains are perm itted on tyres size
Temporary spare wheel 3 ty re pressure -
215/45 R 17 only if the vehicle is factory-
Tyres of size 215/45 R 17, 225/45 R 17, see tables on next pag e.
fitted with 18" wheels.
225/40 R 18 and 235/35 R 19 a re not to be
In v ehicles with tyre pressure monitoring
used as winter tyres. Further inform ation – see page 230.
system 3 there is an adapter in the v alve
Tyre siz es 215/45 R 17 are permitted as Wheels cap key . S crew a dapter to valve before
winter ty res only if the v ehicle is fac tory - Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 N m. attaching tyre pressure gauge – see
fitted w ith 18" wheels. pag e 225.
Spare wheel 3
If y ou use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel Further information – see pages 224
Depend ing on the version, the spare w heel
may still be fitted with a summer tyre. I f you to 230.
may ta ke the form of a temporary spare
use the spare wheel the vehicle’s ha nd ling
wheel 3: v ehicle driveab ility may be
may be altered. O btain a replacement for
altered by use of the spare w heel. O btain a
the faulty tyre a s soon as possible, and
replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as
have the wheel b alanc ed a nd fitted to the
possible, and have the w heel balanced
vehic le.
and fitted to the vehicle.
1)
Co untry-specific version: Th e spa re w heel is
only to be used as a tempo ra ry sp are wh eel.
2)
1 ba r corresp on ds to 100 kPa / 14.5 p si
(ctd.) Hatch Tyre p ressure Tyre p ressure EC O1 ) Ty re pressure

Tyre pressure in bar / psi 1) for load of loa ded with for full load
up to 3 persons up to 3 people
Engine2 ) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
Z 14 XEP 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2. 1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42

195/60 R 15
195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2. 0/29 2. 5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.5/36

205/55 R 16
Z 16 XER 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2. 1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42

195/60 R 15,
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2. 0/29 2. 5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.5/36

205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
Z 16 LET 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2. 1/30 2. 7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42

225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2. 5/36 – – 2.8/41 3.1/45

225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4. 2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61

(temp orary
spare) 3 )
1)
To achieve the sm allest a mou nt o f fuel con sump tio n po ssible. No t for u se with run -fla t tyres .
2) Sales d esigna tion , see pa ge 310.
3)
1) For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel, s ee p a ge 250.
1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa / 14.5 p si.
Technical data 339
(ctd.) Hatch Tyre pressure Tyre pressure ECO 1) Tyre pressure

Tyre pressure in bar / psi 1) for load of loaded with for full load
Z 18 XER 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2. 5/36 2. 9/42

195/60 R 15,
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2. 1/30 2. 5/36

205/55 R 16
225/45 R 17 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2. 5/36 2. 9/42
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4. 2/61 4. 2/61

(temporary
spare) 3)
1)
To achieve the sm alles t a moun t of fu el consu mp tion p ossib le. N ot for use w ith run-flat tyres.
3)
1)
1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa / 14.5 p si. For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel, s ee p a ge 250.
(ctd.) Hatch Tyre pressure Tyre pressure EC O1 ) Tyre pressure

Engine2 ) Ty res Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
Z 20 LEH 205/50 R 173 ), 2.4/35 2.4/35 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42

225/40 ZR 18,
235/35 ZR 19,
225/45 R 174 )
Z 13 DTH 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42

195/60 R 15
195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2. 5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42

205/55 R 16
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61

(temporary
spare)5 )
1) To achieve the sm allest a mou nt o f fuel con sump tio n po ssible. No t for u se with run -fla t tyres .
2)
Sales d esigna tion , see pa ges 31 0, 311.
3) Only permitted a s winter tyres.
4)
To gua ra ntee a correct s peed d ispla y, the electro nic sp eedo meter mu st b e rep ro gram med .
5)
1)
Technical data 341
(ctd.) Hatch Tyre pressure Tyre pressure EC O1 ) Tyre pressure

Z 17 DTH, 195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2. 5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42

205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44

225/40 R 18
Z 19 DT, 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2. 5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42

Z 19 DTH 225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2.5/36 – – 2.8/41 3.1/45

225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61

(temporary
spare) 3)
1)
3)
1)
1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa / 14.5 p si. For n otes on the tem po ra ry sp are wheel, see pa g e 2 50.
(ctd.) Estat e Ty re pressure Ty re pressure ECO1) Ty re pressure

1) for load of loaded with for full load
Tyre pressure in bar / psi
up to 3 p ersons up to 3 p eople
Engine2 ) Ty res Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear

Z 14 XEP 195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.6/38
205/55 R 16
185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42
195/60 R 15
Z 16 XER 195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.6/38
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42

195/60 R 15,
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
Z 16 LET 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42

225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2.5/36 – – 2.8/41 3.1/45

225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61

(temporary
spare) 3 )
1)
2) Sales d esigna tion , see pa ges 31 0, 311.
3)
Technical data 343
(ctd.) Estat e Tyre pressure Tyre pressure ECO 1 ) Tyre p ressure

Z 18 XER 195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2. 1/30 2. 6/38

205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2. 5/36 2. 9/42

195/60 R 15,
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
Z 20 LER 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2. 5/36 2. 9/42

225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2.5/36 – – 2. 8/41 3. 1/45

225/40 R 18
Z 13 DTH 195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2. 5/36 2. 9/42

205/55 R 16
185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2. 5/36 2. 9/42

195/60 R 15
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4. 2/61 4. 2/61

(tem pora ry
spare) 3 )
1)
3)
(ctd.) Estat e Tyre pressure Tyre pressure ECO 1 ) Tyre p ressure

Engine2 ) Tyres Front Rear Front Rea r Front Rear
Z 17 DTH, 195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2. 5/36 2. 9/42

205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2. 6/38 3. 0/44

225/40 R 18
Z 19 DT, 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2. 5/36 2. 9/42

Z 19 DTH 225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2.5/36 – – 2. 8/41 3. 1/45

225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4. 2/61 4. 2/61

(tem porary
spare) 3 )
1)
3)
1)
1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa / 14.5 p si. For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 250.
Technical data 345
(ctd.) Va n Tyre pressure Ty re pressure EC O 1 ) Tyre pressure

Tyre pressure in bar / psi 1) for load of load ed with for full loa d
Engine2 ) Tyres Front Rear Front Rea r Front Rear
Z 14 XEP 195/65 R 15, 2. 0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.6/38

205/55 R 16
185/65 R 15, 2. 3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42

195/60 R 15
Z 13 DTH 195/65 R 15, 2. 1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42

205/55 R 16
185/65 R 15, 2. 3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42

195/60 R 15
Z 17 DTH 195/65 R 15, 2. 1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42

205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2. 5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44

225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 4. 2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61

(tem pora ry
spare) 3 )
1)
3)
1)
1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa / 14.5 p si. For notes on the temp ora ry sp are wh eel, see p ag e 250.
(ctd.) Va n Tyre pressure Tyre pressure ECO 1) Tyre pressure

Tyre pressure in bar / psi 1) for load of loaded with for full loa d
Z 19 DT, 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42

Z 19 DTH 225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2.5/36 – – 2.8/41 3.1/45

225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61

(tem pora ry
spare) 3 )
1) To achieve the sm alles t a mou nt o f fuel con sump tion pos sib le. Not fo r us e with run-fla t tyres.
2)
Sales d esigna tion , see pa ges 31 1.
3) For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 250.
1)
Technical data 347
(ctd.) Tw inTop Tyre pressure Tyre pressure EC O1 ) Tyre pressure

Tyre pressure in bar / psi 1) for load of loaded with for full loa d
Engine2 ) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rea r
Z 16 XER, 205/55 R 16, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.2/32 2.6/38

Z 18 XER 225/45 R 17
225/40 R 18 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.4/35 2.8/41
Z 16 LET 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.4/35 2.8/41

225/45 R 17
225/40 R 18 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44
Z 19 DTH 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.4/35 2.8/41

225/45 R 17
225/40 R 18 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61

(tem pora ry
spare) 3 )
1)
3)
1)
Electrical system
Battery Voltage 12 Volt
Amp hours 36 Ah / 44 Ah 3 / 55 Ah 3 / 60 Ah 3 /
66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3
Battery for rad io remote control of centra l

lock ing sy stem and elec tronic key of
Open&S tart sy stem CR 20 32
Technical data 349
Capacities
(approx. litres)
Fuel tank (nominal content) 52 52 52 52 52
Engine oil with filter change 3.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 5. 0

between MI N and M AX on dipstick 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1. 0
Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen wa sh system 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2. 4
with headlight wash system 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4. 0
Fuel tank (nominal content) 52 52 52 52

Engine oil with filter change 3.2 5.0 4.3 4.3
between MI N and M AX on dipstick 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen wa sh system 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4
with headlight wash system 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0
1)
Dimensions
(approx. mm)
Hatch 5-door H atch 3-door Esta te Van TwinTop
O verall length 4249 4290 4515 4515 4476

Width 1753 1753 1753 1753 1759
Width with two ex terior mirrors 2032 2032 2032 2032 2021
O verall height 1460 1435 1500 1500 1411
Length of luggage compartment floor 819 819 1085 1825 805

Lug gage compartment width 944 944 1088 1103 734
Height of lugg age compartment opening 614 555 766 775 –

Wheelb ase 2614 2614 2703 2703 2614
Turning c ircle diam eter 1 ) 11.20 11.20 11.50 11.50 11.20
1)
In metres.
Technical data 351
Installatio n dimensions of trailer

towing equipment
with detachable coupling ball
bar,
Hatch1 )
All dimensions refer to fac tory -fitted
towing equipm ent.
Dimension mm
A 342.9
B 83
C 513.4
D 488.6
E 211.4
F 94.3
G 160
9 Warning
Only use towing eq uipm ent approved for
your vehicle. We recommend entrusting
fitting of towing equip ment at a later
date to a workshop.
1)
Do no t mo unt to wing eq uipm ent to vehicles
with Z 20 LEH en gine. Sales des ig nation – see
pa ge 310.

towing equipment
bar,
Estate, Van
All dimensions refer to fac tory -fitted
towing equipm ent.
Dimension mm
A 84.0
B 570.0
C 515.0
D 93.5
E 173.0
F 307.6
G 158.0
H 292.6
9 Warning
retrofitting of towing equipment to a
work shop.
Technical data 353

towing equipment
bar,
Astra Twin Top
All measurements refer to Va ux ha ll-
approved towing equipment.
Dimension mm
A 68.8
B 570.0
C 515.0
D 485.0
E 93.5
F 288.0
G 245.0
9 Warning
retrofitting of towing equipment to a
work shop.
354 In dex
Index Automatic tra nsmission .. .... .... ..... .... . 15, 16

automatic m od e . .... ..... .... .... ..... .184, 191
Brakes
ABS ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 223
C ontrol indicator . .... ..... .... .... ..... .185, 192 Brake assist .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 221
A
Driving programm e ..... .... .... ..... . 185, 192 Brake fluid . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 302
ABS (Anti-lock Brake S ystem) .. .... ..... .... 223 Fault ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 188, 196 Brake lights .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 277, 283
Accessories . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 90, 247 Interruption of power supply ... . 189, 197 Brake servo unit . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 198
Accessory socket .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 107 K ic kdown .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 187, 194 Foot brak e . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 221
Adaptive Forw ard Lighting (AFL) .. 25, 147 manual m od e . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 192 Hand brak e .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 222
Bulb replacement ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 273 Selector lever .. ..... .. 15, 16, 184, 191, 192 Bulb replacem ent .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 267, 269
Driv ing abroad .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 150 Winter programm e . ..... .... .... ..... . 186, 193 Bulbs . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 267, 269
Air conditioning system ... ..... .... .... .154, 161 Automatic wiping ... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 13, 141
Air intake .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 174 AU X input . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 152
C
Air quality sensor .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 169 C apacities . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 349
Air recirculation system ... ..... 161, 165, 173 B C ar Pass .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 28
Air vents . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 156 Battery ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..199, 306, 348 C aravan/trailer towing ... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 198
Airbags ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 92 Interruption of power supply ... .. 52, 183, C argo box . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 81
Alarm system . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 44 189, .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 197 C atalytic converter .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 207, 242
Alternator ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 115 Battery discharge protection . ..... .... ..... 150 C DC
Antenna .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... 140, 151, 289 Before starting off .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 16 (C ontinuous Dam ping Control) .. 115, 210
Antifreeze ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .300, 301 Belt force limiters .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 86 C entral locking system ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 38
Antifreeze protec tion .. .... ..... .... .... .301, 305 Belt tensioners ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 86 C ha nging the battery
Anti-knock quality of fuel ..... .... .... ..... .... 202 Bleeding , diesel fuel system .... ..... .... ..... 241 Radio rem ote control . .... ..... ..31, 37, 348
Anti-theft loc king sy stem Board informa tion display .. .... ..... .... ..... 122 C ha nging ty re/wheel type . ..... .... ..... .... . 224
Towing equipment ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 234 Bonnet ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 241 C ha nging wheels ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 252
Anti-theft protection ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 18 Boot, see Luggag e comp artm ent ... . 43, 71 C ha ssis number,
Aquaplaning .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 228 Brake assist .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 221 see v ehicle id entific ation number . .... . 309
Armrest ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 70, 110 Brake lig ht . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 221 C heck c ontrol ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 22, 138
Ashtray ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .108, 150 Brake sy stem .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 221 C hild restra int system .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 90
Autom atic air recirculation mode 169, 173 C hild safety locks .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 47, 51
Autom atic anti-dazzle interior mirror .. .. 49 C igarette lighter .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 107, 150
C lim ate c ontrol .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 154
C lim ate c ontrol system .. .... ..... .... .. 155, 168
C lock . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 120
C lutch operation .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 199
Index 355
CO 2 em issions ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 316 Courtesy lights E
Cold start .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 199 Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 287
Easy Loa d . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 82
Colour inform ation d isplay .. .... .... ..... .... 122 Cruise control . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 212
Easy tronic . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 15
Continuous Damping Curtain airbags .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 97
Driv ing programmes .. .... ..... .... ..... .... . 179
C ontrol (CDC ) .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .115, 210 Curve lighting .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 25, 147
fault .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 182
Contrast .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 133
Control indicator D Interruption of p ow er supply .. ..... .... . 183
Kickd ow n ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 180
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System ) .. ..... .... 223 Dashboard, see Instrument pa nel .. ..... .... 7
Selector lev er . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 15
Airbag . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ...98, 105 Data ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 28, 308
Starting off ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 178
Engine electronics .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 206 Date ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 124, 127
Winter programme ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 180
Exhaust ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 205 Daytime running lights .... .... .... ..... .... ..... 143
Economic al driving .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 200
Immobiliser . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 29 Decommissioning ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 307
Electric sun roof . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 54
Park ing distance sensor ... .... .... ..... .... 215 Deflation detection system . .... ..... ... 24, 217
Electrical system .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 306
Transmission ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .185, 192 Deflation Detection S ystem (DDS ) .. ..... 217
Electro-hydraulic
Ty re pressure Demisting and defrosting
p ow er assisted steering ... ..... .... ..... .... . 198
monitoring system ... .... ..... .... .... .219, 220 Windows ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 160
Electronic components ... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 306
Control indicators ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 10, 113 with climate control sy stem ..... .... ..... 171
Electronic immobiliser .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 29
Ad aptive Forward With the air
Electronic Stability Program ... .... ..... .... . 208
Lighting (AFL) . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .118, 147 conditioning system .... .... .... ..... . 163, 167
Eng ine code .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 309, 310, 311
Belt tensioners . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..87 Diesel fuel filter .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 300
Eng ine control indica tor .... ..... .... ..... .... . 206
Bra ke system ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 222 Diesel fuel system ... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 241, 300
Eng ine oil .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 298
Cruise control .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 212 Diesel pa rticle filter . .... ..... .... ..118, 157, 199
Eng ine oil change .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 299
DDS ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 217 Dip ped beam . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 11
Eng ine oil consumption . .... ..... .... ..... .... . 298
Deflation detection system .. .... ..... .... 217 Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... . 270, 273
Eng ine oil filter ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 300
ESP (Electronic Stability Program ) .... 208 Display ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 121, 122
Eng ine oil lev el ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 116, 298
IDS+ ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .210, 211 Door handle lighting .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 150
Eng ine oil pressure .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 113
Coolant ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 300 Door lock s . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 28, 291
Eng ine speed ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 199
Coolant level .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 301 Doors . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 115
Eng ine wash .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 292
Coolant temperature ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 115 Door-to-door lighting . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 148
Entry lighting ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 150
Cooled glove compartment . .... .... ..... .... 156 Driv ing abroad .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 202, 295
Env ironmental protection .. ..... .... ..... .... . 300
Cooling ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .162, 167 Headlights .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 150
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) .. .... . 208
Correcting time ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .126, 132 Driv ing hints ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 198
Exhaust c ontrol indicator .. ..... .... ..... .... . 205
Coupling socket loa d ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 236
Exhaust g ases .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 206
Courtesy lig ht . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 149
356 In dex
Ex haust system ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 206 G Heating ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 154, 159
Ex terior mirrors .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 6, 48, 157 Seats . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 157
Gears . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 15 with climate control system .... ..... .... . 170
F Generator, see Alternator ... .... ..... .... ..... 115
with the air conditioning sy stem . .... 163,
Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories ..
Fan . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .158, 297 167
297
Filling station Height adjustm ent
Glasses comp artm ent ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 111
Capacities ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 349 seat belts ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 88
Glov e com partment ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 110
Engine oil level .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 298 Steering wheel ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..7
Glov e com partment lighting .. ..... .... ..... 150
Fuel ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .202, 311 High-pressure cleaners .. .... ... 235, 291, 293
Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 288
Opening the bonnet .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 241 Hill S tart Assist ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 222
Gra phic al information display .... .... ..... 122
Ty re pressure ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .201, 337 Horn .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 12
Gross vehicle weight ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 325
Vehicle data .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 309
Windscreen wash sy stem . .... .... ..... .... 305 Gross vehicle weight rating .... ..... .... ..... 325 I
First-aid k it (c ushion) ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 247 H Identifica tion plate .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 308
Flat tyre .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 256 IDS + (Interactive Driving S ystem) . 208, 210
Halogen headlight sy stem . .... ..... .... ..... 269
FlexO rganizer ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 80 Ignition logic . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 127, 134
Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 269
Fog lights .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 145 Ignition system .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 297, 306
Driving abroad .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 150
Bulb replacement ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 276 Im mobiliser ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 29
Hand brake .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 18, 222
Fog tail light ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 145 Information disp lay ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 122
Hazard w arning lights .... .... .... ..... ... 12, 145
Bulb replacement ..... .... ..... .... .... .277, 283 Infotainment system . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 151
Head restraints .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 21, 69
Fold ing roof, see TwinTop ... .... .... ..... .... .. 56 Inspection S ystem . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 296
Head lig ht flash .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 144
Fold ing the back rest ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 66 Instrum ent display .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 119
Head lig ht range adjustment .. ..... . 146, 269
Foot b rake .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 221 Instrum ent illumination .. .... ..... .... ..... .... . 148
Head lig ht switch ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 143, 144
Front pa ssenger airbag .. ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 93 Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 288
Head lig ht w ash system ... .... .... 13, 142, 305
Fuel .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .202, 311 Instrum ent panel ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..7
Head lig hts
Fuel consump tion ... ..... .... ..... 200, 202, 316 Instrum ents ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 112
Day tim e running lights .... .... ..... .... ..... 143
Fuel filler ca p .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 203 Intera ctiv e Driving System (IDS+) . 208, 210
Driving abroad .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 150
Fuel filter . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 300 Interior m irror ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... ... 6, 49
Fog lights .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 145
Fuel gauge . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 119 Interruption of power supply .. 52, 136, 139
Reverse lights . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 145
Fuel lev el . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 119 Easytronic .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 183
Warning dev ice ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 140
Fuel system, diesel .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 241 Electric windows .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 52
Heated exterior mirrors ... .... .... ..... ... 14, 157
Fuse ex trac tor ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 261 Selector lev er lock .. ..... .... ..... .... .. 189, 197
Heated front seats . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 157
Fuses .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 259 IS OFIX .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 91
Heated rear window .. ..... .... .... ..... ... 14, 157
Index 357
J Lumba r support . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 66
O
Jac k .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 251 M O ctane numbers .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 202, 310
Jump leads . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 243 Main bea m ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 11, 144 O il change .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 300
K Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... . 271, 273 O il consumption .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 298
C ontrol indicator . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 117 O il filter change . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 300
Key
Maintenance .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 294 O il lev el . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 298
extending ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 28 Air conditioning system ... .... ..... .... ..... 175 O il pressure ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 113
ig nition lock ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 7
Antifreeze protection .. .... .... ..... .... ..... 301 O ils .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 298
Locking d oors .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 38 Brake fluid .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 302 O pen&Start system ... ..... .... . 17, 23, 32, 112
Remove ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 18
Brakes .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 221 O perating temperature . .... ..... .... ..... .... . 199
Starting the engine .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 7, 17 C atalytic converter . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 207 O utside tem perature g auge .. .... ..... .... . 123
Keys ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 28
Engine oil .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 298, 300 O verrun ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 199, 201
L Fuel consum ption ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 201
P
Tyre pressure .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 225
Langua ge selection ..... .... ..... .... .... .127, 132
Tyres .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 227 Paintwork dam age ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 290
Lashing eyes .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 81
Windscreen wiper ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 303 Panoramic windscreen ... .... ..... .... 25, 48, 53
Leather trim ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 291
Manua l transmission, see Transmission 15 Parking . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 18, 214
Level control sy stem .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 216
Mechanical anti-theft locking system .. .. 39 Parking distance sensor . .... ..... .... ..... .... . 214
Lighting .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .116, 143
Mirrors ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 6, 48, 49 Parking lights ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 148
Driv ing abroad .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 150
Misted windows . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 160, 171 Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ..... .... .. 272, 275
Loa ding .. .... .... ..... .... ..... . 235, 321, 322, 324
Mobile telephone .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 152 Parking the vehicle .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 18
Loc king doors ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 38
Motorwa y lighting .. .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 25, 147 Parts . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 295
Loc king from the inside ... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 40
Muffler, see Ex haust system ... ..... .... ..... 206 Pedals ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 199
Loc ks .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 291 Performance . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 316
Lub rica nts .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .298, 309 N Petrol .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 202, 310, 311
Lug gage compartment Neutral, transmission . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 15 Pinking .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 202
Bulb replacement ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 288
Number plate lig hting ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 286 Pollen filter .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 174
FlexOrga nizer .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 80 Number plate lig hts Power assisted steering ,
Lighting .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 150
Bulb replacem ent ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 286 see electro-hydraulic power assisted
Loading .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... ... 84, 235, 325 Number plates ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 307 steering ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 198
Locking ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 43
Power steering,
Safety net ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 78, 79 see electro-hydraulic power assisted
Lug gage compartment cover . .... ..... .... ..76
steering ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 198
358 In dex
Preheating .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 17, 118 Run-flat tyres . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 229 S peed ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 200, 201
Preheating switch ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 17 Running-in Fuel consumption .. ..... .... ..... .... .. 200, 201
Puddle lig ht .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 150 Brakes .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 221 S peedometer ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 119
Pushing, towing .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 242 S port mode ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 115
S S port prog ra mme .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 23, 210
Q Safeguard against unauthorised use 7, 19 S ta rter switch ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..7
Q uick heat ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... 159, 166, 170 Safety accessories .. .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 90, 247 S ta rting the engine ... ..... .... . 7, 29, 177, 242
Safety net .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 78, 79 Self-help .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 242
R Saving energy .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 200 S team-jet cleaners .... ..... .... ... 235, 291, 293
Radio . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .140, 151 Sea t adjustment ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 3, 64 S teering column lock . ..... .... ..... .... ..... ... 7, 18
Radio equipment (C B) . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 152 Sea t belts .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 88, 291 S teering w heel a djustment ..... .... ..... .... .... ..7
Radio reception .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .140, 151 Sea t height adjustm ent .. .... .... ..... .... ... 4, 65 S teering w heel remote control ... .... 22, 151
Radio remote control Sea t occupancy recognition ... ..... .... ..... .. 99 S towa ge c om partments .... ..... .... ..... .... . 110
Central locking system ..... ... 2, 23, 30, 33 Sea t position .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 67 S un roof ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 54
Rain sensor . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... ... 13, 141, 303 Sea ts .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 3, 64, 66 S un v isors .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 25, 48, 53, 150
Reading lights ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 149 hea ted ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 157 S unblind .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 54
Rear light cluster . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 143 Selector lev er .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..177, 184, 191 S ystem settings .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 126, 131
Bulb replacement ..... .... ..... .... .... .277, 283 Selector lev er lock ... .... ..... ..15, 16, 184, 191
Rear sc reen w iper ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 142 Self-diagnosis .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 87, 98 T
Rear window Self-help .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 241 Tables ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 110
wa sh system . ..... .... ..... ... 13, 142, 289, 305 Automatic transm ission .. .... ..... .... ..... 189 Tachometer .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 119
Refuelling .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 203 Electric sun roof .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 55 Tail lights ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 143
Fuel filler cap ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 203 Electric windows .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 52 Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ..... .... .. 277, 283
Remote control Information disp la y ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 124 Tailgate ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 43
Central locking system ..... ... 2, 23, 30, 33 Radio remote control .. .... .... ..... .... . 31, 37 Tank
Steering wheel . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ...22, 151 Serv ic e ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 294 Fuel gauge ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 119
Replacem ent keys .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 28 Serv ic e interv al display ... .... .... ..... .... ..... 296 Technical data .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 308
Reverse lig hts Serv ic e work ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 296 Telephone, see Mobile telephone ... .... . 152
Bulb replacement ..... .... ..... .... .... .277, 283 Serv ic e, Maintenance . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 294 Temperature regulation .... ..... .... .. 158, 170
Rollover protection sy stem .. .... .... ..... .... .. 59 Side airbags ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 95 Temporary spare wheel . .... ..... .... ..230, 250
Roof lining .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 25, 48, 53 Signal system . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 12 Tightening torque . .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 255, 337
Roof load .... .... .84, 198, 201, 321, 322, 324 Spare fuses ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 260 Tilt angle
Roof rack .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... 201, 231, 325 Spare keys . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 28 seats . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... ... 4, 65
Roof racks .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... 201, 231, 325 Spare wheel ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..249, 250, 252 Time .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 124, 127
Index 359
Tools .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 251 Tw inTop .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 56 Weights ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 321, 322, 324
Towing eq uipm ent . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 232 C losing the roof .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 57 Wheels .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 224
Towing ey e . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .244, 246 O pening the roof .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 56 Wheels, tyres . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 224
Trailer S tability Assist (TSA) . .... .... ..... .... 237 Rollover protection . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 59 Wind deflector ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 61
Transm ission display ... . 121, 176, 184, 190 Warning buzzers . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 58 Windows
Transm ission, autom atic . ..... .... .... ..... 15, 16 Wind deflector .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 61 Demisting and defrosting 160, 163, 167,
automa tic mode . ..... .... ..... .... .... .184, 191 Ty re c hains ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 230, 337 171
Driv ing programme . .... ..... .... .... .185, 192 Ty re c ondition .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 227 Windscreen w ash system ... ..... .... .... 13, 142
Fault .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .188, 196 Ty re p ressure . .... ..... .... .... 24, 218, 225, 337 Antifreeze protection . .... ..... .... ..... .... . 305
Interrup tion of power sup ply ... .189, 197 Ty re p ressure monitoring system .... ..... 218 Capac ities . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 349
Kickdown .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .187, 194 Ty re repair kit .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 256 Wa sh fluid reserv oir .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 305
Selector lever ... .... ..... ... 15, 184, 191, 192 Windscreen w ip er .. .... ..... .... ..... 12, 141, 303
Selector lever lock .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 15 U Winter mode
Winter prog ra mme .. .... ..... .... .... .186, 193 Units of measure .... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 127, 133 Starting-off a id .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 180
Transm ission, Easytronic Unleaded fuel .... ..... .... ..... .... ..202, 204, 310 Winter operation
Driv ing programmes .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 179 Used oil .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 300 Battery ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 199
fault ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 182 Coolant, antifreeze ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 301
Interrup tion of power sup ply ... ..... .... 183
V Fuel consumption .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 201
Kickdown .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 180 Valve cap key .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 226, 337 Fuel for diesel engines ... ..... .... ..... .... . 202
Selector lever ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 15, 178 Vauxhall a la rm system ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 44 Heating . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ...154, 163, 167
Winter prog ra mme .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 180 Vehicle care ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 289 Locks ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 291
Transm ission, manual . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..15 Vehicle decommissioning ... .... ..... .... ..... 307 Tyre cha ins ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 230, 337
Tread dep th ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 227 Vehicle identification number ..... .... ..... 309 Window demisting and defrosting .. . 160
Trip computer ..... .... ..... .... ..... ... 22, 128, 134 Vehicle keys, see K eys ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 28 Windscreen wash sy stem,
Trip odometer ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 120 Vehicle recommissioning .... .... ..... .... ..... 307 antifreeze protection .. .... ..... .... ..... .... . 305
Triple information display .... .... .... ..... .... 122 Vehicle tools ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 251 Winter programm e .... ..... .... ... 180, 186, 193
TSA (Trailer Stability Assist) . .... .... ..... .... 237 Ventilation . ..... .... ..... .... .. 154, 159, 166, 172 Winter tyres ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 229, 337
Turn signal lights .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 11
Turn signals
W X
Bulb replacement ..... .... ..... 276, 277, 283 Warning buzzers .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 140 Xenon head lig ht system .... ..... .... ..... .... . 273
Twin Audio . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 23, 152 Warning messages . .... ..... .... ..125, 130, 138 Bulb replacement .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 273
Warning triangle .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 247 Driv ing abroad .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 150
Wash fluid reserv oir,
windsc reen w ash system ... .... ..... .... ..... 305
360 In dex
Index 361
362 In dex
Owner’s Manual
ASTRA
Operation, Safety and Maintenance
©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.
A ST R A
Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts, is not
permitted without prior written consent from Vauxhall Motors
Ltd.
All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly
reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this
manual are based on the latest production information
available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without
notice.
Edition: January 2007.
TS 1612-B-07

Astra H OwnersManual - Jan07 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Astra H OwnersManual - Jan07 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Astra H OwnersManual - Jan07 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner’s Manual

©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.

Operation, Safety, Maintenance

Winter tyres Front Rear Front Rear

Pict ure no: 16968t.tif Picture no: 17333t.tif

Pi cture no: 16976t.tif Pict ure no: 16981t.tif

Control indicato rs A Engine electronics,

r Fog t ail li ght,

To select P or R, press button on selector Before starting off, check:

Press button again to repeat the starting

Pi cture no: 17005t.tif Pict ure no: 17033t.tif

To activa te the mec hanical anti-theft

Pi cture no: 17006t.tif Pict ure no: 17007t.tif

Pi cture no: 17011t.tif Picture no: S0013209.ti f Picture no: 17013t.tif

Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36

Pi cture no: 17126t.tif Picture no: Picture no: 17979t.tif

The roof is opera ted w ith the buttons on

Pi cture no: 17980t.tif Pict ure no: 17981t.tif

Keys, Doors, Windows, Replacement keys

Store person al veh icle settin gs in

Centra l locki ng, mechanic al anti -theft Fault

If the brake or clutch peda l is depressed ,

Ra dio remote control synchronisation

Pi cture no: 17040t.tif Pict ure no: 17041t.tif

Mec hanical a nti-theft lock ing system 3,

Pi cture no: 17034t.tif Picture no: 17043t.tif

z With the Open&S tart sy stem 3 the

Fault For Astra TwinTop with open roof - after

Vauxhall alarm system 3

4. Switch on Va ux ha ll alarm system. LED

If a system fa ult occ urs, contact a

In the event of a fault in the radio remote

Pi cture no: 17034t.tif

Pi cture no: 17140t.tif Pict ure no: 17141t.tif

Pi cture no: 17138t.tif Picture no: 17139t.tif

Note Overloa d Fault

Blockage of boot lid on closure 3 Wind d eflect or 3

Pict ure no: 18457t.tif

The seat bac k can only be tipped forwards

Pi cture no: 16972t.tif Pict ure no: 16975t.tif

The seat back rests m ust not be tilted too

Pi cture no: 17959t.tif Pict ure no: 17350t.tif

Folding the centre seat backrest m akes it

Pi cture no: 17067t.tif Pict ure no: 17062t.tif

The three-point seat b elt for the c entre rear

Pi cture no: 17068t.tif Pict ure no: 17069t.tif

Pi cture no: 17077t.tif Pict ure no: 17078t.tif

Pi cture no: 17079t.tif Pict ure no: 17080t.tif

z If the loading aid is not in its lower end

Three-stage safety system

z The belt tensioner and airbag sy stem

Three- point seat b el ts on rear outer seats

B 1 = Lim ited, only with seat occupancy Note

In ad dition, the side airb ag system 3 will

The side airba gs will not be triggered in the

The three-point seat belt m ust always be

The curtain airbags will not be triggered in

Seat oc cupancy recognition 3

Pict ure no: 17117t.tif 9 Warnin g